The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutB11-0017 Project Manual Volume 2 Divisions 10-49 02-23-11� � � BE�1l�Di,��+ � GA�ZE conzultiog eigineers, inc. LP��1 . � � � ._ ENG4NEEfi#NG INC. �lARY HARi DE51Gh! �,,,�•-t3,1?�u ,N �,�o.�,�.,��. �o.��,,. �,�.o.�� rf ; � �rti; �4�' �� '� '�' �. , , � � a� v � �"��a� _ � �%� � �,� ��`�: a . A ; � � � � �� iE � ��•? � E �� '` A d a y ,_ fia � . _.... .t ......a�.�'A� PROJECT MANUAL SPECIFICATION SECTIONS VOLUME 02 �ivisioNS 10 — 49 FO R ;. iV1/lt� I�.• LIONSHEAD TRANSIT WELCOME CENTER � �... � � V l� i� D � F�B 2 3�a» i �� , TOWt� O �p �i�.l � CONSTRUCTION 18 FEBRUARY 2011 � - D � ' � � SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 TABLE OF CONTENTS A. The following overall Project Documents, each dated as follows, form a part of the basis for the Contract Documents: VOLUME 01 SECTION DIVISIONS 00 - 9 TITLE DATE ISSUE DIVISION 00 — INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION, PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 0101 00 0107 00 0110 00 0115 00 2000 00 3000 00 4100 00 5000 00 7100 00 7300 00 9100 00 9113 00 9300 Cover Page Project Title a�d General Information Professional Sea/s Table of Contents List of Orawings Instructions for Procurement Available Information Bid Forms Contracting Forms Contracting Definitions and Explanations Supplemental Conditions Contract Document Forms Addendum 01 Project Forms OIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 01 2300 01 2500 01 2600 01 2900 01 3100 01 3200 01 3300 01 4100 01 4200 01 4300 01 4500 01 5000 01 6000 01 6116 01 7000 Summary Alternates Substitution Procedures Contract Modification Procedures Payment Procedures Project Management and Coordination Construction Progress Documentation Submittal Procedures Regulatory Requirements References Quality Assurance Quality Control Temporary Facilities and Controls Product Requirements Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions Execution and Closeout Requirements , DIVISION 02 — EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 3200 Geotechnical Investigations ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 00-0110-1 ' Vail, Colorado 18 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 18 FEB 2011 18 FEB 2011 18 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 18 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 18 FEB 2011 18 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 18 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 03 02 03 03 03 02 02 03 02 02 02 03 03 02 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 04 FEB 2011 02 Table of Contents 18 February 2011 Addendum 7 02 4100 Demolition DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 3660 Integrally Colored Concrete 03 4100 Precast Structural Concrete 03 4500 Precast Architectural Concrete DIVISION 04 — MASONRY 04 2000 Unit Masonry 04 4200 Exterior Stone Cladding DIVISION 05 — METALS 05 5000 Metal Fabrications 05 5305 Metal Gratings and Floor Plates 05 7300 Decorative Metal Railings DIVISION 06 — WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 1000 Rough Carpentry 06 1323 Heavy Timber Construction 06 1500 Wood Decking 061600 Sheathing 06 1800 Glue-Laminated Construction 06 2000 Finish Carpentry 06 4100 Custom Casework A6-4�88 aA�aed-Pa�eGc�g 06 4216 Wood-Veneer Paneling DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 1113 Bituminous Dampproofing 07 1400 Fluid Applied Water Proofing 07 1800 Traffic Coatings 07 2100 Thermal Insulation 07 2129 Sprayed Insulation 07 2500 Weather Barriers 07 2600 Underslab Vapor Barrier 07 4213 Metal WaH Panels 07 4264 Meta/ Composite Materia/ Wall Panels 07 4623 Wood Siding 07 5300 Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 07 6100 Sheet Metal Roofing 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 6500 Flexible Flashing 07 7100 Vegetated Roof System 07 8100 Applied Fireproofing 07 8400 Firestopping 07 9005 Joint Sealers DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 00-0110- 2 Vail, Colorado �I 04 FEB 2011 02 � 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 02 02 02 02 04 FEB 2011 02 04 FEB 2011 02 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 M C� C� T 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 � 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 04 FEB 2011 02 Table of Contents 18 February 2011 Addendum 1 08 1433 Style and Rail Wood Doors 08 3100 Access Doors and Panels 08 3300 Coiling Doors and Grilles 08 3516 Folding Grilles 08 4229 Automatic Entrances 08 4313 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 08 5113 Fire Rated Aluminum Windows 08 7100 Door Hardware 08 8000 Glazing 08 8300 Mirrors 08 9100 Louvers DIVISION 09 — FINISHES 09 0600 Schedule for Finishes 09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 2400 Portland Cement Plastering 09 3000 Tiling 09 5100 Acoustical Ceiling 09 6500 Resilient Flooring 09 6566 Resilient Athletic Flooring 09 6813 Tile Carpeting 09 9000 Painting and Coating 09 9300 Staining and Transparent Finishing 09 9600 High-Performance Coatings 09 9850 Sheet FRP Wall Panels VOLUME 02 DIVISIONIO-49 __ _ _ _ _ _ . .. _ _ Cover Page DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 101400 Signage 10 2113.13 Meta/ Toilet Compartments 10 2601 Wall and Corner Guards 10 2800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 3100 Manufactured Fireplaces 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISON 11 — EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS 12 3600 Countertops 12 4940 Rolle� Shades DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING EQUIPMENT Lio�shead Transit Welcome Center 00-0110- 3 Vail, Cotorado 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 18 FEB 2011 18 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 18 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 02 02 03 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 03 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 18 FEB 2011 03 04 FEB 2011 1 S FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 02 03 02 02 02 02 04 FEB 2011 02 04 FEB 2011 02 Table of Contents 18 February 2011 Addendum 1 14 2010 Passenger Elevators DIVISION 15-20 — (RESERVED) (NOT USED) DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPPRESION 21 0300 Fire Protection DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING 22 0010 22 0050 22 0700 22 1116 22 1119 22 1316 22 1319 22 1413 22 1423 Piumbing General Provisions Plumbing Basic Materials and Methods Plumbing Insulation Domestic Water Piping � Domestic Water Piping Specialties Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Facility Storm Drainage Piping Storm Drainage Piping Specialties DIVISION 23 — HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0010 23 0050 23 0593 23 0900 23 1123 23 2113 23 2300 23 3113 23 3300 23 3423 23 3713 23 5100 23 5216 23 6313 23 8219 23 8239 23 8316 Mechanical General Provisions Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Instrumentation and Control for HVAV Facility Natural-Gas Piping Hydronic Piping Refrigerant Piping Metal Ducts Air Duct Accesso�ies HVAC Power Ventilators Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks Condensing Boilers Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers Fan Coil Units Unit Heaters Radiant-Heating Hydronic Piping DIVISION 24 — (RESERVED) (NOT USED) DIVIStON 25 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION Not Used DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL 26 0010 26 0519 26 0526 26 0529 26 0533 26 0923 26 2416 26 2726 Electrical General Provisions Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Lighting Control Devices Panelboards Wiring Devices � 18 FEB 2019 03 � � 18 FEB 2011 03 � 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 �� C �i � � � � 02 � 02 02 02 02 � 02 02 02 � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 00-0110- 4 Table of Contents Vail, Colorado 18 Febn.iary 2011 � Addendum 1 26 2816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 5100 Interior Lighting 26 5600 Exterior Lighting DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS Not Used DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 3111 Digital Addressab/e Fire-A/arm System DIVISION 29-30 — (RESERVED) (NOT USED) DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK 312000 Earthwork 31 2500 Erosion and Sedimentation Control DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1123 Aggregate Base Course 32 1200 Fiexible Pavement 32 1300 Rigid Pavement 32 1301 Concrete Paving joints 32 1302 Concre#e Paving Curing 32 1303 Cold Weather Concreting 32 1304 Hot Weather Concreting 321413 Interlocking Concrete Unit Pavers 32 1414 PaverEdge 32 8000 Irrigation 32 9000 Landscape General Conditions 32 9100 Planting Preparation 32 9113 Topsoil 32 9643 Tree Transplanting DIVISION 33 — UTIUTIES 33 1100 Water Distribution 33 3100 Sanitary Sewer System 33 4000 Storm Drainage 33 8100 Electric, Communication, Conduits, and Gas Systems (Shallow Utilities) DIVISION 34 — TRANSPORTATION Not Used DIVISION 35 — WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 36-39 — (RESERVED) (NOT USED) DIVISION 40 — PROCESS INTEGRATION 04 FEB 2011 02 04 FEB 2011 02 04 FEB 2011 02 18 FEB 2011 03 04 FEB 2011 02 04 FEB 2011 02 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 04 FEB 2011 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 00-0110- 5 Table of Contents Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum 1 Not Used DIVISION 41 — MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 42 — PROCESS HEATING, COOLiNC, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 43 — PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 44 — POLLUTION CONTROL Not Used DIVISION 45 — INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 46-47 — (RESERVED) (NOT USED) DIVISION 48 — ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION Not Used DIViSION 49 — (RESERVED) (NOT USED) PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 00-0110- 6 Table of Contents Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum 1 i 1 SECTION 101400 SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Room and door signs. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2002. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and backg�ound colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Approved Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment. D. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or chips from manufacturer's full color range for ArchitecYs approval. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperatu�e. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Flat Signs - Basis of Design: 1. CSN Office: www.csnoffice.com. 2. Products: a. Headline Sign ADA Restroom Sign, Men Wheelchair Accessible Symbol, Molded Plastic, 6 inches x 9 inches (150 mm x 230 mm); Model #USS4815. b. Headline Sign ADA Restroom Sign, Women Wheelchair Accessible Symbol, Molded Plastic, 6 inches x 9 inches (150 mm x 230 mm); Model #USS4814. c. Headline Sign, Series "Janito�" Sign, 9 inches wide (230 mm) x 1/2 inch deep (12.5 mm) x 3 inches high (75 mm); Model #USS4761. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. � Lionshead Transit Center 10 1400 - 1 SIGNAGE Vail, Cotorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADAAG and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. 2.03 SIGN TYPES A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame. 1. Edges: Square. 2. Comers: Radiused. 3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive. 2.04 ACCESSORIES ' A. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Locate signs where indicated on drawings. 1. If no location is indicated obtain ArchitecYs instructions: D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items. Lionshead Transit Center Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION 10 1400 - 2 � � �� l u � � � � � � SIGNAGE � 04 February 2011 Construction SECTION 10 2113.13 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. B. Section 10 2800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVEREQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Samples: Submit two samples of pa�tition panels, 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Toilet Compartments: 1. General Partitions Mfg. Corp; Product "Series 40-5": www.generalpartitions.com. 2. Global Steel Products Corp; Product "Floor Anchored/Overhead Braced/Stainless Steel #4 Satin Finish": www.globalpa�titions.com. 3. Metpa� Corp; Product "FP-500; The Cori�thian": www.metpar.com. 4. Sanymetal, A Crane Plumbing Company; Product "Academy": www.sanymetal.com. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Stainless steel, floor-mounted headrail-braced. B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, formed and Gosed edges; comers made with corner clips or mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 1. Panel Faces: 20 gage (0.9 mm). 2. Door Faces: 22 gage (0_8 mm). 3. Pilaster Faces: 20 gage (0.9 mm)_ 4. Reinforcement: 12 gage (2.5 mm). , Lionshead Transit Center 10 2713.13 - 1 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 5. Intemal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. C. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Door Width: 24 inch (610 mm). 3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch (915 mm), out-swinging. 4. Height: 58 inch (1 473 mm). D. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch (175 mm) high, concealing floor fastenings. B. Head Rails: Hollow stainless steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch (25 x 41 mm) size, with anti-grip strips and cast socket wall brackets. C. Brackets: Polished chrome-plated non-ferrous cast metal. D. Hardware: Polished stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Thumb turn or sliding door latch with exterioremergency access feature. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; two per compartment, both mounted on door, as located by Architect. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. 2.05 FINISHING A. Stainless Steel Compartments: No. 4 finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch (9 to 13 mm) space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). O O � � � � � � � � � � ' � ' Lionshead Transit Center 10 2113.13 - 2 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch (5 mm). B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position. C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. I ' Lionshead Transit Center Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION 10 2113.13 - 3 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 04 February 2011 Construction J � k � � �I �:, I � � � � � � �� , ' � I ' I ' SECTION 10 2113.13 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. B. Section 10 2800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel ' Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Toilet Compartments: 1. General Pa�titions Mfg. Corp; Product "Series 40-5": www.gene�alpartitions.com. 2. Global Steel Products Corp; Product "Floor Anchored/Overhead Braced/Stainless Steel #4 Satin Finish": www.globalpa�titions.com. 3. Metpar Corp; Product "FP-500; The Corinthian": www.metpar.com. 4. Sanymetal, A Crane Plumbing Company; Product "Academy": www.sanymetal.com. 5. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc; Product "Stain/ess Stee/ - Standard": www.hadrian- inc.com. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Stainless steel, floor-mounted headrail-braced. B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, formed and closed edges; corners made with corner clips or mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 1. Panel Faces: 20 gage (0.9 mm). 2. Door Faces: 22 gage (0.8 mm). 3. Pilaster Faces: 20 gage (0.9 mm). Lionshead Transit Center 10 2113.13 -1 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum 1 � 4. Reinforcement: 12 gage (2.5 mm). � 5. Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. � C. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Door Width: 24 inch (610 mm). � 3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch (915 mm), out-swinging. 4. Height: 58 inch (1 473 mm). D. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing. � 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch (175 � mm) high, concealing floor fastenings. B. Head Rails: Hollow stainless steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch (25 x 41 mm) size, with anti-grip strips and cast socket wall brackets. � C. Brackets: Polished chrome-plated non-ferrous cast metal. D. Hardware: Polished stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. � 2. Thumb turn or sliding door latch with exterior emergency access feature. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. � 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; two per compartment, both mounted on door, as located by Architect. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. _ 2.05 FINISHING A. Stainless Steel Compartments: No. 4 finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. C. Verify correct spacing of and befinreen plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufactu�er's instnactions. B. Maintain 3J8 to 1/2 inch (9 to 13 mm) space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). � u Lionshead Transit Center 10 2113.13 - 2 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS ' Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum 1 � B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch (5 mm). B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position. C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. ' Lionshead Transit Center Vail, Colorado I , END OF SECTION 10 2113.13 - 3 MfTAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 18 February 2011 Addendum 1 � �I 0 �l �J 0 s � 0 SECTION 10 2601 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for wall and corner guard anchors. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Wall construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough-in measurements. C. Samples: Submit two sections of corner guard, 12 inch (300 mm) long, illustrating component design, configuration, color and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: 1. Wall and Corner Guards: a. Arden Architectural Specialties: www.ardenarch.com. b. InPro Corporation: www.inprocorp.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Type 1: Corner Guard - Flush-Mounted: 3" Extruded one-piece unit, installed with screws. B. Type 2: End Wall Protector - Flush Mounted: 3" Extruded one-piece unit, installed with screws. 1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 2. Size: 2 inches (51 mm) per wing. 3. Length: One piece; length as indicated on drawings. C. Mounting Brackets and Attachment Hardware: Appropriate to component and substrate. 2.03 FABRICATtON A. Pre-drill holes for attachment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings, concealed blocking, and anchors are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position to wall framing members only. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Level or Plane For Visible Length: 1/8 inch (3 mm). ' Lionshead Transit Center 10 2601 - 1 WAI.L AND CORNER GUARDS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction END OF SECTION � � � � � � � � � Lionshead Transit Center 10 2601 - 2 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction SECTION 10 2800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms and utility rooms. B. Grab bars. C. Trash and recycling receptacles. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Owner furnished Work. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wall framing and plates. C. Section 08 8300 - Mirrors: Frameless glass mirrors. D. Section 10 2113.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM F 2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing Tables for Commercial Use; 2004. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVEREQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design (Unless Otherwise Noted): 1. Toilet Accessories: a. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. B. Keys: Provide ten keys for each accessory to Town of Vail; master key all lockable accessories. C. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type. � Lionshead Transit Center 10 2800 - 1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction E. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Electric Hair and Hand Dryer: 1. Drying Time: 15 seconds. 2. Air Volume: 160 cfm (274 cu m/h). 3. Voltage: 120 volts. 4. Sensor Delay-On: 0.6 second. 5. Sensor Delay-Off: 2 seconds. 6. Cover Finish: Brushed stai�less steel. 7. Dryer Mounting Height (From Floor to Bottom of Dryer): a. Men: 45 inches (1145 mm). b. Women: 43 inches (1090 mm). c. Teenagers: 41 inches (1040 mm). d. Young Children: 35 inches (890 mm). e. Persons with Physical Disabilities: 37 inches (940 mm). 8. Manufacturer - Basis of Design: a. Excel Dryer; Product : XLERATOR; Model XL-SB with Recess Kit: www.exceldryer.com. 9. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Waste Receptacle: Stainless steel, freestanding style. 1. One each in'Womens 105' and 'Mens 107'. 2. Minimum capacity: 7.25 gallons (28.5 liters). 3. Product: Model WB29RSS; manufactured by United Receptacle: www.csnsupply.com. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Grab Bars: Heary duty stainless steel, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) wall thickness, safety grip surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. 1. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings. 2. Product: Model 832 Series; manufactured by Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Stainless steel, back-to-back partition mounting with adjustable flanges, self-closing door, locking bottom panel with full-length stainless steel piano-type hinge, removable receptacle. 1. Product: Model 4721-15; manufactured by Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. a. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. E. Baby Changing Station: Wall-mounted folding diaper changing station, meeting or exceeding ASTM F 2285. 1. Style: Vertical. 2. Material: Polyethylene. 3. Mounting: Surface. 4. Color. Cream. 5. Minimum Rated Load: 250 Ibs (113.4 kg). 6. Manufacturer - Basis of Design: a. Koala Kare Products: Model K6101-00: www.koalabear.com. Lionshead Transit Center 10 2800 - 2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �� i a � � � �J ' ' ' , ' � , ' ' , b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. F. Child Protection Seat: Wall-mounted, flip-down child seat. 1. Material: Polyethylene. 2. Mounting: Surface. 3. Color: Cream. 4. Minimum Rated Load: 50 Ibs (22.7 kg) 5. Manufacturer - Basis of Design: a. Koala Kare Products: Model K6102-00: www.koalabear.com. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. G. Wire Basket: Wall-mounted hospital-style basket for personal belongings. 1. Material: Wire with copolymer coating. 2. Mounting: Surface. 3. Color: Gray. 4. Manufacturer - Basis of Design: a. R& B Wire Products: Model RB-2255: www.rbwire.com. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. H. Litter and Recycling Receptacles: Stainless steel, traingular and trapezoidal, freestanding style. 1. One each, located as indicated on drawings. 2. Minimum Capacity: Tringular - 16 gallons (60 liters); trapezoidal - 24 gallons (90 liters). 3. Manufacturer - Basis of Design: Forms+Surfaces: www.forms-surfaces.com. 4. Product: a. Trapezoidal Litter Receptacle: Model SLTRD-24L. b. Tringular Paper Recycling Recetacle: Model SLTRD-16P. c. Bottle and Can Recycling Receptacle: Model SLTRD-16B d. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.05 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES ' A. Mop and Broom Hotder: 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-shaped channel. 1. Holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders. � ' 2. Length: 24 inches (610 mm). 3. Product: Model 9953 manufactured by Bradley Copration: ww.bradley.com. a. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. , CI, , � ' ' ' B. Combination Utility Shelf/Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick stainless steel, Type 304, with 1/2 inch (12 mm) returned edges, 0.06 inch (1.6 mm) steel wall brackets. 1. Hooks: 4, 0.06 inch (1.6mm) stainless steel rag hooks at shelf front. 2. Mop/broom holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders at shelf front. 3. Length: 34 inches (864 mm). 4. Product: Model 9933 manufactured by Bradley Corporation: www.bradley.com. a. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before sta�ting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. Lionshead Transit Center 10 2800 - 3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION � � � � � � ' LJ Lionshead Transit Center 10 2800 - 4 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES , Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction ' ' SECTION 10 3100 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES , PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES , A. Scope of this Section includes providing all labor and material required to perform the Work described herein and/or as shown on Drawings: 1. Manufactured steel box fi�eplace, including screens, gas log set with burner and grate, electronic ignition, and insulated chimney flue and associated roof flashings. , 2. Refer to specific areas listed below to determine scope of work for each. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: ' A. Section 09 2760 — Gypsum Board Systems: Metal Stud Framing B. Division 15 sections for gas piping and shut-off valve. , C. Division 16 for electrical wiring 1.3 REFERENCES A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 103 — Factory Built Chimneys for Residential Type and Building Heating Appliances 2. 127 — Factory Built fireplaces B. 2009 International Building Code (IBC) 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Unit: Recessed wall mounted, concealed chimney flue type, cubical type. 1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS � A. Fuel: Natural Gas 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate fire box rough opening dimensions, rough opening sizes for chimney flue, gas and electric service, and flue construction including roof jack and flashing. C. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data, including fire box cabinet dimensions, clearances required from adjacent dissimilar construction, required gas and electrical services, and applicable regulatory agency approvals. D. Samples: Provide samples of finishes for all exposed accessories E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation procedures and component installation sequence, clearances and tolerances from adjacent construction, and other requirements for a fully functional system. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Closeout Submittals: lionshead Transit Welcome Center 10-3100 -1 Manufactured Fireplaces Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products requiring electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. 0 Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Handle products to prevent damage and deterioration during storage and handling. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES (TYPE 1 FIREPLACE — EVENT SPACE 301) A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Heatilator; Element-42 2. Majestic Co.; SHR42A 3. Lennox Hearth Products; LBR-43 B. Substitutions: Comply with Division 1 requirements C. Components: 1. Fire Box: Formed insulated steel cabinet, square shaped interior, configured to include chimney outlet and cleanout, refractory brick lining. 2. Hearth Opening: 48inches wide x 44 1/8" high x 25-5/8 inches deep 3. Flue Diameter: 10 inches 4. Combustion Air Source: Room 5. Air Jacket: Steel enclosure surrounding firebox, air inlets and outlets. 6. Exposed Cladding: Steel (Dark Bronze Color) 7. Flue Construction: Insulated stainless, double wall steel sandwich construction, modular size sections with elbows and spacing collars to permit site assembly, air and fi�e stop collars, elbows, elbow offsets, tees, supports, roofing storm collar, �oof flashing; nominal inside diameter of 10 inches. 8. Roof Terminations: Square termination cap. D. Accessories: 1. Fire-stop Spacer: Noncombustible device designed to fit between chimney riser and penetrated floor or roof construction framing. 2. Roof Flashing: Pre-painted sheet metal, configured to fit tightly to chimney riser and seal to roofing system. 3. Fire Box Grate: Wrought Steel. 4. Gas Logs Set: "Charred Summit Pine Oak" with Manufacturer's recommended "High Altitude burner and valves_ 5. Wall Switch: WSK-21-HTI lockable wall switch (Color Off-White). 6. Spa�k Arrestor Screen: Non-Operable °Simon Mesh" pattern, black color. 7. Fan Kit: GFK1606 8. Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless Steel Type. 9. Framing: Manufacturer's steel stud framing kit for specified fireplaces. 10. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard flue and combustion air duct sealant. 2.2 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES (TYPE 2 FlREPLACE — WAITING AREA 109) A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Rasmussen Iron Works, Inc., Rumford 2. Fireplace: R3636 Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 10-3100 - 2 Vail, Colorado Manufactured Fireplaces 04 February 2011 Construction � � � J u � � u 3. Throat: TR36 4. Damper: AR24 5. Smoke Chamber: SC12x12 6. Flue: 12x12 7. Gas Log Set: Retiring Tipi RF-R 36 gas log sets with TNA(E)24 burner and RPK3-TNA-F valves and lockable wall switch. 8. Fire Box: Manufacturers Pre-Made Fire Box Units, herringbone pattern. 9. Decorative Wrought Iron Rail: Refer to 4240's Interior Design Manual. B. Accessories 1. Firestop Spacer: Non-combustible device designed to fit between chimney riser and . penetrated floor or roof construction framing. 2. Roof Flashing: Pre-finished sheet metal. 3. Fire Box Grate: Wrought steel. 4. Combustion Air Intake Duct: By Manufacturer. 5. Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel type. 6. Framing: Manufacturer's steel stud framing kit fo� specified fireplaces. 7. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard flue and combustion air duct sealant. C. Factory Finish 1. Interior Exposed to View Surface: Baked enamel; black color, or masonry. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify prepared openings a�e ready to receive Work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify power supply and fuel source are available. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fireplaces in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. B. Install chimney plumb through prepared openings. C. Secure chimney in opening framing with appropriate fasteners. D. Fire-block chimneys and fireplaces in accordance with UL 103 and UL 127. E. Carefully cut holes for fan wall switch and grilles. F. Install roof flashings to ensure moisture is shed to exterior. G. Startup and adjust to verify proper fuel gas operation and performance and chimney draft. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Chimney from Plumb: '/� inch. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 10 3100 - 3 Manufactured Fireplaces ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �� ' 0 � � 0 SECTION 10 4400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS� A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Roughed-in wall openings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2010. B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Undervvriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions and rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features and color and finish. D. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Exti�guishers - Basis of Design: 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Co; Product: MP5: www.larsensmfg.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets - Basis of Design: 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Co; Product Architectural Series 2409-R6 & 2409-SM: www.larsensmfg.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent_ 1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Muilt-Purpose Dry Chemical Type Fi�e Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage_ 1. Class: A:B:C. 2. Size: 5 pound (2.27 kg). 2.03 FlRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS , Lionshead Transit Center 10 4400 - 1 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick base metal. B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed and Surface mount types as indicated on Drawings. 1. Trim: Rolled Edge, 2-1/2" at semi-recessed. C. Solid Door: 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick steel, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge. Provide nylon catch. 1. Vertical Die Cut Lettering: "Fire Extinguisher". D. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors. E. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. F. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, white color. • G. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 48 inches (1220 mm) from finished floor to the fire extinguisher handle. C. Place e�inguishers in cabinets. END OF SECTION 7 �� _ � � � � � � � � Lionshead Transit Center 10 4400 - 2 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES , Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction SECTION 12 3600 COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A_ Countertops for architectural cabinetwork. B. Countertops for custom casework. C. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops. • 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 4100 - Custom Casework. B. Division 22 - Plumbing: Sinks. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ISSFA-2 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; 2001 (2007). B. NEMA LD 3- High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. C. PS 1- Structural Plywood; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A_ See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedu�es, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation. D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements. F. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. G. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufactu�ers unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.07 WARRANTY 1 Lionshead Transit Center 12 3600 - 1 COUNTERTOPS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional warranty requirements. � C. Correct defective work within a one period after Date of Substantial Completion. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty against cracking and discoloration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Self-supporting high pressure laminate panel with decorative surface over structural members. 1. Panels: Phenolic resin impregnated kraft paper core with melamine impregnated decorative surface papers; NEMA LD 3 Grade CGS. a. Panel Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). b. Core Color: Brown. c. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20. d. Surface Color and Pattern: As selected by 4240 Architecture, 1nc. from manufacturer's futl line. e. Manufacturers - Basis of Design: 1) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com. 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square natural cut sanded and polished to semi-gloss sheen. 3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction; minimum 4 inches (102 mm) high. B. Solid Surfacing Counte�tops: Plastic resin casting over continuous substrate. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch (12 mm), minimum. 2. Solid SurFacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISSFA-2; polyester resin and acrylic blend with 40% recycled content, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20. b. Manufacturers - Basis of Design: 1) Avonite Surfaces: www.avonitesurfaces.com. (a) Product: K1-6636 - "White Sands". 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 3. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch (12 mm), minimum. 4. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches (102 mm) high. 5. Aprons: As indicated on drawings. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply; minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; join lengths using metal splines. B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. C. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, color as selected by Architect.. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections p�acticable, with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. Lionshead Transit Center 12 3600 - 2 COUNTERTOPS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction a � O �.1 !J � �' O � u O a � � a B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches (102 mm), unless otherwise indicated. C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 120 inches (3050 mm) long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. D. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide steel support angles as indicated on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION . 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify 4240 Architecture, Inc. of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to support frame using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required. B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5/8 inch (16 mm). C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. I � lionshead Transit Center Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION 12 3600 - 3 COUNTERTOPS 04 February 2011 Construction � � �� O �I � � � u �� Cl SECTION 12 4940 ROLLER SHADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manualiy operated sunscreen roller shades. B. Electrically operated double-roller sunscreen and room-darkening shades. C. Local group and master control system for shade operation. D. Local group and master control system for shade operation with addressable motors. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies for installation of shade pockets, closu�es and �elated accessories. C. Section 09 6500 - Acoustical Ceilings: Coordination witfi acoustical ceiling systems for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories. D. Division 16 - Electrical: Electric service for motor controls. 1.3 REFERENCES I� CQ C� ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. NFPA 701-99 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. � 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3000. ' B. Submit Environmental Certification and Third Pa�ty Evaluation per Section 1.5 Qualifications. C. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: ' 1. Preparation instn.�ctions and recommendations. 2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features, finishes and operating instructions. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. � 4. Mounting details and instaAation methods. 5. Typical wiring diagrams including integ�ation of motor controtlers with building management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 12-4940 -1 Roller Shades � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction C E. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational clearances, wiring diagrams and relationship to adjacent work. Window Treatment Schedule: For all rolle� shades. Use same room designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details. F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and aluminum finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces. � � � �.J O G. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls. � 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section. � C. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. D. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing. E. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645. F. Perpetual Use Certification: Certify that at the end of the useful life of the shade cloth, that the material can be sent back to the manufacturer for recapture as part of a closed loop of perpetual use and that the material can and will be reconstituted into new yarn, for weaving into new shade cloth. Provide information on each shade band indicating that the shade band can be sent back to the manufacturer for this purpose. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.8 WARRANTY Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 12-4940 - 2 Roller Shades Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction U O �J � � ' � ' ' u , ' A. � C� Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating twenty-five (25) year limited warranty. Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating five (5) year warranty. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. 0 Basis of Design: MechoShade Systems, Inc.; www.mechoshade.com. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 2500. ' 2.2 APPLICATIONS ! SCOPE A. Roller Shade Schedule: � 1. Shade Type 1: Manual operating, chain drive, sunsc�een roller shades at exterior windows of rooms and spaces shown on the Drawings. 2. Shade Type 2: Motorized interior "double", solar and room darkening blackout roller � shades, operating independently of each other, in exterior windows of rooms and spaces as indicated on Drawings, and related motor control systems. ' � �� ' � ' � � � 2.3 SHADE CLOTH A. Visually Transparent Single-Fabric Shadecloth: MechoShade Systems, Inc., EcoVeil group, 1350 , fabricated from TPO for both core yarn and jacket, single thickness, non-raveling 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick fabric. 1. Dense Basket Weave: "1350 series", 5 percent open, 2 by 2 dense basket-weave pattern. 2. Color: 1370 Shadow Grey. B. Room darkening (PVC Free) Shadecloth with opaque acrylic backing: MechoShade Systems, Inc., "Equinox 0100 series", .008 inches thick (.19 mm) blackout material and weighing .94 Ibs. per square yard, comprising of 53% fiberglass, 45% acrylic, 2% poly finish. 1. Color: 0117 Graphite. 2.4 SHADE BAND A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem-pocket, shade roller tube, and the attachmen# of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable. 1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams (including welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all shades within one room. 2. Shade band and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. RoHer tubes less Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 12-4940 - 3 Roller Shades Vail, Colo�ado 04 February 2011 Construction than 1.55 inch (39.37 mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55 inches (64.77 mm) for motorize shades are not acceptable. b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism. c. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable / replaceable with a"snap-on" snap-off" spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets. d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets. e. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of: adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable. 2.5 SHADE FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to jamb, unless specifically indicated otherwise. B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in either direction per 8 feet (2438 mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as follows: 1. Bottom hem weights. C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required. D. For railroaded shadebands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required to meet size requirements and in accordance with seam alignment as acceptable to Architect. Seams shall be properly located. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width, height, or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer's standards. In absence of such standards, assure proper use of seams or battens as required to, and assure the proper tracking of the railroaded multi-width shadebands. E. Provide battens for railroaded shades when width-to-height (W:H) ratios meet or exceed manufacturer's standards. In absence of manufacturer's standards, be responsible for proper use and placement of battens to assure proper tracking and roll of shadebands. F. Blackout shadebands, when used in side channels, shall have horizontally-mounted, roll- formed stainless steel or tempered-steel battens not more than 3 feet (115 mm) on center e�ending fully into the side channels. Battens shall be concealed in an integrally-colored fabric to match the inside and outside colors of the shadeband, in accordance with manufacturer's published standards for spacing and requirements. 1. Battens shall be roll formed of stainless steel or tempered steel and concave to match the contour of the roller tube. 2. Batten pockets shall be self-colored fabric front and back RF welded into the shadedoth. A self-color opaque liner shall be provided front and back to eliminate any see th�ough of the batten pocket that shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) high and be totally opaque. A see-through moire effect, which occurs with multiple layers of transparent fabrics, shall not be acceptable. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 12-4940 - 4 Roller Shades Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction O �J � O � Jr � � � � � � � � � II u � ' ' � � ' � ' i � ' � � � , ' � i � F��Z�IZ�I►1�i�� A. Access and Material Requirements: 1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed. 2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. 3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable. B. Motorized Shade Hardware and Shade Brackets: 1. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel, or heavier, thicker, as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. 2. Provide shade hardware system that allows for field adjustment of motor or replacement of any operable hardware component without requiring removal of brackets, regardless of mounting position (inside, or outside mount). 3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands offset by a maximum of 8-45 degrees from the motor axis between shade bands (4- 22.5 degrees) on each side of the radial line, by a single shade motor (multi-banded shade, subject to manufacturer's design criteria). C. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets: 1. Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change. 2. Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind. 3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind. 4. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multi-banded shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer's design criteria. Connectors shali be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band. 5. Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to be capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees total offset. 6. Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not acceptable 7. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel o� heavier as required to suppo�t 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. 8. Drive Bracket / Brake Assembly: a. MechoShade Drive Bracket model M5 shall be fully integrated with all MechoShade accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia, room darkening side / sill channels, center suppo�ts and connectors for multi-banded shades. b. M5 drive sprocket and b�ake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8 inch (9.525 mm) steel pin. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 12-4940 - 5 Roller Shades Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction ia e. The brake shall be an over -unning clutch design which disengages to 90 percent during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50 Ibs. (22 kg) in the stopped position. The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an articulated brake assembly, which assures a smooth, non-jerky operation in raising and lowering the shades. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require externally applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable. The entire M5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without effecting the rolle� shade limit adjustments. � � � � Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 Ib. (41 kg) minimum breaking � strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted. 2.7 SHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM A. Shade Motors: 1. Tubular, asynchronous (non-synchronous) motors, with built-in reversible capacitor operating at 110v AC (60hz), single phase, temperature Class A, thermally protected, totally enclosed, maintenance free with line voltage power supply equipped with locking disconnect plug assembly furnished with each motor. 2. Conceal motors inside shade roller tube. 3. Maximum current draw for each shade motor of 2.3 amps. 4. Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all shades in the same room. B. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity of the shade motor and tube assembly. 2.8 MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEMS A. IQ/MLC: Specifications and design of shade motors and motor control system are based on the IQ/MLC motor logic control system manufactured by MechoShade Systems, Inc. Other systems may be acceptable provide that all of the following performance capabilities are provided. Motor logic cont�ol systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as equal systems. 1. Motor Control System: a. Provide power to each shade motor via individual 3 conductor line voltage circuits connecting each motor to the relay based motor logic cont�ollers (IQ/MLC). b. Control system components shall provide appropriate (spike and brown out) over-current protection (+I-10 percent of line voltage) for each of the four individual motor circuits and shall be rated by UL or ETL as a recognized component of this system and tested as an integrated system. c. Motor control system shall allow each group of four shade motors in any combination to be controlled by each of four local switch ports, with up to fourteen possible "sub-group" combinations via local 3 button wall switches and all at once via a mastef 3 button switch. System shall allow for ove�lapping switch combinations from two or more local switches. d. Multiple "sub-groups" from different IQ/MLC control components shall be capable of being combined to form "groups" operated by a single 3 button wall switch, from either the master port or in series from a local switch port. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 92-4940 - 6 Roller Shades Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction CJ � � � � � ' � ' � � � � ' � � ' C� ' ' e. Each shade motor shall be accessible (for control purposes) from up to four local switches and one master switch. f. Control system shall allow for automatic alignment of shade hem bars in stopped position at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent of opening heights, and up to three user-defined intermediate stopping positions in addition to all up / all down, regardless of shade height, for a total of five positions. Control system shall allow shades to be stopped at any point in the opening height noting that shades may not be in alignment at these non-defined positions). g. Control system shall have two standard operating modes: Normal mode allowing the shades to be stopped anywhere in the window's opening height and uniform mode, allowing the shades to only be stopped at the predefined intermediate stop positions. Both modes shall allow for all up / all down positioning. h. Control system components shall allow for interface with both audiovisual system components and building fire and life safety system via a dry contact terminal block. i. Control system components shall allow for interface with external analog input control devices such as solar activated controllers, 24 hour timers, and similar items; via a dry contact terminal block. j. Reconfiguration of switch groups shall not require rewiring of the hardwired line voltage motor power supply wiring, or the low voltage control wiring. Reconfiguration of switch groups shall be accomplished within the motor control device (IQ/MLC). Wall Switches: a. Three-button architectural flush mounted switches with metal cover plate and no exposed fasteners. b. Connect local wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V DC) 4-conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-11 type connectors supplied, installed and certified under Division 16 - Electrical. c. Connect master wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V DC) 6-conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-12 type connectors supplied, installed and certified under Division 16 - Electrical. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. ' 3.2 PREPARATION ' � � � A. Q Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 12-4940 - 7 Roller Shades Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. Turn-Key Single-Source Responsibility for Motorized Interior Roller Shades: To control the responsibility for performance of motorized roller shade systems, assign the design, engineering, and installation of motorized roller shade systems, motors, controls, and low voltage electrical control wiring specified in this Section to a single manufacturer and their authorized installer/dealer. The Architect will not produce a set of electrical drawings for the installation of control wiring for the motors, or motor controllers of the motorized roller shades. Power wiring (line voltage), shall be provided by the roller shade installer/dealer, in accordance with the requirements provided by the manufacturer. Coordinate the following with the roller shade installer/dealer: 1. Main Contractor shall provide power panels and circuits of sufficient size to accommodate roller shade manufacturer's requirements, as indicated on the mechanical and electrical drawings. 2. Mai� Contractor shall coordinate with requirements of roller shade installer/dealer, before inaccessible areas are constructed. 3. Roller shade installer/dealer shall run line voltage as dedicated home runs (of sufficient quantity, in sufficient capacity as required) terminating in junction boxes in locations designated by roller shade dealer. 4. Roller shade installer/dealer shaH provide and run all line voltage (from the terminating points) to the motor controllers, wire all roller shade motors to the motor controllers, and provide and run low voltage control wiring from motor controllers to switch/ control locations designated by the Architect. All above-ceiling and concealed wiring shall be plenum-rated, or installed in conduit, as required by the electrical code having jurisdiction. 5. Main Contractor shall provide conduit with pull wire in all areas, which might not be accessible to roller shade contractor due to building design, equipment location or schedule. C. D. E. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade systems. 3.4 PROTECTION A. ��: Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 12-4940 - 8 Roller Shades Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � � � � fl �J � SECTION 14 2010 PASSENGER ELEVATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Complete telescoping hydraulic elevator systems. B. Elevator maintenance. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary power supply. B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Elevator machine foundation. C. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Pit ladder, Sill supports, divider beams, and overhead hoist beams. D. Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Smoke venting hatch at top of hoistway. E. Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels: Fire rated access doors into hoistway. F. Section 10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties: Fire extinguisher in elevator machine room. G. Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in hoistway. H. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment: Pit sump and pump. I. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: 1. Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 2. Electrical service to main disconnect in elevator machine room. 4. Electrical power for elevator installation and testing. 5. Electrical disconnecting device to elevator equipment prior to activation of sprinkler system. 6. Electrical service for machine room. 7. �ighting in elevator pit. 8. Empty conduit for telephone service to machine room. J. Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: 1. Fire and smoke detectors and interconnecting devices. K. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Excavation for cylinder casing and hydraulic lines between cylinder and remote machine room. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. fQ C. D. E. F. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. ASME A17.2 - Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structu�al Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National fire Protection Association; 2008. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. ' Lionshead Transit Center Vail, Colorado I , 14 2010 -1 PASSENGER ELEVATORS 18 February 2011 Addendum 1 � � G. UL (ECMD) - Electrical Construction Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current � edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a meeting two (2) weeks prior to sta�ting work. 1. Review schedule of installation, installation procedures and conditions, and coordination with related work. B. Construction Use of Elevator: Elevator may be used fo� transport of construction personnel and materials. 1. Enclose cab with protective plywood on floor, walls, and ceiling. 2. P�ovide temporary lighting. 3. Provide control panel with manual and emergency operation with key operation for attendant operator. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following information: 1. Locations of machine room equipment: driving machines, controllers, governors and other component. 2. Hoistway components: Car, counterweight, sheaves, machine and sheave beams, guide rails, buffers, ropes, and other components. 3. Rail bracket spacing; maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to building structural framing. 4. Loads on hoisting beams and location of trolley beams. 5. Clearances and over-travel of car and counterweight. 6. Location and sizes of access doors, doors, and frames. 7. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in machine room. 8. Applicable seismic design data; certified by a licensed Professional Structural Engineer. 9. Interface with building security system. 10. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Product Data: Provide data on the following items: 1. Signal and operating fixtu�es, operating panels, indicators. 2. Cab design, dimensions, layout, and components. 3. Cab and hoistway door and frame details. 4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Maintenance Contract. E. Maintenance Data: Include: 1. Parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify each entry with equipment description and identifying code. 2. Technical information for servicing operating equipment. 3. Legible schematic of hydraulic piping and wiring diagrams of installed electrical equipment and changes made in the Work. List symbols corresponding to identity or markings on machine room and hoistway apparatus. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable code and as supplemented in this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Lionshead Transit Center Vail, Colorado 14 2010 - 2 �l � PASSENGER ELEVATORS � 18 February 2011 Addendum 1 � � � � � � � ' � LJ � ' � � , , , r A. Basis of Design: Otis Elevator Co; Product LVM 3000TR Two-stage Hyraulic: www.otis.com. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ThyssenKrupp Elevator: www.thyssenkruppelevator.com. 2. Schindler Elevator Corp: www.us.schindler.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. All components to be manufactured by same entity, unless othen�vise indicated. 2.02 ELEVATORS A. Elevators No.1 8 No. 2: Passenger, holeless hydraulic type with cylinder in hoistway. 1. Cab Height: 9'-7" inches (2235 mm). 2. Cab Entrance Frame Opening Size: 42x96 inches (1067x2438 mm). 3. Door Type: Double leaf. 4. Door Operation: Center opening. 5. Rated Net Capacity: 3000 Ibs (1361 kg). 6. Rated Speed: 100 ft/min (1.64 m/s). 7. Travel Distance: As indicated on drawings. 8. Number of Stops: a. Elevator No. 1: Three (3) Front and One (1) Rear. b. Elevator No. 2: Three (3) Front and One (1) Rear. 9. Number of Openings: Two (2) Front & Rear. 10. Hydraulic Motor and Pump Location: Approximately 20 feet (6.1 m) distant from the hoistway. Refer to Architectural Drawings for location. 11. Pit Depth: a. Elevator No. 1: 7'-0" b. Elevator No. 2: 7'-0" 12. Elevator Cab: "Series 1" a. Entrance Frames: Painted b. Doors: Painted c. Walls: Satin Stainless Steel Veritcal Panels with Frieze (Otis DP-40) d. Ceiling: Downlight Ceiling Satin Stainless Steel Laminate (Otis DC-23) e. Lighting: Downlight Incandescent Fixtures with LED Bulbs f. Handrails and Bumper Rails: Solid Bar Satin Stainless Steel (Otis DH-51) 13. Battery-return units as required to meet any applicable Codes. 2.03 CONTROLS A. Elevator Controls: Provide "Series 1" landing buttons, hall lanterns, and lobby panel. B. Door Controls: 1. Program door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at floor. 2. Render "Door Close" button inoperative when car is standing at dispatching terminal with doors open. 3. If doors are prevented from closing for approximately ten seconds because of an obstruction, automatically disconnect door reopening devices, close doors more slowly until obstruction is cleared. Sound buzzer. 4. Door Safety Devices: Moveable, �etractable safety edges, quiet in operation; equip with photo-electric light rays. C. Landing Buttons: Stainless steel type, one for originating UP and one fo� originating DOWN calls, one button only at terminating landings; marked with arrows. D. Hall Fixtures: Horizontal, Illuminating green a�rows & numbers. E. Interconnect elevator control system with building fire alarm systems. F. Provide "Firefighter's Operation" in accordance with applicable code. Designated Landing: , Lionshead Transit Center Vail, Colorado � 14 2010 - 3 PASSENGER ELEVATORS 18 Febniary 2011 Addendum 1 �J 2.04 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS � A. Electricai Characteristics: � 1. 30 hp (22,388 W). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION � A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that hoistway, pit, and machine room are ready for work of this section. � C. Verify hoistway shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerance. D. Verify location and size of machine foundation and position of machine foundation bolts. E. Verify that electrical power is available and of the correct characteristics. � 3.02 PREPARATION A. Arrange for temporary electrical powe� fo� installation work and testing of elevator components. � 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install system components. Connect equipment to building utilities. e� B. Provide conduit, boxes, wiring, and accessories. C. Mount machines on vibration and acoustic isolators, on bed plate and concrete pad. Place on structural supports and bearing plates. Securely fasten to building supports. Prevent lateral displacement. D. Accommodate equipment in space indicated. E. Install guide rails using threaded bolts with metal shims and lock washers under nuts. Compensate for expansion and contraction movement of guide rails. F. Accurately machine and align guide rails. Form smooth joints with machined splice plates. G. Bolt brackets to inserts placed in concrete form work that will perform to four times the rated pull-out load. H. Coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction. I. Install hoistway door sills, frames, and heade�s in hoistway walls. Grout sills in place. Set entrances in vertical alignment with car openings and aligned with plumb hoistway lines. J. Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent; prime two coats. K. Machine Room Components: Clean and degrease; prime one coat, finish with one coat of enamel. L. Adjust equipment for smooth and quiet operation. � 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Guide Rail Alignment: Plumb and parallel to each other in accordance with ASME A17.1. � B. Cab Movement on Aligned Guide Rails: Smooth movement, with no objectionable lateral or oscillating movement or vibration. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � A. Testing and inspection by regulatory agencies will be performed at their discretion. 1. Schedule tests with agencies and notify Town of Vail and 4240 Architecture, lnc.. � Lionshead Transit Center 14 2010 - 4 PASSENGER ELEVATORS Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum 1 � 2. Obtain permits required to perform tests. 3. Document regulatory agency tests and inspections in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 4000. 4. Perform tests required by regulatory agencies. 5. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Perform testing and inspection in accordance with requirements of Section 01 4000. 1. Perform tests as required by ASME A17.2. 2. Provide two weeks written notice of date and time of tests. 3. Supply instruments and execute specific tests. C. Perform ope�ational tests in the presence of Town of Vail. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger discomfort. B. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to achieve 1/4 inch (6 mm) from flush. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove protective coverings from finished su�faces. B. Clean surfaces and components �eady for inspection. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Do not permit construction traffic within cab after cleaning. B. Protect installed products until project completion. C. Toucfi-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. 3.09 MAINTENANCE A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. B. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under the supervision and in the direct employ of the elevator manufacturer or original installer. C. Provide service and maintenance of elevator system and components for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. D. Examine system components monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment. E. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment. Maintain hydraulic fluid levels. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original equipment. Replace wire ropes when necessary to maintain the required factor of safety. F. Perform work without removing cars during peak traffic periods. ' Lionshead Transit Center Vail, Colorado � � END OF SECTION 142010-5 PASSENGER ELEVATORS 18 February 2011 Addendum 1 � � O u � SECTlON 210300 F/RE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT INCLUDES A. Design and /nstall Sprink/er Systems: 1. Wet pipe system with automatic sprinklers in Welcome Center Building 2. Dry standpipe system in Lionshead Parking Garage per scope on Contract Drawings. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Genera/ Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are a part of these Specifications. Consult them for further instruction and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME 616.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, C/ass 150 and 300. B. ANSI/ASME Section 9- Welding and Brazing Qualifications. C. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Stee/, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seam/ess. D. AWS 010.9 - Speci�cations for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing. E. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. F. NFPA 14 - Instal/ation of Standpipe Systems 1.4 COVERAGE A. Provide wet pipe fire protection system throughout We/come Center building 1.5 A. B. C. QUALITYASSURANCE Design and installation to conform. 1. NFPA !3 for /nstal/ation of Sprinkler Systems 2. NFPA 14 for lnstallation of Standpipe Systems 3. ASME 631.9 for piping. Equipment and Components: Bear UUFM /abel or marking. Specialist Firm: Company specializing in sprinkler systems with five years experience. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 21 0300 -1 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 D. The designer shall be registered with the State of Colorado as a Professional Engineer or Nicet C/ass lll Engineering Technician. The plans shall bear that stamp. E. lndicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories. F. Weld materials and procedures shall conform to ASME Code. G. Employ certified welders in accordance with ANSI/ASME Section 9. 1.6 REGULATORY REQU/REMENTS A. Hydraulic calculations, product data, and shop drawings shall bear the stamp of approval of the authority having jurisdiction. - 1J A. B. C. 1.8 A. B. C. SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. Indicate hydraulic calcu/ations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, pipe materials used, jointing methods, f/oor and wall penetration sea/s, valve data and ratings, components and accessories. Submit shop drawings, product data and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof of approva/ to ArchitecbEngineer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in p/ace, under provisions of Division 1. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and stee/ valves. Provide temporary end caps and closures. Maintain in p/ace until installation. 1.9 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents under provisions of Division 1. 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements, and Record Orawings. 1.11 A. 8. EXTRA STOCK Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFPA 13. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type. Lionshead Transit Welcome Ce�ter 21 0300 - 2 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 � � � � � � ' , C. Provide meta! storage cabinet in location designated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS , 2.1 ' A. � B. ' ' ' ' ' 2.2 ' A. ' 8. C. PIP/NG MATERIALS Piping Outside Building 1. All pipe outside the building to the service termination inside the building: 4" and larger, Class 50, 350 psi pressure rating, ductile iron mechanical joint, push-on joint or equivalent. 3" and sma/ler; Type "K" hard drawn copper. Pipe and Fittings Inside the Building 1. Piping materials; designed for 175 psi working pressure, conforming to ASTM specifications and to have the manufacturer's name or brand, along with the applicable ASTM standard, marked on each length of pipe. a. Pipe; Schedule 40, b/ack stee/ pipe, ASTM 1) A120 or A53 joined by screwed joints, welded joints, or by mechanical grooved couplings or push-on couplings jointed by UL and FM approved combination of couplings, gaskets and grooves where approved by authority having jurisdiction. b. Sprinkler piping that is exposed to the weather, or used in a corrosive atmosphere shall be ga/vanized. UN/ONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS Unions: 150 psi ma/leable iron for threaded ferrous piping. Flanges: 150 psi forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping. Mechanica/ Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and /ock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; 'C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; ga/vanized couplings for ga/vanized pipe. 2.3 GATE VALVES A. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, OS&Y, solid wedge. 2.4 CHECK VALVES A. Bronze, swing disc. B. Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 21 0300 - 3 FIRE PROTECTtON SYSTEMS ' Vail, Coiorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Iron body, bronze disc and stem resilient replaceable liner seat. 2.6 DRA/N VALVES A. Bronze compression stop with nipple and cap or hose thread. B. Brass ball valve with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread. 2.7 VALVE OPERATORS A. Provide handwheels for gate and drain valves. B. For butterf/y valves provide level /ock handle with toothed p/ate. 2.8 VALVE CONNECT/ONS A. Provide valve connections to match pipe joints. Use va/ves of pipe size. B. Provide butterf/y valve with tapped lug body when used for isolating service. 2.9 P/PES AND FITT/NGS: A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C115, ductile-iron barrel with iron-alloy threaded flanges. B. Stee/ Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 in sizes 6 inches and small, Schedule 30 in sizes 8 inches and /arger, black and galvanized. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, Schedule 10 through 5 inch and plain ends, black and galvanized. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, threadable lightwall, b/ack and ga/vanized. E. Stee/ Pipe: ASTM A 795, black and galvanized for plain end stee/ pipe. F. Fittings: Suitable for service c/ass and piping type; threaded, grooved-end, press-seal types. G. Joining Materials: Welding and gasket materials suitable for design temperatures and pressures. Victualic materials and couplings. 2.10 A. B. C. D. PIPING SPECIAtTIES Alarm Horn/Strobe: EJectric type. F/ow Switch: Vane type with retard chamber. Backf/ow Preventers: ASSE, sized for maximum flow rate and maximum pressure loss. Fire Department connections: UL 405, fire approved exposed, wall type unit, connections and finish suitable for use. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 21 0300 - 4 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Vail, Colorado 18 Febniary 2011 Addendum #1 E. Alarm Devices: Water-motor-operated alarms, waterf/ow indicators, pressure switches, and supervisory switches. F. Pressure Gages: UL 393. G. Automatic ball drip, Potter Roemer Series 5980, Croker-Standard 148 or 187, or equivalent. 2.11 A. B. C. D. SPR/NKLER HEADS Suspended Ceiling Type: See fire protection drawings. Exposed Area Type: See fire protection drawings. ' Sidewal/ Type: See fire protection drawings. Provide escutcheons for all heads /ocated in areas with �nished ceilings. Coordinate finish with Interiors. 2.12 F/RE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide a check va/ve with ball drip in line in fire department connection and a f/ush, two way connection, chromium plated, of an U.L, approved type. Wal/ plate shall have 1" high letters and read "Auto Sprinklers". 2.13 HOSE VALVES A. Hose va/ve for fire department use (where pressure is 100 psi or higher) Croker-Standard 457, Potter Roemer Series 4053 or equivalent (to fit 9" deep cabinet) 2-1/2" (inlet and outlet) adjustable pressure regulating angle hose va/ve for direct connection to high pressure �re protection waterriser. Valve to be bronze and U.L. listed with cap and chain. 2.14 WATER FLOW INDICATORS A. Provide water flow indicators in each standpipe riser system and on each automatic sprinkler system. 2.15 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Provide pressure gauges as required. U.L. Listed 4-1/2" dial type with a maximum limit of not less than twfce the normal working pressure. 2.16 VALVE SUPERVISION A. Monitor al/ water supply shut off valves for the Fire Protection Systems where shown on drawings with valve supervisor. Lionshead Tra�sit Welcome Center 21 0300 - 5 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 � PART 3 - EXECUT/ON 3.1 SERV/CE � A. Furnish water service from the main to a flange inside the building wall. Connect to flange and provide completed systems throughout the building. B. Pipe passing under building grade beams shall have a 6" minimum clearance to prevent possible damage from building settlement. C. Piping outside the building shall have not less than four feet six inches of cover from finished grade. Surround pipe with 4" of clean sand. D. Provide backflow preventer assemb/y at fire entry piping assemb/y. 3.2 /NSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Locate outside alarm on building wall. Obtain approval of location from Architect and Authority. 8. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. C. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. D. Center heads in one direction only in ceiling tile with /ocation in other direction variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements. E. App/y strippable tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover p/ates do not receive �eld paint finish. F. When sprinkler heads are installed where they may be exposed or subjected to mechanical damage, furnish head guards. G. � Provide sleeves for pipe passing through building walls and f/oors above grade, s/eeves of standard weight stee/ pipe. The annular spaces between pipe and s/eeves shall be packed tight with cau/king. Provide chrome p/ated escutcheon plates large enough to cover the pipe s/eeve. 3.3 /NSTALLATION - PIPE A. Screw joint steel piping up to and including 2 inch diameter. Weld piping 2-1/2 inch � diameter and larger, including branch connections. B. Mechanical grooved joints may be used instead of threaded or welded joints. � C. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. D. Coat threaded ends with pipe lubricant compound. � E. In stee/ piping, main sized sadd/e branch connections or direct connection of branch � lines to mains is permitted if main is one pipe size larger than the branch for up to 6 inch mains. Do not project branch pipes inside the main pipe. F. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 21 0300 - 6 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 � 3.4 3.5 G. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. H. Provide s/eeves when penetrating footings, floors, and walls. l. Sea/ pipe and sleeve penetration to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. INSTALLATION - VALVES A. install va/ves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Provide gate va/ves for shut-off or iso/ating service. C. Provide drain va/ves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. D. Provide /ocking devices with alarm functions on all valves where required per code or by authority having jurisdiction. INSTALLATION - SPRINKLER HEADS A. Coordinate sprinkler head /ayout with Architect prior to submission of drawings and hydraulic calculations. Obtain from Architect prior to beginning work. 3.6 CLEAN/NG A. F/ush entire piping system of foreign matter. 3.7 SYSTEM TESTS A. Hydrostatically test entire system. 8. Test shall be witnessed by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3.8 P/PE SUPPORTS A. All piping shall be supported by means of hangers tested and listed as approved by UL and/or FM. Sizing, spacing, and installation shall be in accordance with Nationa/ Fire Protection Association Standard No. 13, "Sprink/er Systems,"except as otherwise shown on Drawings orspecified herein. 3.9 ALARMS A. Provide fire entry station consisti�g of O.S. 8 Y. gate valve check va/ve and U.L. approved f/ow switch and outside weatherproof electric alarms consisting of audible horn and visual light devices. B. A/arms shall be connected to every fire sprinkler system and such alarm devices shall be /ocated on the exterior of the building within twenty-five (25) feet of the �re department connection except where the fire department connection serves more than one building and is installed on a yard main. When such occurs, the alarm device shall be located on the exterior of each building. Additiona/ horn and/or light type devices shall be within visual and/or hearing distance of all areas within each building. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 21 0300 - 7 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 3.10 ORAWOFFS AND DRA/NS A. Install all sprinkler branches and piping to drain to the main line on supp/y riser with 2" discharge pipe running to outside. Test line to drain by gravity to prevent freezing. 3.11 ZONE SPR/NKLER CONTROL ASSEMBLY A. Provide and install contro/ assembly for each sprink/er zone. Contro/ assembly shall include shut off valve, water f/ow indicator, test valve, drain valve, sight glass, and orificed union. Designer 3.12 HYDRAUL/C CALCULAT/ONS A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall prepare hydraulic calculations for the design of the system and submit for approvaL Submittals shall include but not be limited to: 1. Computer printout sheets or hand calculation sheets with all calculations. 2. Cross reference points of calculations both on the drawings and in the calculations by symbo/ or number. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 21 0300 - 8 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Vaii, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 ' ' ' PART1-GENERAL � 1.1 A. ' , 1.2 A. ' , ' , , ' ' , ' ' ' , � 0 C. 1.3 SECTION 22 0010 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS RELATED DOCUMENTS The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further instructions and be govemed by the requirements thereunder. DESCRIPTION Work Included Furnish all labor and materials and perform all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating mechanical systems subject to the conditions of the contract. The work also indudes the completion of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems; this includes the furnishing of all materials for filling systems to make them operable, including water, refrigerant, oil, grease, antifreeze and brine. Prove satisfactory operation of all equipment and controls to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER on request. Work Not Included Certain labor and materials may be furnished and/or installed under other divisions of these specifications. Coordinate with other trades and arrange the wo�k to make the parts fit together. The following items are to be accomplished under other divisions of these specifications. a. Temporary Heat: See Paragraph 1.7, this Section and Division 1. b. Concrete: See paragraph 3.10, this Section. c. Electrical Equipment and Wiring: See paragraph 3.11, this section. d. Temporary Water and Toilet: See Division 1. Equipment Furnished by Owner The Owner will award contracts, which will commence concurrently with this contract. Specifically this work will include: a. Equipment Installation: Refer to appropriate drawings for equipment furnished by the Owner. 2. Rough-in service pipes to locations as required by architectural and mechanical drawings and equipment shop drawings. Provide service valves on all pipes except waste and vent pipes, plug or cap these. Final connections to equipment will be made by the Contractor. PROVISIONS A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, and the mechanical drawings and all items hereinafter specified. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0010 - 1 PLUMBING GENERAI PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � 1. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine architectural, structural, � food service, civil, electrical, specialty systems, and interior design drawings and specifications. If any discrepancies occur between them and the mechanical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. � 2. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the mechanical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. � 3. Coordinate the mechanical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the work. Coordinate mechanical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. � 4. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by �epresentatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner's agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the � installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 5. In acceptance or rejection of installed mechanical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. � 1.4 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES/SITE A. Visit the premises site before submitting bid as no extras will be allowed for lack of knowledge of existing conditions. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to applicable sections of NFPA 13. B. Conform to the National Electrical Code, 2008 Edition. C. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. , D. In case of difference between these specifications, codes, laws, industry standards, and/or utility company regulations the most stringent shall govern. E. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. LJ 1.6 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES A. Apply for and pay for all permits, fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of work. 1. Do not include the cost of any "Plant Investment Fee" or "System Development Charge" for sewer and/or water charged by the City. This will be arranged for and paid for by the � Owner. 2. Do not include #he cost of any "Gas Application Fee" charged by the Utility Company. This will be ananged and paid for by the Owner. ,� B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections �equired by applicable codes, rules ' and �egulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Fumish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0010 - 2 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � ' , 1.7 ' ' 1.8 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Temporary heat will be furnished by the General Contracto�. Use of the permanent heating system will not be allowed without written authorization from the MECHANICAL ENGINEER. In case the permanent heating system is used for temporary heat, the General Contractor shall pay all costs until acceptance by the Owner. EXISTING UTILITIES A. The plans indicate the location, type and sizes of various utilities within the site where known. ' These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If utilities are encountered during construction, which are not shown on the drawings, ask for instructions from the Architect. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by change order. Assume all ' responsibility for protection of all utilities, shown or not, and repair any damage caused by this construction at no extra charge to the Owner. , , ' 1.9 ' , , ' , ' ' f; ' ' B C Investigate with proper authorities for all existing water taps, etc. and make arrangements to pay for all removal charges in original bid. Owners of all underground utilities shall be notified at least 2 business days prior to excavation so that they can locate and mark underground facilities. DRAWINGS A. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and are not to be scaled for dimensions. Take all dimensions from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings, and from the structure itself before fabricating any work. Verify all space requirements, coordinating with other trades, and install the systems in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner. B. C. 1.10 Conceal all piping in finished areas of the building except where otherwise noted on the drawings. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, unless approval is given in writing by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER for deviation. EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or co�rections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction �esulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Failure to so request clarification of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility. The signing of the Contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of full intent and scope of the wo�king drawings and specifications. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0010 - 3 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 1.11 ROUGH-IN A. B. 1.12 Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment. Refer to equipment specifications in other Divisions for additional rough-in requirements. COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings showing major elements, components, and systems of inechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components. Prepare drawings to an accurate scale of'/<"=1"-0" or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and materials, including clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. B. Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively coordinate where space is limited, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessary limited) to the following: 1.13 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 1. Ductwork 2. Hydronic Piping 3. Plumbing Piping 4. Fire sprinkler piping 5. Electrical conduit mains MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of inechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. Whe�e mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical senrices and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible, and in accordance with minimum required dearances as specified in codes and regulations. H. The word "concealed" as used in this specification refers to such spaces as pipe and duct chases, pipe and duct trenches, above plastered ceilings, in walls and buried where pipe and/or duct is inaccessible when building is complete. "Exposed" is intended to be within equipment rooms, unfinished areas, above "push up" ceilings, accessible pipe and duct tunnels. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0010 - 4 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction J � �� ' � ' , I. ' 1.14 ' A. B. � C. , ' ' � ' , ' ' , ' ' ' , L_J D. E. 1.15 A. B. The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to Project, unless othen�vise defined in greater detail. The term "install" is used to describe operations at Project, from inspecting and unloading, to completion in place, ready for intended use. The term "provide" means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, unless otherwise defined in greater detail. SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Division 1. Proposed Product List: Include Products specified in Divisions 22 and 23 specifications. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, Products, and accessories in a single submittal. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. Submit miscellaneous items specified on the drawings, but not covered in the specifications. Make no substitutions without prior approval from the Architect. SHOP DRAWINGS Submit shop drawings on all equipment, Temperature Controls and Fire Protection. Provide shop drawings to the Architect and Engineer showing locations of all access panels. Shop drawings required for this project are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 6. 7. 8. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Plumbing Fixtures Insulation Boile�s Pumps Fire Protection Piping _ Motor Starters Temperature Controls Exhaust Fans Heat Recovery Ventilators Cabinet and Unit Heaters Water Heaters Snowmelt and Radiant Tubing Glycol Feeders Grilles, Registers, Diffusers, and Louvers C. Present shop drawing submittal data at one time, bound in three-ring binders, indexed in a neat and orderly manner. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Provide five sets of submittal data, unless noted otherwise in Division 1. Do not begin work until one (1) copy is retumed. D. Provide, with shop drawing submittal, 1/4" scale layout drawings of rooms with boilers, chillers, and HVAC equipment. Layouts shall show locations of, and shall be coordinated with electrical equipment, and equipment shall be drawn to scale. E. Place orders for all equipment in time to prevent any delay in construction schedule or completion of project. If any materials or equipment are not ordered in time, additional charges made by equipment manufacturers to complete their equipment in time to meet construction schedule, together with any special handling charges, shall be borne by the Contractor. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0010 - 5 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construcdon F. Contractor agrees that shop drawing submittals processed by the engineer are not change orders. The purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and contract documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after shop drawings and specifications shall control and shall be followed. G. Contractor to provide manufacturers' recommended installation manuals for equipment. H. Review of shop drawings does not relieve this Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing equipment and materials of proper dimension, size, quantity, quality and all performance characteristics to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the contract documents. Review does not relieve this Contractorfrom responsibility for errors on the shop drawings. If the shop drawings deviate from the contract documents, advise the MECHANICAL ENGINEER of the deviations in writing accompanying the shop drawings, including the reasons for the deviations. Coordinate all required changes with the other trades affected. If the changes are occasioned by the Contractor, he shall pay any costs involved. 1.16 A. B. 1.17 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of Architect before proceeding. PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the process of the work, maintain an accurate record of the installation of the mechanical systems. Upon completion of the mechanical systems installation, transfer all record data to blue-line prints of the original drawings. Drawings shall include all addendum items, charge orders, alternations, reroutings, etc. As a condition of acceptance of the project, deliver to the Architect one copy of the record drawings. 1.18 WARRANTY A. B. C. 1.19 A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified. Guarantee all workmanship, materials and equipment and replace any found defective without cost to the Owner, for one year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions. Each warranty for longer than the one year described above (that comes with equipment used on the job) shall be passed on to the owner with dates of start and end of the warranty. ENGINEERING BY CONTRACTOR The construction of this building requires the contracto� to design several systems or subsystems. All such design shall be the completed responsibility of the contractor. � � � � � "1 � ' � � [J � B. Systems or subsystems which require engineering responsibility by the contractor include, but are not limited to: ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0010 - 6 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �� ' , ' ' ' ' ' , , ' ' ' 1. Fire sprinkler. 2. Equipment supports, not fuliy detailed in the drawings. 3. Pipe hangers and anchors not specified in these documents, or catalogued by the manufacturer. 4. Temperature controls. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 A. A. EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER Equipment in the following categories shall be of one manufacturer or available through one manufacturer for each category to facilitate ease of maintenance for the Owner. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 9. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Motors (open drip-proof squirrel cage) Starters Temperature Controls Plumbing Fixture Trim Thermometers Pressure Gauges Gate Valves Butterfly Valves Plug Valves Globe Valves Check Valves Balancing Valves Radiator Valves Traps Dielectric Unions Strainers Air Filters SUBSTITUTIONS (PRIOR APPROVALS) Bidder's Choice 1. Materials, equipment or services listed by several identifying names are intended to be ' bidder's choice, and any of the listed names may be bid without soliciting prior acceptance. Where more than one name is given in the specifications, the first named manufacturer's material, equipment or senrices is contemplated and any changes and , their costs, required to accommodate the other named material or equipment as well as space requirements for the other named materials or equipment, must be assumed by the Contractor in his bid. (See Shop Drawing Requirement). � B. Performance Specification ' , 2. When any product is specified only by requirement to meet an industry standard or regulating body standard (such as U.L., AGA, A1NWA, ANSI, etc.) and the item proposed carries approval of that body, no prior acceptance by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER is needed. When any product or service is specified by requirement to meet a performance standard or is specified by a generic specification, (no manufacturers name listed) no prior acceptance by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER is needed except as specifically called for in these speci�cations. ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado �I � 22 0010 - 7 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 04 February 2011 Construction 2.3 2.4 C. Acceptance 1. Material and equipment specified is used as a basis of standard, and while not specifically mentioned, material gauges, weights, appearance and space requirements must be met by any substitutions. 2. Action for substitutions specified herein will be given only after the receipt of complete data showing perforrnance over entire range, physical dimensions and material construction all SPECIFICALLY marked for the individual item. Letter of transmittal with at least one (1) copy and one (1) marked up copy of all descriptive data shall be submitted to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER'S Office. 3. Submit shop drawings for all materials and equipment other than the first named in theses specifications showing any changes required in piping, ducting, electrical wiring, space allocation etc. Be responsible to make all changes required to accommodate and to pay for these changes. Coordinate changes required with all other trades. Pay for all changes resulting from re-ananging equipment. 4. See General Conditions for method of notification of acceptance. SUBSTITUTIONS (CONTRACTOR AND/OR OWNER INITIATED) A. Materials o� equipment listed by several manufacturers' names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed manufacturers may be used in the base bid. Materials or equipment not listed are considered substitutions. B. Performance Specification: When any item is specified by requirement to meet a performance, industry or regulating body standard or is specified by a generic spec, (no manufacturer's name listed) no prior approval by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer is needed unless specifically called for in these specifications. C 7 A. � Contractor to be responsible for any changes and costs to accommodate any equipment except the first named in the specification. Substitutions for Material 1. Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item to the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such alternate proposals shall not be substituted for the base bid and must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be deducted for each item and all deviations from specified items. Highlight all difference from specified equipment. If any such altemates are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions shall not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concems. BID ALTERNATE(S) Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. Alternate(s) for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0010 - 8 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �' � L,', � � , � ' � ' � equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. ' ' ' I'� 2.5 SAFETY PROVISIONS A. Any refrigeration system containing CFC-11, CFC-12, HCFC-123, HCFC-22, or any of the other refrigerants listed in the Clean Air Act as a Class I or Class II Ozone Depleting Compound shall comply with the Clean Air Acts and the Colorado Air Quality Control Commission Regulation #15. B. As a minimum all systems shall be equipped with refrigerant recovery service valves, relief valves capable of resetting after activation, and for system with more than 50 pounds of charge, and isolateable receiver and/or condenser capable of holding the complete charge. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 � ' 3.2 ' ' ' ' , ' , STORAGE A. Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contact limit lines of the building site. Cover and store all equipment and materials out of elements; any rusted or weather damaged item shall not be used. A. L:� C. ��, � PRODUCT INSTALLATION Manufacturer's Instructions 1. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the product manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 2. Consult with manufacturer's technical representatives, who are recognized as technical experts, for specific instructions on special project conditions. 3. If a conflict exists, notify the ArcfiitecUEngineer in writing and obtain his instruction before proceeding with the work in question. Movement of Equipment 1. Wherever possible, arrange for the movement and positioning of equipment so that enclosing partitions, walls and roofs will not be delayed or need to be removed. 2. Otherwise, advise Contractor of opening requirements to be maintained for the subsequent entry of equipment. Heavy Equipment 1. Coordinate the movement of heavy items with shoring and bracing so that the building structure will not be overloaded during the movement and installation. 2. Where mechanical products to be instatled on the existing roof are too heavy to be hand- carried, do not transport across the existing roof deck; position by crane or other device so as to avoid ove�loading the roof deck. Clearances , Lionshead Transit Welcome Ce�ter Vail, Colorado , 22 0010 - 9 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 04 February 2011 Construction � Install piping and ductwork: a. Straight and true. � b. Aligned with other work. c. Close to walls and overhead structure (allowing for insulation). d. Concealed, where possible, in occupied spaces. e. Out-of-the-way with maximum passageway and headroom remaining in each space. _ Except as otherwise indicated, arrange mechanical services and overhead equipment with a minimum of: a. 7'0" headroom in storage spaces. b. 8'6" headroom in other spaces. 3. Do not obstruct windows, doors or other openings. � 4. Give the right-of way to piping systems required to slope for drainage (over other service lines and ductwork). 5. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required � to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping pipes whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to affect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. _ E. Access Install all work to pennit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger bundles, boiler tubes, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, traps, starters, motors, control components and to clea� the openings of doors and of access panels. 3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. B. Close all pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Do not allow any fans in the HVAC system to operate before the area served by the fan has been cleaned and vacuumed of all debris and dust which might enter the system. � D. Any equipment, duct or piping systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above "MILL" or "SHOP" conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. ' E. Initial fill of traps Provide initial water seal fill for all waste p-traps, condensate traps, or similar traps. � 3.4 PROTECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS � A. All temporary water connections shall be made with an approved back flow preventer. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0010 - 10 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction u B. All hose bibbs shali have, as a minimum, a vacuum breaker to prevent back flow. 3.5 PROTECTION OF SYSTEMS SERVING OCCUPIED SPACES A. Where work is being performed in occupied spaces, or occupancy is to be phased in with ongoing construction contractor shall prevent contamination of all systems serving the occupants including but not limited to: 1. Supply or return air a. Systems shall be capped or provided with adequate particulate and gas phase filtration to prevent dust, chemical, or biological contamination. Particulate filters shall be as a minimum equivalent to those specified for the completed system. 2. Domestic Water a. Isolate sterilized portions from non-sterilized portions. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Division 1 sections of the specifications regarding requirements of Record Drawings and Operation and maintenance Manual submittal and systems demonstration. 1. Demonstrate that each system operates properly. 2. Explain the operation of each system to the Owner's Representative. Explain use of O&M manual in operating and maintaining systems. B. Date and time of demonstration will be determined by the Owner. 3.7 CONCRETE A. All poured in place concrete shall be furnished under the Architectural Divisions of these Specifications. 6. This Contractor shall coordinate all requirements for concrete surrounding buried duct. Ducts shall be tied down to concrete deadman and completely surrounded with 3" of concrete. 3.8 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING FOR MECHANICAL DIVISION A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. (MD is Mechanical Division - ED is Electrical Division). SET IN PLACE OR WIRED AND FURNISHED MOUNTED CONNECTED ITEM UNDER UNDER UNDER 1. Equipment Motors and Thermal MD MD ED ove�loads, resistance heaters c . 2. Motor Controllers; magnetic starters, reduced voltage starters and MD ED(a) ED overioad rela s. 3. Disconnect switches, fused or ED a ED a ED Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0010 - 11 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. 3.9 A. unfused, H.P. rated switches, thermal overioad switches and fuses, manual o eratin switches. 4. Push-button stations, pilot lights, multi-speed switches, float switches, theRnostats, control relays, time clocks, control transformers, control MD MD(b) MD(b) panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and interlocks. 5. Contactors, 120V control circuit outlets for control panels and for ED ED ED boiler controls and for fire protection controls and smoke detectors. 6. Duct Detectors, fire/smoke dampers, MD MD ED(c) elevator vent dam rs. a. If furnished as pa�t of factory wired equipment, wiring and connections only by ED. b. If float switches, line thermostats, P.E. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, they shall be furnished by the Mechanical Division, but shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except that where such items are no integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place unde� the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division. Control devices carrying full load current furnished by Mechanical and wired by Electrical shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. 1) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. The above list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. Connections to all controls directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment shall be made with flexible connectors. IDENTIFICATiON Piping 2 3 4 All exposed piping, except piping in finished spaces, shall be identified in conformance with "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems", ANSI A13. All markers must be in compliance with respect to (1) proper letter color, (2) proper letter size, (3) cor�ect background color, and {4) proper marker length. Directional flow anows shall be applied adjacent to each pipe mark. For pipes under 3/4" O.D. color coded (as described above) identification tags shall be securely fastened at all required locations. Tags shall be 1-1/2 inches in diameter. All piping shall be marked at the following locations: (1) next to each valve and fitting, (2) at each branch and riser take-off, (3) at each wall, ceiling or floor penetration, (4) on pipes that lead to and from underground areas, and (5) every 30 feet on horizontal and vertical pipe runs. Identification of all piping systems shall conform to the designations in the mechanical legend on the drawings. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � � �J � � � � LJ � � � 22 0010 - 12 PLUMBtNG GENERAL PROVISIONS , 04 February 2011 Construction �'I � � ' � � � �1 �� O � � � � � � � , , � C. D. 3.10 A. Valves All valves shall be identified by coior coded (to match piping system identification) tags which indicate both service and number. Tags shall be 1-1/2 inch in diameter and have 1/4 inch high letters to indicate service and 7/16 inch high numbers. Tags shall be securely fastened to all valves. Service designations shall match abbreviations for piping systems given in mechanical legend on the drawings. Valve charts shall be provided and shall include (1) valve identification number, (2) service, (3) location, and (4) purpose. Valve cha�ts shall be mounted in metal frame with glass enclosure. One valve chart shall be secured on a wall in the boiler room. A second valve chart shall be delivered to the Owners authorized representative. Also a copy of the valve chart shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance Instructions. All electric controls, starters, air handling units, pumps, and all other equipment and controls shall be identified by stencil or permanent labeling. Care shall be taken not to paint over nameplates. FLUSHING, CLEANING 8 STERILIZING Intent: It is the intent of this specification to require that all work, including the inside of equipment, be left in a clean condition with all dust, grease, and construction debris removed. 1. Piping and connection equipment to be left free of sediments, core sand, grease, etc. 2. Clean all exposed surfaces of piping, ducts and hangers, etc., sufficiently to receive paint. Vacuum ducts as required for debris removal. 3. Air systems shall not be operated without filters. Replace the filters or clean permanent type filters just prior to substantial completion. All air systems shall be furnished with one additional set of filters for owner replacement. 4. Remove and clean all screens, interceptors, strainers, etc., in piping systems just prior to substantial completion. 5. Clean and wipe dry all plumbing fixtures, exposed valves, faucets, and piping, etc. that are exposed just prior to substantial completion. Clean all equipment and fixtures per manufacturer's specifications to avoid scratching finished surfaces. Leave all plumbing fixtures ready to use. 6. Clean interior and exterior of all air handling equipment of all construction debris. Clean exterior of all exposed ductwork just prior to substantial completion. 7. Thoroughly dean all equipment room floors after completion of equipment, pipe and duct cleaning. A condition of final acceptance will be the cleanliness of all exposed systems, equipment, and equipment rooms. B. Before final connections are made in the piping systems, blow out all piping with air and then wash out with cleaning compounds. Then flush the system to remove of all foreign materials. Furnish all temporary connections, valves, etc, required for this purpose. Clean the boiler and chiller by the same procedure. C D 3.11 Clean the boiler by the same procedure. After flushing, sterilize the domestic water system in accordance with Section 221116. TESTING A. Test all drain and waste lines with standing water test of twelve feet of head, held long enough to visually inspect each joint. Lionshead Transit Welcome Cente� 22 0010 - 13 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. C. D. E. F. G. 3.12 A. B. C. Test all heating water, snowmelt, and reduced pressure domestic water piping at 150 psig hydrostatic pressure before connecting to unit. Test all domestic water service lines to PRV and �adiant panel (embedded in concrete) and anti- freeze piping at 200 psig hydro static pressure. Test all air and gas piping under 60 psig air pressure. All tests must be done to the satisfaction of the local authorities having jurisdiction, before covering. All hydrostatic tests to be held for a minimum of six hours without loss of pressure. Air tests to be held for a minimum of two hours without loss of pressure. Furnish all instruments required for testing. PLACING IN OPERATION Clean all ducts, pipes, equipment, controls etc., of plaster and othe� foreign debris. Before final acceptance, dean o� replace all strainers, oil or grease all bearings and clean out all drains. Clean and recoat all permanent filters, replace throwaway type filters with new filters. The systems shall be put into operation. The Contractor shall verify that all controls are set to meet operating conditions specified. a. Example: Boiler operating and limit controls set where specified. 2. The contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment are operable and that all sequences of control are being met. 3. The contractor to adjust settings through 1 st year as required by MECHANICAL ENGINEER. 3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Books of Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be pe�sonally delivered to the Owner's authorized �epresentative and the Owner instructed as to their use and the equipment involved. (Provide two books for each building). Also, instruct the Owner's personnel on each valve and the valve chart previously specified. B. The book shall contain, but not be limited to, the following general items: 1. Spare parts lists for each piece of equipment. 2. Operating manuals for each piece of equipment and control. 3. Lubrication charts showing type of lubricant and application methods and frequencies. 4. Filter cleaning or replacement schedule. (On Contractors letterhead stationary). 5. Preventive maintenance schedule for checking all items such as belt drive, safety controls and oil and refrigerant charges. Cleaning schedule of all strainers, traps, coils, tubes, tower pans, sprays, etc. (On Contractors letterhead stationary). 6. Water treatment recommendations for boiler, tower, etc. 7. Normal operating instn.ictions including a sequence of operation for each system. (On Contractors letterhead stationary). 8. Instructions as to procedure to be followed for any emergency situation, such as alarms or safety items being tripped. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0010 - 14 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Constructio� u � �l � � � O �� [�1 � � � C� � 9. Instructions on who to call for service during guarantee period. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 10. Record of equipment installed (copy of each shop drawing as set forth under "Shop Drawing" Paragraph). 11. All warranties provided by Manufacturers on their equipment that run longer than the one year guarantee by the Contractor. Books shall be arranged in sequence to match the equipment schedules included in the specifications. Approval will not be given forfinal payment until the tests, balancing and operating instruction portions have been completed. 3.14 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. All boilers and packaged equipment shall be started by the manufacturer or under the manufacturers supervision. Start-up data shall be recorded in logs. Copies of start-up logs shall be forwarded to Mechanical Engineer and included in Operation and Maintenance manuals. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � ' END OF SECTION 22 0010 - 15 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0010 - 16 Vail, Colorado � � � � � � � � CJ � � � i PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS � 04 February 2011 Construction � 1 � IPART1-GENERAL � > 1.1 1.2 A. SECTION 22 0050 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD RELATED DOCUMENTS The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are a part of these specifications. Consult them for further instructions and be governed by the requirements thereunder. . STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat � appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. i � Q C� All equipment shall have housings suitable for the location installed. Provide products and materials that are new, dean, free of defects, and free of damage and corrosion, unless specifically directed to reuse any existing materials. � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 � � � � � � � � MOTORS A. Furnish ball bearing, squiRel cage, open drip proof, normal starting torque motor of the horsepower and current characteristics specified with thermal ove�load protection and dustproof and leak proof bearing rings and constructed for use at the altitude where the work is to be located. Motors guaranteed to operate continuously at full load with temperature rise in any part not to exceed NEMA Standards. Motors shall be commercially, dynamically balanced and tested at the factory before shipment and selected for quiet operation. Provide motors for V-belt drives with a cast iron and steel base, with slide rail and adjustable screw device and belt guard. Line up motors and drives and place motors and equipment on foundations ready for operation. B. Motors rated 9 horsepower or greater shall be Department of Energy (DOE) approved "energy efficient", meeting the requirements of EP Act 92, and shall meet NEMA 12-6C full load efficiencies. Where not commercially available, power factors shall be capacitor corrected by equipment manufacturer to at least 90 pe�cent under �ated load conditions. 2.2 STARTERS A. Provide starters of current and capacity ratings to serve the motor intended. All three phase starters to have over cuRent protection on all three legs. On three phase starters furnish a Phase Monitor Control Relay, Time Mar1c 6258B, or A258B, three-phase monitor control relay to open on phase reversal, phase failure or phase under voltage. Phase monitor control relay shall be mounted and wired in the starter enclosure by this contractor. Furnish switches and green running pilot light in starter cover. If pilot lights are specified on control panel, individual starter lights will not be �equired. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0050 -1 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. Provide integral transformer and 120-volt control circuit on all starters, which are furnished with control circuits. C. Size thermal overload relays for approximately 115% of full load motor current. Switch and fuse units will not be acceptable unless specifically indicated. 2.3 BELT DRIVES A. Provide belt drives with cast iron sheaves, either companion driven sheaves (except for two groove) or fixed pitch sheaves. If fixed pitch sheaves are used, the MECHANICAL ENGINEER reserves the right to direct speed changes be made, if in his opinion, these are warranted after final balancing. Fixed pitch sheaves shall be bushed type. Provide two groove adjustable drive sheaves with a key for holding pitch adjustment. Use standard FHP, A, B, C and D Sections. FHP belt drives may be used for motors less than three horsepower. B. Provide matched belts sized for 150% of motor schedule horsepower. When A-B sheaves are used, use B Section belts only. 2.4 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide painted, steel access doors with key lock suitable for the surface in which they are installed and satisfactory to the Architect. Recessed style to accept plaster finish, recessed type to accept acoustical tile, flush panel for drywall or flanged flushed panel for remodeling. In installed in fire rated surface, access door to carry proper rating. 2.5 ALTITUDE RATINGS A. Except as otherwise noted, all equipment capacities, air qualities, etc., are adjusted ratings for the elevation of this project as noted on drawings. Manufacturer's ratings shall be adjusted to provide net ratings shown. 2.6 2.7 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS A. For steet piping, construct with stainless steel inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. B. For copper piping, construct with bronze inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. C. Use connecto�s suitable for minimum 125 psi WSP and 450° and 200 psi WOG and 250°F. D. Construct spool pieces to exact size for insertion of flexible connection. FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL A. General: 1. Products to be used shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 814-88 and be listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Bare Piping: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0050 - 2 Vail, Colorado PIUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD � 04 February 2011 Construction � 1. Model FD 150 or CP-25. C. Insulated Piping: 1. Model: CP-25 or FS-195, Intumescent. 2. "No-sag" or "self-leveling" as required. D. Plastic Piping: 1. Model: CP-25 or FS-195 Intumescent. 2. "No-Sag" or °Self-le�reling" as required. E. Accessories: 1. Provide Fasteners, Restricting collars, backing materials, and protective coatings as required to comply with the UL system listing. F. Manufacturers: 1. 3M or G.E. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FREEZE PROTECTION A. Proximity of any equipment component or fluid piping to potential damage from freezing sources shall be avoided wherever possible. Drawings are diagrammatic. Make location adjustments, add insulation andlor control devices and/or heat sources as necessary to prevent or minimize freeze damage potential. The Architect/Engineer will neither guarantee nor be responsible for any consequences of freezing. 3.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Equipment 1. Erect all floor mounted equipment on 4" high concrete pads over the complete floor area of the equipment. 2. Mount supply and retum centrifugal fans, cabinet fans and air handling units (where called for on plans) on inertia base with a weight equal to not less than 1-1/2 times the combined weight of the fan and motor. Where centrifugal fan is used, mount fan and motor on common steel base. 3. Support each air or factory assembled air handing unit and fan by Mason Industries o� equivalent spring type vibration isolators, as follows: GROUND SUPPORTED 20' FLOOR SPAN SLAB OR BASEMENT POSSIBLE FLOOR DEFL EQUIPMENT MASON 0.67" MASON Min Static Min Static En r. S ec Defl. in. En r. S ec. Defl. in. a. Factory Assembled H� V Units 1) Suspended Units a) Thru 5 HP D 1.0 D 1.0 Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0050 - 3 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD Vail, Colorado 04 Feb�uary 2011 Construction : C. b. Biowers 1) Centrifugal Blowers 2) Tubular Centrifugal and Axial Fans a) Suspended Units A-J .035 I B-J 0 Refer to Guide 4. All mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. 5. Equipment with operating weight different than the installed weight shall be mounted on spring mountings as directed in Mason Engineering Spec. B, but a housing shall be provided that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. Limit stops shall be out of contract during normal operation. Piping Domestic Hot and Cold Water, Heating Water and Waste Piping a. b. c. d. Domestic hot and cold water piping one inch diameter and smaller shall be isolated with the Acousto-Plumb System of orange and blue pipe isolators, holders, and guide, as manufactured by LSP/Specialty Products Company, Tel (800) 854-3215. Isolate waste piping and domestic hot and cold water piping larger than one inch in diameter with Trisolator system of pipe isolators as manufactured by Elmdor/Stoneman, Tel. (818) 968-8699. Do not allow the piping, pipe connectors, pipe hangers or valve to di�ectly touch the structure, studs, gypsum board, or other pipes. Copper waste piping must be completely wrapped with Lowry's acoustical pipe wrap. The wrap is manufactured by Harry A. Lowry, Tel. (818) 768-4661. Flexible Connections Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. 3.3 PIPE HANGERS A. General Provide pipe supports for vertical lines at each floor. Provide pipe hangers to support the systems without sagging, including hangers at each offset or change in direction, at ends of branches over five feet in length and at the following maximum spacing: Hanger Rod Pi e Size Han er S acin Diameter Minimum a. 3/4" and smaller 6 ft. 3/8" b. 1" 8 ft. 3/8" c. 1-1/4" throu h 2" 10 ft. 3/8" d. 2-1 /2" throu h 3" 10 ft. 1/2" e. 4" throu h 5" 10 ft. 1/2" f. 6" throu h 10" 2 ft 5/8" . 12" and lar er 12 ft. 7/8" h. Cast iron no hub 5 ft. and at 'oints Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0050 -4 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � �— � � � �J � J � � 1 � II�I �J � � � ��I� � �� LI � � � � � 3.4 � � 3.5 � � � � K�� Individual Hangers 1. Individual hangers for non-insulated copper piping and insulated copper heating piping and insulated domestic hot water and circulating water piping shall be copper plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip 500, Kin-Line felt lined 440-F or Michigan Hanger Company Series 102 with polyvinyl coating, with insulation over hangers. 2. Individual hangers for insulated cold piping (steel or copper) shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip Figure 800, Kin Line 400 Series, Michigan Series 103. Hangers shall support pipe with hangers over the insulation. The system shall be complete with Auto Grip or Michigan Zinc plated steel shield, Pipe Shields or Kin-Line 460 zinc plated steel shield. Provide insulation insert of high density polyethylene foam, calcium silicate, high density glass fiber or expanded pe�lite divided in longitudinal half sections and covered with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. High density inserts are not required in plumbing walls behind ptumbing fixtures. 3. Individual hangers for all insulated or non-insulated steel piping shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip Figure 400, Kin-Line 400 Series, Michigan Series 100. Hangers shall suppo�t pipe with insulation over hangers. Trapeze Hangers 1. Parallel runs of piping may be supported on trapeze hangers. Trapeze shall be Unistrut P-1000-3 or Kin Line 211, 371 or 372 equivalent by Elcen or Kindorff. System shall be selected to support five times the weight of thrust applied without failure. 2. All non-insulated steel pipe and insulated steel heating water pipe shall have standard pipe straps at each support. 3. All non-insulated copper pipe, insulated copper domestic hot and re-circulating water piping and insulated copper heating piping shall rest on neoprene sleeves and have standard pipe straps at each support. 4. All cold insulated pipe (steel or copper) shall rest on Fee and Mason Figure 81 or equivalent by unistrut, or Kin-Line, galvanized steel insulation shield or 360° galvanized steel shield. Provide insulation insert of high density polyethylene foam, calcium silicate, high density fiber glass or expanded perlite divided in longitudinal half sections and covered with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. Provide pipe strap over insulation at each support. High density inserts are not required in plumbing walls behind plumbing fixtures. 5. See this Section, 3.02, Vbration Isolation for special hangers. CONTROL VALVE PIPING A. If the control valve size is smaller than the pipe size marked on the drawing, the reduction in size pertains to the vaNe only. Gate valves, globe valves, and strainers on either side of the automatic valve shall be a minimum of the pipe size marked on the drawings. PUMP CONNECTIONS A. Where the suction or discharge of any pump unit is smaller than the pipe size noted on the drawings, all strainers, valves, flexible connections, expansion joints, etc., shall be a minimum of the pipe size noted on the drawings. ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish a� access door for each pipe chase for each floor. This includes both toilet plumbing chases and pipe riser chases. Access doors assembly to be minimum size of 16" x 16". Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0050 - 5 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � B. Also, furnish access doors in all non-removable ceilings and in partitions and walls where � necessary to maintain access to plumbing cleanouts, shock absorbers, fire dampers, manual dampers, valves and other mechanical devices requiring access. Size these as required for access. � C. Provide all access doors to the General Contractor for him to construct into the building. D. Submit shop drawing indicating the locations of all access doors. 3.7 WELDING A. Provide all welding in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bu�eau or other approved procedure conforming to the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. Only welders who have been fully qualified under the specified procedure shall be employed. 3.8 PIPE DEPTHS A. Interior pipe below slabs shall be a minimum of 4 inches below slab and shall not be in contact � with concrete at any point. Minimum exterior cover over water piping, unless otherwise shown or required by code, shall be 8 feet above the top of the pipe. Area drains shall have maximum cover possible consistent with finished landscape and acceptable flow lines. Gas piping shalt have minimum of 3 foot cover with warning tape 12" above pipe. Sanitary waste and storm � drain lines shall have 3 foot cover minimum. 3.9 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Full-length pipe in longest lengths possible shall be used. All threads shall be right hand, pipe standard, clean cut, full depth and tapering. Install piping so as to permit complete draining. Provide drains at all low points. All interior soil, waste and condensate lines shall have uniform pitch in the direction of flow of not less than 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise noted. Ream out all pipe ends, turn on ends and rattle before installing. 3.10 DUCTS A. Construct straight and smooth with neatly finished joints, airtight and free from vibration. Internal ends of slip joints shall be made in the direction of flow. Changes in duct dimensions and shape shall be gradual and uniform. Curved elbows, unless otherwise noted, to have centerline radius of at least 1-1/2 times the duct width. Air turns shall be installed in all abrupt elbows and shall be arranged to pe►mit air to make turns without appreciable turbulence and to remain quiet when the system is in operation_ Construction of ducts shall be per the details and recommendations of the latest edition of the ASHRAE handbook and U.M.C. The most stringent requirement governs in conflicts. "Duct mate" joint method may be utilized provided all portions of seam/joint materials are provided by "duct mate" and installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's standards. 3.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment � that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0050 - 6 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � 1 # � � C�1 � � � � l, �r � ' � � � Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. 3.12 CLEANING A. Intent: It is the intent of this specification to require that all work, including the inside of equipment, be left in a clean condition with all dust, grease, and construction debris removed. Refer also to Division 01 specifications. B. C. D. E. Piping and connected equipment to be left free of sediments, core sand, grease, etc. Clean all exposed surfaces of piping, ducts and hangers, etc., sufficiently to receive paint. Vacuum ducts as required for debris removal. Air systems shall not be operated without filters. Replace the filters or clean permanent type filters just prior to substantial completion. All air systems with disposable filters shall be furnished with one additional set of boxed filters for owner replacement. Remove and clean all screens, interceptors, strainers, etc., in piping systems just prior to substantial completion. F. Clean and wipe dry all plumbing fixtures, exposed valves, faucets, and piping, etc. that are exposed just prior to substantial completion. Clean all equipment and fixtures per manufacturer's specifications to avoid scratching finished surfaces. Leave all plumbing fixtures ready to use. G. H. 3.13 A. B. Clean interior and exterior of all air handling equipment of all construction debris. Clean exterior of all exposed ductwork just prior to substantial completion. Thoroughly clean all equipment room floors after completion of equipment, pipe and duct cleaning. A condition of final acceptance will be the cleanliness of all exposed systems, equipment, and equipment rooms. EXPANSION COMPENSATION Examine piping layout and provide anchors or expansion joints required to adequately protect system. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. C. Accomplish structural work and provide equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping, loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, and provide corrugated bellows type expansion joints where required. � 3.14 SLEEVES, CUTTING, PATCHING � � , A. Major openings in the stn.�cture for mechanical work may be shown on the stn.ictural drawings; these will be done under the Architectural Division of these Specifications. It is the Contractor's responsibility to set necessary sleeves and boxes for pipe and ducts (not shown on the structural drawings) before erection of structure. This Contractor is responsible fo� the correct Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0050 - 7 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction ��'-_. � u C 3.15 size and location of all openings including coordination with the other trades. All sleeves shall be large enough to allow for continuous insulation to pass through the sleeve. In mechanical equipment room floors, all pipe sleeves to the Schedule 40 pipe and shall extend 1" above finished floor. In mechanical equipment room floors, all ducts shall have a 4" high concrete curb around duct. Caulk all pipes and ducts leaving equipment rooms between sleeve and duct or pipe, 1" deep on each side of wall, floor, or roof. Caulk bare pipes and ducts with lead wool. Caulk insulated pipes with 1- or 2-part polysulphide caulking compound. In the same manner as described in Paragraph C above, caulk all other pipes and ducts throughout the building which penetrate walls and floors and roofs this includes pipe and ducts to rooftop units. All pipes which may be in view shall be finished with chrome floor, wall and ceiling plates, except in equipment rooms. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation, trenching, bedding of pipe, placement and cover, backfilling, etc., in conjunction with work under this Division, shall be per requirements of Division 2 and the additional requirements specified herein. B. Trenches: Slope bottoms unifoRnly to drain. Trench bottoms to be firm, free from large rocks or boulders, or shall have concrete cradles placed to support piping. Cradles to bear on undisturbed soil. C. Cast iron: Place on firm trench bottom shaped to accept hubs. Both hubs and pipe shall have uniform firm bearing. Place a minimum of 12 inches of loose rock-free material over pipe. D. Other piping, conduits, culverts: Place on firm trench bottom and backfill per Division 2, 22, and 23 or embed per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Expansion: Place pipe fittings and thrust blocks per manufacturer's recommendations and/or project specifications. F. Excavation: Provide all excavating and backfilling required by the work in this division, all as required by the rules of the State Department of Labor and Equipment. All pipe must be taid on solid earth with bellholes provided for hubs. After pipe is laid in trench, it shall be tested, insulated if specified, and backfilled. G. Compaction 2 3 4 Backfill by hand around the pipe and the first 12" over the top of the pipe. Moisten, backfill, and tamp in 8" layers (maximum) with air motor or gasoline driven tamper to consolidate to 90% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content. (Puddling will not be allowed). Trenches under road surfacing shall have the upper 6" layer, forming the subgrade for pavement compacted to at least 95% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moistu�e content for rigid pavements. Density of backfill shall be deteRnined by the requirements of the A.A.S.H.O. in Pamphlet 57. Standard Method T-99-57. Where requirements of the gene�al conditions are more stringent than the above, the general condition requirements shall be met. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0050 - 8 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction C_I � J � � � � � � �J � � � 1 � � � '1 � � � � � � � � � � � � ' LJ H K. Q M. 3.16 Pavement Accomplish cutting of flexible pavement so that the remaining exposed edge of the pavement conforms ve�tically and horizontally to a straight line. The width of the section of pavement removed shall be of necessary width for the p�oper laying of pipe, but shall not exceed 36". Waste material resulting from the above operations will be disposed of in suitable waste areas. Repair pavement to satisfaction of the authorities having jurisdiction. Shoring Provide all shoring required to perform the excavation and to protect the project, empioyees, and public. Surveying Establish all lines, grades and elevations. Stake out the work and furnish all lines, stakes (1" x 2" x 10"), and all hubs or hardwood pegs (1" x 1" x 6") to stake out the lines and structures to line and grade. Maintaining and Protecting Traffic Maintain sufficient barricades, warning signals and lights to protect pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Provide and maintain such detours as may be necessary to keep traffic moving during construction. Surface Drainage and Ground Water Surface drainage shall be diverted away from open excavation and trenching before commencement of work at the location. Surface water on ground water seepage, which enters or accumulates in the trenches, shall be removed by pumping or subdraining, and the subgrade or pipe bed restored to original bearing value and conditions. Any settling of backfilled trenches which may occur during the warranty period shall be repaired without expense to the Owner, induding the complete restoration of all damaged property. FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Furnish and install as indicated on the plans and/or as may be necessary for the proper installation of all equipment furnished under this Division, all foundations, bases and supports. Contractor shall be responsible for their correct location and sizes to fit all equipment. Shim and grout between the equipment and its base to align and level. Bolt equipment inertia bases, vibration isolators, and supports to prevent relative movement. B. 3.17 A. Furnish all hangers, anchors, sway bracing, guides, etc., for the various piping and duct systems as required for their proper installation. FIRE STOPPING Install firestopping materials in accordance with their UL and ASTM tested methods. B. Coordinate required annular space with size of pipe and sleeve. C. Requirements for specific systems: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0050 - 9 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 1. Cold piping: Includes chiiled water, domestic water, storm water and refrigerant: Insulation and vapor barrier shall be continued through wall and firestopping for "insulated piping" shall be provided. 2. Hot piping to 250°F indudes domestic hot water, steam to 15 psig and heating hot water: The Contractor has the option of continuing the insulation through the penetration and providing firestopping for "insulated piping", or stopping the insulation on either side of the penetration and using firestopping for uninsulated piping". 3. High temperature piping, over 250°F or over 15 psig steam: Contractor shall stop insulation and provide firestopping for "high temperature piping". END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0050 -10 Vail, Colorado � PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD � 04 February 2011 Construction � SECTION 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for boiler breeching, duct, equipment, and pipe, including the following: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Calcium silicate. b. Cellular glass. c. Flexible elastomeric. d. Mineral fiber. 2. Adhesives. 3. Mastics. 4. Lagging adhesives. 5. Sealants. 6. Factory-applied jackets. 7. Field-applied jackets. 8. Tapes. 9. Securements. 10. Corner angles. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Hydronic Distribution" for loose-fill pipe insulation in underground piping outside the building. 2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners. 1.2 A. B. C. D. E. DEFINITIONS ASJ: All-service jacket. FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper. FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride. SSL: Self-sealing lap. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify theRnal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), and flame spread and smoke developed indices. B. Shop Drawings: Show details for the following: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 1 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 1.4 A. 1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Application of field-applied jackets. 7. Application at linkages of control devices. 8. Field application for each equipment type. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. , B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. 1.7 1. Insulation Installed indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. COORDINATION Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 2 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � u �! u � I' � � � � � i� I� 6. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of � construction. I � � � ( � ( � PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements appty to product selection: 1. P�oducts: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. ( � 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Refer to Pa�t 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be quali�ed as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materiats shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Calcium Silicate: 1. Products: a. Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo-12 Gold. 2. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. 3. Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. 4. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for dimensions used in prefonning insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Pa�t 2"Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CelI-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Supe� K. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 3 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Const�uction H 2. Block Insulation_ ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type 11, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type 11 for sheet materials. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap. J. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation without factory-applied jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. K. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type tll, without factory-applied jacket. 1. Products: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. b. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin-Glas. c. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations. d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board. e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW. f. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt. L. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 4 Vail, Colorado � � � � � !1 � PLUMBING lNSULATION , 04 February 2011 Construction � E F G b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. 6. Fulier Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITVU TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster P�oducts Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear. e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive. 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITV1/; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. ' f. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 6 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2017 Construction !� � � � i �� C. � Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-30. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-35. c. ITVN TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-25. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 501. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperatu�e Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITVV; Encacel. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 570. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-70. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. � 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. � E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. � LJ � � � 2.5 � � � � A. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50. f. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1NVC-5. 2. Water-Vapo� Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. LAGGING ADHESIVES Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 7 Vail, Colorado PLUMBING INSULATION 04 February 2011 Construction e. Vimasco Corporation; 136. 2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire- resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipme�t, and pipe insulation. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. J.oint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic-Foam, and Polyisocyanurate Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 5. Color: White or gray. B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITV1/; CP-76. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 8 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � LJ � � �J � � � � 28 � � ,; C 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SS�: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a peRneance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented bamer film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 7. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a. Products: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 8. Vinyl Jacket: UL-rated white vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 906. FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-fal-face, �berglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Products: � a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. � c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Co�poration; SmokeSafe. � � LJ C 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; othervvise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories. 5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. Metal Jacket: , Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � 22 0700 - 9 PLUMBING INSULATION 04 February 2011 Construction u 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. � b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate. � 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Factory cut and rolled to size. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper, d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. � e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: 1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Prefo�rned 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius � elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. � 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not � available. E. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mi1- thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil. 1. Products: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittwrap. b. Polyguard; Insulrap No Torch 125. F. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil-thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum-foil facing. 1. Products: a. Polyguard; Alumaguard 60. � G. PVDC Jacket fo� tndoo� Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with � a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Products: � a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film. H. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film � with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 10 PLUMBING INSULATION � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � i� � � ( � 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. I. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. ( � 2.9 TAPES � A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Products: [Q C� a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Speciaity Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. ldeal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. � 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. � 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 11 Vail, Colorado ( � PLUMBING INSULATION 04 February 2011 Constructio� 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 ibf/inch in width. D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapo�-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed. E F 2.10 A. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inc in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 Ibf/inch in width. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Film Thickness: 4 mils. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 Ibf/inch in width. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Film Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 Ibf/inch in width. SECUREMENTS Bands: 1. Products: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR P�oducts, Inc.; Bands. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 12 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �� L_J � Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulafion indicated. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. � 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS. ;__7 � 2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-in�h-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. � 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP. � � � 1 � � 3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel], fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate � fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: � � �� LJ a. Products: 1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylo� Insulation Hangers. b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.'l06-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulafion indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. Lionshead Transit Welcome Cente� 22 0700 - 13 PLUMBING INSUWTION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � 5. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when � self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: � C:� 7 b. c. d. 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA. 2) GEMCO; Press and Peel. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Manufacturers: 1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. C. Staples: Oufinrard-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. 1. Manufacturers: a. ACS Industries, Inc. b. C & F Wire. c. Childers Products. d. PABCO Metals Corporation. e. RPR Products, Inc. 2.11 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 14 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction i� � � I ' � C Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240, Type 304 or 316. I� PART 3 - EXECUTlON 3.1 � I � ( � ( 1 A. � PREPARATION Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adve�sely affect insulation application. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1 2 Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that applies to insulation. 3.2 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. E. F. G. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. Keep insulation materials dry during application and �nishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 15 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � 3.3 M, N. O. P. A. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-baRier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install inse�t materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive o� sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, aRanged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent o# its nominal thickness. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. PENETRATIONS Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 16 Vail, Colorado PLUMBING INSULATION 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � �� u ' � ' � � 0 C� � , � D , E r 1 � 3.4 � � � � A. 1. 2. 3. 4. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, te�rninate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION INSTALLATION Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all transitions. coverage rates per unit surfaces of fittings and 3. InstaH either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaper, place pins along longitudinal cente�line of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cxoss bracing. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado �� 22 0700 - 77 PLUMBING INSULATION 04 February 2011 Construction 3.5 A. � EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 3. 4. 5. � 7. 8. 9. 10 Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints. Protect exposed comers with secured corner angles. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. b. c. d. e. f. 9� Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that is compatible with service temperature and with substrate. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. Cut excess po�tion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insutation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. Insulation Installation on Pumps: 2. 3. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, sta�ting at corners. Install 3/8-inch-diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least .040 inch thick. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 18 Vail, Colorado C1 � LJ � PLUMBING INSULATION � 04 February 2011 Construction �� 1 � 3.6 � � � � , � �� I_� L:� GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation a�ticles. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: � 4. 5. C:� Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Ove�lap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whicheve� is thicker_ Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. Fo� services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except fo� flexible elastomeric install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. Label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers as necessary. Installation shall co�foRn to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 19 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Coiorado 04 February 2011 Construction � 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe � insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless- steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide � the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe � insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. � 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.7 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. I�sulation Installation on Boiler Breechings and Ducts: 1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation material. 2. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch intenrals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals. 3. On exposed applications without metal jacket, finish insulation surFace with a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform flnish. B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation mate�als. 2. Install 2-laye� insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch in#ervals. 3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulio-setting cement to insulation surface. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation. D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturers written instructions. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 20 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � , ' � � 2. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. 3. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation. E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation � to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 2. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation. � 3.8 � A. � � � � � � � � � i � � � L:3 C C 3.9 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION Insulation lnstallation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as �ecommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 4 Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install prefoRned sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 21 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2019 Construdion � C� u 3.10 /� 0 C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. � 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple Iongitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufactu�er and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids befinreen inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 OT00 - 22 Vail, Colorado � � � LJ PLUMBING INSULATION � 04 February 2011 Construction � L�J , i � � u ' � , � I� � L� � � � � � , � 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When prefo�rned insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mite�ed sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 perce�t coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insula6on tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during iristallation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washe�s or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor bamer. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ducfinrork and plenums operating below 50 deg F(10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intenrats. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-bamer mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Ove�lap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 23 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor �i�rrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F(10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intenrals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protn.ide beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. � � � �� Lionshead Transit Welcome Cente� 22 0700 - 24 PLUMBING INSULATION � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �j u � ' 3.11 A. ' LJ � LJ � ' , , , i � � � �� FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 2 3 4 5 Draw jacket material smooth and tight. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic. C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch ove�lap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. 2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end ove�iapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around ove►iapped butt joint. 3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. 4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or tess. The 33-1/2-inch-circumference limit allows for 2-inch-overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. 5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges. � 3.12 FINISHES � , A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 25 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 1 � Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. � a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. 3.13 BOILER BREECHING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Breeching and connector insulation shall be the following: 1. Calcium Silicate: 2 inches thick. 3.14 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Supply, return and outdoor air. Reference Section 233113, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 do not require an additional duct wrap. 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. 3.15 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Concealed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, supply air, return air and outdoor-air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density. 3. Duct Liner: Reference Section 233113, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and return air ductwork B. Concealed, rectangular, round and flat-oval exhaust-air duct insulation between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior shall be one of the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 'I-1/2 inches thick and 2-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density. 3. Duct Liner: Reference Section 233113, Metal Ducts for duct liner application in supply and retum air ductwork. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 OT00 - 26 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colo�ado 04 February 2011 Construction C. 3.16 A. B. C. D. E. F. 3.17 A. B. Exposed to view, rectangular, round and flat-oval, supply air, return air, exhaust air and outdoor- air duct shall not be insulated. EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. Heat-exchanger (water-to-water for heating senrice) insulation shall be the following: 1. Calcium Silicate: 3 inches thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density. Heating-hot-water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. Heating-hot-water air-separator insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick. Domestic hot-water storage tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 4 inches thick. PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. . Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Fire-suppression piping. 2. Below-grade piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.18 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. 2. NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Prefonned Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 27 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. C. Stormwater and Overflow: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. D. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. E. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. F. Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick. G. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inch thick. 2. NPS 2 and Larger: tnsulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I Pipe and Tank Insulation: 2 inches thick. H. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1-1/2 inch thick. I. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: Lionshead Transit Welcome Ce�ter 22 0700 - 28 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1-1/2 inch thick. 3.19 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, PrefoRned Pipe Insulation, Type 1: 3 inches thick. B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. 3.20 A. B. C. OUTDOOR, UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE Loose-fill insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections. Sanitary Waste Piping, All Sizes, Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: Cellular glass, 2 inches thick. Heating-Hot Water Supply and Return, All Sizes, 200 Deg F and below: Cellular glass, 3 inches thick. 3.21 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field- applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. PVC: 20 mils thick. D. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Smooth with 1-1/4-I�ch Deep Corrugations: 0.032 inch thick. E. Piping, Concealed: 1. None. ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado I � 22 0700 - 29 PLUMBING INSULATION 04 February 2011 Construction F. Piping, Exposed: 1. PVC: 20 mils thick. 3.22 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field- applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.016 inch thick. D. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with 1-1/4-Inch-Deep Corrugations: 0.032 inch thick. E. Piping, Exposed: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.016 inch thick. 3.23 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install water proof, continuous jacket for underground direct-buried piping applications. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 0700 - 30 PLUMBING INSULATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction SECTION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Indudes: 1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. 2. Flexible connectors. 3. Water meters. B. Related Section: 1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping and water meters outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the buitding. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control repo�ts. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include marking "NSF-pvV" on piping. C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply wi#h requirements in "Piping Schedule" Artide for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper. 1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1116-1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.3 2.4 2.5 0 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME 616.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AVWVA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Standard-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron. a. Gaskets: AW1NA C111, rubber. 2. Compact-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AVWVA C153, ductile iron. a. Gaskets: A1NWA C111, rubber. GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Standard Weight. Include ends matching joining method. 1. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Standard Weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends. 2. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern. 3. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME 616.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface, and female threaded ends. 4. Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125, cast iron. PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS A. PEX Distribution System: ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing. 1. Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1807, metal-insert type with copper or stainless-steel crimp rings and matching PEX tube dimensions. 2. Manifold: Multiple-oudet, plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal assembly complying with ASTM F 877; with plastic or co�rosion-resistant-metal valve for each outlet. 2.6 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: A1NWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unlsss otherwise indicated; full-face o� ring type unless otherwise indicated. 6. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1116-2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. E. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty metal valves. B. Comply with requi�ements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers. 2.8 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupli�g or specified piping system fitting. B. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219. 2.9 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Description: a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180 deg F. b. End Connections: Solder Joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Description: a. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric-Flange Kits: 1. Description: a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. Lionshead Transit Welcane Center 22 1116-3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction E c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Description: a. Electroplated steel nipple. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. c. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. 2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing. 1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy. B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. 1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple. 2.11 WATER METERS . A. Displacement-Type Water Meters: 1. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C700. b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure. c. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility. e. Case: Bronze. f. End Connections: Threaded. B. Compound-Type Water Meters: 1. Description: a. Standard: A1NWA C702. b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure. c. Body Design: With integral mainline and bypass meters; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company. e. Case: Bronze. f. Pipe Connections: Flanged. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1116-4 Vail, Colorado � � � � � DOMESTIC WATER PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction � ' ' ' ' ' i ' ' ' C. Remote Registration System: Direct-reading type complying with AWWA C706 ; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly as required by utility company. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK 3.2 A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. - PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and a�rangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. � C. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AW1NA C600 and AWWA M41. D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, ' inside the building at each domestic water senrice entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for d�ain valves and strainers. ' ' , ' ' '� � ' ' E. F. G. H. I. J. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb. Rough-in domestic wate� piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless speci�cally indicated otherwise. K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. L. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. M. Install piping to permit valve servicing. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1116-5 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction N. O. P. Q. R. S. T. U. V. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requi�ements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.3 A. B. C. L'. R L�I I� t�Z� P. b�3 :� Z«� L� I i J Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter. E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1116-6 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction r� � � � � � � � � � J 1 � f1 � ' , ' 3.4 ' F G H J A. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and p�essure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. Copper-Tubing, Push-on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure inse�tion depth with manufacture�'s depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. PEX Piping Joints: Join according to ASTM F 1807. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. VALVE INSTALLATION General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations. B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or ' equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. , C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." , ' � , 3.5 � ' ' ' LJ 1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated. D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves. A. LQ TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION Install transition couplings at joints of dissimila� piping. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling. C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1116-7 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION 3.7 A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. A. B. C. � � � FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION � Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water pump. � Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping. � 3.8 WATER METER INSTALLATION A. Rough-in domestic water piping , and install water meters according to utility company's requirements. 6. Install water meters according to AWWA M6, utility company's requirements, and the following: C. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install valve on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. E. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility company and of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.9 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and EquipmenY' for pipe hanger and support products and installation. 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. 3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1116-8 Vail, Colorado � DOMESTIC WATER PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction � r� �� ( ' 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diame�ers: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. , 2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. ' 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod. G. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet. H. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8-inch rod. I. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches. J. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacture►'s written instructions. 3.10 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cdd- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 ptumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado �I 22 1116-9 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction 3.11 A. B. 3.12 A. B. C � E. IDENTIFICATION Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and EquipmenY' for identification materials and installation. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections. Piping Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. Piping Tests: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and #hat piping is full of water. . Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of po�tion of piping tested. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1116-10 Vail, Colorado � � � ��' l;' u � �J � � � �� ' DOMESTIC WATER PIPING ' 04 February 2011 Construction �� i':I �� 3.13 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: B C. a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.14 PIPING SCHEDULE A. : Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints. C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Galvanized-steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints. 3. PEX Tube, NPS 1 and smaller; fittings for PEX tube; and crimped joints. 3.15 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate vaNes with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1l2 and larger. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1116-11 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. C. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1116-12 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction SECTION 22 1119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties: 1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure-reducing valves. 4. Balancing valves. 5. Strainers. 6. Drain valves. 7. Water hammer arresters. 8. Trap-seal primer valves. B. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for pomestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 � QUALITY ASSURANCE NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components. 2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers : Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1119-1 Vail, Colorado DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 04 February 2011 Const�uction B 1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, p�ovide products by one of the following: a. Ames Co. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FEBCO; SPX Valves 8� Controls. e. Rain Bird Corporation. f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Rough bronze. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers : 1 2 3 4 5 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Legend Valve. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Prier Products, lnc. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Woodford Manufacturing Company. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. Standard: ASSE 1001. Body: Bronze, non�emovable, with manual drain. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME 61.20.7. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated. 2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves 8� Controls. d. Honeywell Water Controls. e. Legend Valve. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. � � � � � � � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1119-2 DOMESTIC WA7ER PIPING SPECIALTIES ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � ! 1 i i � � � � � ' � ' ' � , ' � � C. 2. Standard: ASSE 1012. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Size: NPS 1/2. 5. Body: Bronze. 6. End Connections: Union, solderjoint. 7. Finish: Chrome plated. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers : Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controts. d. Flomatic Corpo�ation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller, cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 8. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet ofNPS 2 and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and larger. b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies : Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves 8� Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1015. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressu�e Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 8. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; ' outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1119-3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES Vail, Colorado 04 Febn.iary 2011 Construction � 2.3 2.4 2-1 /2 and larger. D. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits : l 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. c. Flomatic Corporation. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-procedure instructions. WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES A. Water Regulators : 1 2. 4. 5. 6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Honeywell Water Controls. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. Standard: ASSE 1003. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig. Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged fo� NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3. BALANCING VALVES A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCOINC. h. Red-White VaNe Corp. a � � � � � � � CJ O � � � 2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1119-4 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIAITIES � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � 2.5 2.6 2.7 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. Size: NPS 2 or smaller. Body: Copper alloy. Port: Standard or full port. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device. STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Y-Pattern Strainers : 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron[ with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and] for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size: a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch. b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch. c. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch. 6. Drain: Pipe plug. DRAIN VALVES A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves : 1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standa�d-port, two-piece ball valves. . 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated b�ass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME 61.20.7 and cap with brass chain. WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Water Hammer Arresters : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1119-5 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.8 A. 2 3 4 f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 2O1. Type: Copper tube with piston. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 2O1, Sizes A through F. TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer•Valves : 1 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. MIFAB, Inc. b. PPP Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Standard: ASSE 1018. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. Body: Bronze. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 /� INSTALLATION Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results fo� Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. C� 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. �I � �� LJ i D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1119-6 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � 3.2 3.3 E. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducing valve, and pump. F. Install water hammer a�esters in water piping according to PDI-WH 2O1. Ce3 W J Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 2. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies. 3. Water pressure-reducing valves. 4. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." FIELD QUALlTY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports: 1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check backflow-prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above. ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves. B. Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � � END OF SECTION 22 1119-7 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1119-8 Vail, Colorado � O J � u O �] � � f` I �! DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES � 04 February 2011 Construction � SECTION 22 1376 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article fo� applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific senrices, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the followi ng: a. ANACO-Husky. b. Dallas Specialty 8 Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Matco-No�ca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1316-1 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction C. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ANACO-Husky. b. Clamp-All Corp. c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Stant. g. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. �escription: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME 616.23, cast copper or ASME 616.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings. C. Copper Flanges: • ASME 616.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end. 1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux. 2.4 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. B. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. C. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 2.5 PYC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1316-2 Vail, Colorado � � � � � � � , � � � � � SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction � � B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. ' 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. �J � � ir I � I , 4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. , Lionshead Tra�sit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado f � 221316-3 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 04 Felxuary 2011 Construction PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." � � 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and aRangement of piping � systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated � unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on ve�tical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standa�d increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. J. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drai�: 2 percent downward in di�ection of flow for piping NPS 3 and � smaller; 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. � 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. K. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1316-4 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � I�j ' ' � � f—' � , � �I ' � , � � , � , i � � L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. S. T. 3.3 A. B. C. Chapter IV, "Instaliation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. Install underground ABS and PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping. Comply with requi�ements fo� backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 3. lnstall drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Install sleeves for piping penetra#ions of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." JOINT CONSTRUCTION Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813, wate�-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder. D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. E. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the fdlowing: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1316-5 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 Febniary 2011 Construction � 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. � 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. 3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally dosed type unless othenrvise indicated. 2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves unless drain has integral backwater valve. 3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 4. Comply with requirements for backwater valve specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. . Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting[, valve,] and coupling. D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum �ods. F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the foHowing maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1316-6 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Constructio� �i ' ' ' � ' II � lJ ' G H � J 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 4. NPS 3 and NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 6. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch �od. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. , ' � 3.7 ' � � ' � � , K. L. A. B. C. Install suppo�ts for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. CONNECTIONS Drawings indicate general anangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor . Comply with requi�ements for backwater vaNes deanouts and drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1316-7 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction L�: E. 3.8 A. 3.9 A. L:l C � and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. IDENTIFICATION Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: � 4. � � � "J � Test for leaks and defects in new piping and pa�ts of existing piping that have been � altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diag�am of portion of piping tested. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and � vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with � water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. � Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in � trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1316-8 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING , Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � ' ' � 3.10 A. ' B. LJ � ' L� ' �� J 'I � , ' � � C. D. 3.11 A. connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to preverrt damage from traffic and construction work. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint. PIPING SCHEDULE Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shatl be any of the following: 1. Senrice class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 4. Dissimila� Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. C. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-i�on soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Coppe� DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-i�on soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado ' END OF SECTION 22 1316-9 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Cente� 22 1316-10 Vail, Colorado � O � � SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction u SECTION 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties: 1. Backwater valves. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Roof flashing assemblies. 4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 5. Flashing materials. 1.2 SUBMITTA�S A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKWATER VALVES A. Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyle� Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.14_1. 3. Size: Same as connected piping. 4. Body: Cast iron. 5. Cover: Cast iron with threaded access check valve. 6. End Connections: Hub and spigot o� hubless. 7. Type Check VaNe: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1319-1 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECtALTIES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.2 � � Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to � field-instatled cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover. B. Drain-Outlet Backwater Valves : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. c. Watts Drainage Products Inc. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet. 3. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain 4. Check Valve: Removable ball float. 5. Inlet: Threaded. 6. Outlet: Threaded or spigot. CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts : 1 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. Size: Same as connected drainage piping Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, brass plug. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. B. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Oatey. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. • f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1319-2 Vail, Colorado � � SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES ' 04 February 2011 Construction � , � ' , l_� ' � � ' ' ' ' 2.3 ' � � ' ' , ' C. A. � 3. 4. 6. 7. 8. 10. 11. 12. 13. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout. Size: Same as connected branch. Type: Adjustable housing. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron . Clamping Device: Not required. Outlet Connecfion: Inside calk. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket . Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with [threads] [set-screws or other device]. Frame and Cover Mate�al and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy . Frame and Cover Shape: Round. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts : 2. 3. 4. 6. 7. 8. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. Body: Hubless, cast-i�on soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, brass plug. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation frame and cover. ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES Roof Flashing Assemblies : Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting. 1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap. 2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap. 3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1319-3 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction , 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES � A. Open Drains : 1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, � cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets. � 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping[ with increaser fitting of size indicated]. B. Deep-Seal Traps : 1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping - and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. a. NPS 2: 4-inch- minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal. C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings : 1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet. D. Air-Gap Fittings : 1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping. E. Sleeve Flashing Device : 1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that fo�ms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab. 2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping. F. Stack Flashing Fittings : 1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof inembrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. G. Vent Caps : 1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include — vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. � lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1319-4 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIAlT1ES ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � i� I ' 2.5 i ' ' ' ' ' ' FLASHING MATERIALS A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. General Use: 4.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness. 3. Burning: 6-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness. B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. C. D. E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. , B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing. C. Install deanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless othen�vise indicated: � 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. �� C F. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finish�d floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor d�ains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to atlow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1319-5 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction G. H. I. J. K. 1/4-inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 601nches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch total depression. 3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof inembranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. L. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system. M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. N. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. O. Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing. 1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension, if required, with cover flush with finished floor. 3. Recessed Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or cradle supports, with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor. 4. fnstall cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral deanout on outlet. P. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate � general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1319-6 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � ' ' 3.3 ' A. 1 ' ' ' , ' ' ' ' � ' ' , ' FLASHING INSTALLATION Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof inembrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve_ 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. D. E. F. 3.4 A. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialry clamping ring or device. Install flashing for piping passing th�ough roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, o� secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess. LABELING AND IDENTIFYING Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each grease interceptor. . 6. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and imp�oper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." K��13�Y1?C�i�L�I►J A. � Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avad clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. , Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado ' END OF SECTION 22 1319-T SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1319-8 Vail, Colorado � � �k SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES ' 04 February 2011 Const�uction �I SECTION 22 1413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section lncludes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. B. Related Section: 1. Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping" for storm drainage piping outside the building. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. B. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific senrices, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ANACO-Husky. b. Dallas Specialty 8� Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1413 -1 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE Vail, Colorado PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction � � d. Matco-Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. B. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2 3 a. ANACO-Husky. b. Clamp-All Corp. c. Dallas Specialry 8� Mfg. Co. d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Stant. g. Tyler Pipe. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast-copper fittings or ASME B16.29, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. C. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 950, cast copper with solder-joint end. 1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux. 2.4 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS � CQ Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. Cellular-Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40. C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1413 - 2 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE Vail, Colorado PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction patterns. D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 2.5 A. B. C. D. E. 2.6 A. PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS Transition Couplings: 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified-piping-system fitting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or paraliel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1413 - 3 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE Vail, Colorado PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction � D. Install piping above accessibie ceilings to allow suffiaent space for ceiling panel � removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. lnstall fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation �equirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger 2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. K. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fit6ngs Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. L. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." M. Install underground ABS and PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. N. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in stoRn drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 2. Install deanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with dosure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for deanouts specified in Division 22 Section "StoRn Drainage Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. � P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walts, ceilings, and floors. Comply with Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1413 - 4 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE � Vail, Colorado PIPING 04 February 2017 Construction � �equirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.3 A. B. C. D. 3.4 A. 3.5 A. JOINT CONSTRUCTION Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828 procedure. Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. VALVE INSTALLATION Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "StoRn Drainage Piping Specialties." HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. 2. 3. lnstall carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. lnstaH carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 �eet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1413 - 5 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE Vail, Colorado PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. � B. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and � coupling. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. � D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: . 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch �od. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 314-inch rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot pipe lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 6. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod. H. Install supports for ve�tical copper tubing every 10 feet. I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 A. B. C. CONNECTIONS Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storrn drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. 1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 2. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � � 22 1413 - 6 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE � PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction � ' � , � , ' � ' IrJ � ' ' ' ' , ' , D. 3.7 A. 3.8 A. B. C. D. 3.9 A. Where instailing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. IDENTIFICATION Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and a�range for reinspection. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 2. 3. 4. 5. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping[, except outside leaders,] on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. CLEANING Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. ' B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid dogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from Naffic and construction work. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1413 - 7 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE Vail, Colorado PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction ' C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Seniice class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. C. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION 22 1413 - 8 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE � PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction �� SECTION 22 1423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cleanouts. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANOUTS A. Floor Cleanouts : 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule cleanouts. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Type: Cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule. 4. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron . 5. Clamping Device: Not required. 6. Outlet Connection: Threaded. 7. Closure: Cast-iron plug. 8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device. 9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Polished bronze. 10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 11. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy Duty . 12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service dass, cast-iron drainage pip� ftting and riser to cleanout. B. Test Tees : 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301, for cleanout test tees. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or hubless, Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1423 -1 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING Vail, Colorado SPECIALTIES 04 February 2011 Construction � cast-iron soil-pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. � 4. Closure Plug: Countersunk, [brass] <Insert material>. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout � size. C. Wall Cleanouts : � 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil-pipe test tee as required to match � connected piping. 4. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout . size. � 6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. 7. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel � wall-installation frame and cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet <Insert dimension> for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. D. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor. E. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Sections. Drawings � indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 22 1423 - 2 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING Vail, Colorado SPECIALTIES � 04 February 2011 Construction � 3.3 A. . PROTECTION Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION Lionshead T�ansit Welcome Center 22 1423 - 3 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING Vail, Colorado SPECIALTIES 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � � �I � 22 1423 - 4 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING � SPECIALTIES 04 February 2011 Construction � SECTION 23 0010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to specification section 220010 "Plumbing General Provisions" for this division. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0010 -1 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0010 - 2 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � �I � �I � � O � O � ' � SECTION 23 0050 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to specification section 220050 "Plumbing Basic Material and Method" for this division. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0050 -1 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIAL AND Vail, Colorado METHOD 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0050 - 2 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIAL AND Vail, Colorado METHOD 04 February 2011 Construction �I �I � � � � �� SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems. 2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Constant-flow hydronic systems. b. Variable-flow hydronic systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entiry engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. B. Certified TAB reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB orTABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0593 -1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND Vail, Colorado BALANCING FOR HVAC 04 February 2011 Constructio� � C. n Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Owner . Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. C. D. E. F. r Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and cha�ts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been perfo�rned. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0593 - 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND Vail, Colorado BALANCING FOR HVAC 04 February 2017 Construction � LJ � � � � �� 1 f�; J � !J � ' � , � � i ' ' � � , �i � � I � , � ' � I. J. K. L. M. N. O. 3.2 A. B. 3.3 A. aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. PREPARATION Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0593 - 3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND Vail, Colorado BALANCING FOR HVAC 04 February 2011 Construction � insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section � "HVAC Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and � recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-builY' duct layouts. � C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampe�s for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check fo� proper sealing of air-handling-unit components. L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts." 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to dete�mine actual static pressure: � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0593 - 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND � Vail, Colorado BALANCING FOR HVAC 04 Fetuuary 2011 Construction � � ' ' � , ' , � � , � �I � n � � �� , � � ' [Q C. 3. a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the walt of the plenum that houses the fan. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. 4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 6. Obtain approval from Construction Managerfor adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance. 7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and b�anch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. Measure #erminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust air outiets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0593 - 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND Vail, Colorado BALANCING FOR HVAC 04 February 2011 Construction rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminais. � 1. Adjust each outlet in same room o� space to within specified tolerances of � indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust pattems of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. 3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS � A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at � pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows agai�st the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-builY' piping layouts. � C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: ,� 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. � Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump � curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0593 - 6 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND � Vail, Colorado BALANCING FOR HVAC 04 February 2011 Construction � ' , ' ' � � ' � II LJ , �� ' ' ' � � i 1 ' B. C. D. E. F. G. W a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from [Architect) [Owner] [Construction Manager] [Commissioning Authority] and comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps." Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. a. Monitor motor performance during procedu�es and do not operate motors in ove�load conditions. 3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's perfoRnance data. Compare calculated brake ho�sepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the condusion of balancing. J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0593 - 7 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND Vail, Colorado BALANCING FOR HVAC 04 February 2011 Construction 3.9 A. PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS A. Verify proper rotation of fans. B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures. C. Record compressor data. 3.12 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS A. Hydronic Boilers: Measu�e and reco�d entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow. 3.13 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado 7 �l � � 23 0593 - 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND � BALANCING FOR HVAC 04 February 2011 Construction � ' ' ' � ' ' � ' ' � LJ ' � ' � � � � C� Q 3.14 A. GQ C� Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature. PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS . Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3. Check the refrigerant charge. 4. Check the condition of filters. 5. Check the condition of coils. 6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap. 7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to �emain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following: 1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean a�d fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected_ Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils. 2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work �esult in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 3. If calculations increase o� decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. 4. Balance each air outlet. Lio�shead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado 23 0593 - 9 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 04 February 2011 Construction 3.15 A. 3.16 TOLERANCES Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general constn.�ction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.17 A. � C FINAL REPORT General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineers name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0593 -10 Vail, Colorado � � L; �� u TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND � BALANCING FOR HVAC 04 February 2011 Construction O � ' , � � ' t� � � �� ' ' � l� , ' ' ' � 3.18 A. � 10 11 Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressu�e controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. Water and steam flow rates. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. Terminal units. Balancing stations. Position of balancing devices. ADDITIONAL TESTS Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to coRect unusual conditions. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION 23 0593 - 11 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � � � � � 23 0593 -12 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND ' BALANCING FOR HVAC 04 February 2011 Construction u SECTION 23 0900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each control device indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Schematic flow diagrams. 2. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. 3. Details of control panel faces. 4. Damper schedule. 5. Valve schedule. 6. DDC System Hardware: Wiring diagrams, schematic floor plans, and schematic control diagrams. 7. Control System Software: Schematic diagrams, written descriptions, and points list. C. Software and firmware operational documentation. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SCOPE A. The system shall be built as an expansion of the existing Vllage snowmelt control system with no noticeable difference in quality, operation or function. The control system shall be integrated into the existing system software to allow the Owner to maintain system and manipulate set points same as the existing system. A remote system interface panel will be provided in the FRTB mechanical room. Provide any necessary reprogramming of the existing controls system to accommodate this expansion Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0900-1 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.2 2.3 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. CONTROL SYSTEM A. The original system designer and installer was Long Building Solutions. A differing designer/installer must submit an equivalent or compatible system that is approved by the Owner in writing. Controls contractor is responsible for confirming compatibility of their system with existing. Q C Manufacturers Allowed to bid without prior approval required: 1. Alerton 2. Automated Logic 3. Delta 4. Honeywell 5. Invensys 6. Johnson Controls 7. Reliable 8. Siemens 9. Trane Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems. D. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interFace with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics. 2.4 DDC EQUIPMENT A. Contractor option to utilize existing, and/or provide additional, front end interface. All controls, both new and existing, shall be controllable via a single operator interface/workstation. B. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process info�rnation; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of nefinrork status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0900-2 Vail, Colorado � � �� INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC ' 04 February 2011 Construction u b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse i/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. C. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. - Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation. D. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for noRnally open or normally closed operation[ with three-position (on-off-auto) oveRide switches and status lights]. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA). Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type electronic actuators. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs. E. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following: 1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regutation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50 percent load changes. 3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure. F. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following: 1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 d6. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 d6 at 40 to 100 Hz. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0900-3 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.5 UNITARY CONTROLLERS A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application. J � 1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72 -hour battery backup. 2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform � scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. 3. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. � 2.6 ANALOG CONTROLLERS A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and � operated by electric motor. B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning � action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts. _ C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision fo� �1 remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, induding proportional band and authority. � 1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer. D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of � motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor � up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference. 2.7 TIME CLOCKS A. Manufacturers: 1. ATC-Diversified Electronics. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation. 3. Paragon Electric Co., Inc. 4. Precision Mul6ple Controls, Inc. 5. SSAC Inc.; ABB USA. 6. TCS/Basys Controls. 7. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc. 8. Time Mark Corporation. � B. Seven-day, programming-switch timer with synchronous-timing motor and seven-day dial; � continuously charged, nickel-cadmium-battery-driven, eight-hour, power-failure carryover; multiple switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two normally open and two normally closed output contacts. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0900-4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � 1 , ' 2.8 I ' �� C. Solid-state, programmable time control with 8 separate programs each with up to 100 on-off operations; 1-second �esolution; lithium battery backup; keyboard interface and manual override; individual on-off-auto switches for each program; 365-day calendar with 20 programmable holidays; choice of fail-safe ope�ation fo� each program; system fault alarm; and communications package allowing networking of time controls and programming from PC. A. [Q ELECTRONIC SENSORS Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: 1. Manufacturers: ' a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. Ebtron, Inc. c. Heat-Timer Corporation. d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. ' e. MAMAC Systems, Inc. f. RDF Corporation. ' , , 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.. 6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches. 7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. ' b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. c. Thermometer: Concealed. d. Orientation: Horizontal. ' 8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. ' C. RTDs and Transmitters: ' ' ' ' ' 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. MAMAC Systems, Inc. c. RDF Corporation. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0900-5 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required. � 6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches. 7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. � a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. c. Thermometer: Concealed. d. Orientation: Horizontal. 8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. D. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. General Eastern Instnaments. c. MAMAC Systems, Inc. d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp. e. TCS/Basys Controls. f. Vaisala. 2. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 3. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 4. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential. 5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas or liquid service; range suitable for system; linea� output 4 to 20 mA. . E. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. 2. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. 3. Thermometer: Concealed. 4. Orientation: Horizontal. 2.9 STATUS SENSORS A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg. �I B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable � pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump. C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of � rated motor cu�rent. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0900-6 INSTRUMENTATION ANO CONTROL FOR HVAC ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � !� E F Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match cunent and system output requirements. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating, stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. 2.10 THERMOSTATS A. Manufacturers: ' B � !� ' ' I� � ' ' � ' 1. Erie Controls. 2. Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div. 3. Heat-Timer Corporation. 4. Sauter Controls Corporation. 5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc. 6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc. Electric, solid-state, microcompute�-based room thermostat with remote sensor. 1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant ovemde of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. 5. Short-cyde protection. 6. Programming based on every day of week. 7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat display features include the following: a. b: d. e. 9• Time of day. Actual room tempe�atu�e. Programmed temperature. Programmed time. Duration of timed override. Day of week. System mode indications indude "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on." C. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F inaximum differential. D. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator; listed for eledrical rating; with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F Lionshead Transit Welcome Ce�ter 23 0900-7 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction maximum differential. 1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors. 2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto. E. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated. �i � 1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. 2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields. 3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements, extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported. 4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of � instrument. 5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by application. 6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly � is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument. F. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. 2. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. 3. Thermometer: Concealed. 4. Orientation: Horizontal. G. Room thermostat accessories include the following: 1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls. 2. Thermostat Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base. 3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws. 4. Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch- diameter, adjustment knob. _ H. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point. Airstream Thermostats: Twapipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with adjustable set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element. J. Electric, Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- [or automatic- ]reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below set point. 1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet. 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface. K. Electric, High-Limit Duct TheRnostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- [or � automatic- ]reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or above set point. 1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet. � 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0900-8 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC , Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction ' ' , � L. Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, with molded-rubber diaphragm, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff pressure of 25 psig, and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob. , 2.11 A. ' ' ' , i B. ' ' ' ' , ' ' , ' ' ACTUATORS Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. 3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x Ibf. 4. Spring-Return Motors fo� Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for n.�nning and breakaway torque of 150 in. x Ibf. 5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x Ibf. 6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x Ibf. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque. 2. 3 Manufacturers: a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. Valves: Size for to�que required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-Ib/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-Ib/sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-Ib/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-Ib/sq. ft. of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop o� Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0. 4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring-�eturn actuators. 7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Retum): 24 -V ac. 8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc. 9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal. 10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F. 11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0900-9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 12. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed. 2.12 CONTROL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div. 2. Erie Controls. 3. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. 4. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. 5. Neles-Jamesbury. 6. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Skinner Valve Division. 7. Pneuline Controls. 8. Sauter Controls Corporation. �� B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. � C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable � composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, � flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc. 3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats. a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom. b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom. 4. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following: . a. Two Position: Line size. b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more. c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value specified above. 5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics. 6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for finro-way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head. D. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig, 150-psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or � ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 1. Body Style: Wafer. � 2. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron. 3. Sizing: 1-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0900-10 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �I ' ' ' ' ' �� J , ' , E. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. 1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff head. 3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage cha�acteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics. F. Self-Contained Control VaNes: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. 1. Rating: Class 125 #or seniice at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Thermostatic Operator: Wax -filled integral sensor with integral adjustable dial. 2.13 DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div. 3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison 8� Co. Inc.). 4. United Enertech Corp. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel -blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick, galvanized-steel or ' 0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches. � ' ' , 2. 3. 4. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with oil-impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x Ibf; when tested according to AMCA 500D. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION ' , ' ' A. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor. 1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. B. Install guards on the�mostats in the following locations: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0900-11 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �I 1. Entrances. � 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated. C. Install automafic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." j� D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor �' temperatures. E. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." � F. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." � G. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts. H. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27 Section "Communications � Horizontal Cabling." 3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping a�e exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and senrice of control system, except local individual room control cables. 7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0900-12 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC ,. Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � LJ �J , ' ' ' ' 3 C. ' ' ' , ' ' D ' 3.4 ' ' , test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks. DDC Verification: 1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check p�essure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-contained pressure regulators. 6. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 7. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 8. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper blade alignment, eithe� parallel or opposed, has been provided. 9. Check DDC system as follows: a. b. c. d. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency. powe� supply, if applicable. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures. DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado ' END OF SECTION 23 0900-13 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 0900-14 Vail, Colorado �II L: � � � � INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC ' 04 February 2011 Construction u SECTION 23 1123 FACILITY NATURA�-GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less . C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fab�ication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, induding analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Welding certificates. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Operation and maintenance data. ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado �� 23 1123-1 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME 616.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME 616.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE. a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves. B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K. 1. Copper Fittings: ASME 616.22, wrought copper, and streamlined pattern. 2. Flare Fittings: Comply with ASME B16.26 and SAE J513. a. Copper fittings with long nuts. b. Metal-to-metal compression seal without gasket. c. Dryseal threads complying with ASME 61.20.3. 3. Protective Coating for Underground Tubing: Factory-applied, extruded PE a minimum of 0.022 inch thick. PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. lndoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.fi9. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME 61.20.1. Maximum Length: 72 inches. B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 1123-2 Vail, Colorado � � �� FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING ' 04 February 2011 Construction � i� �� ' ' I �' 2.3 1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching piug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoo� applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable. C. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. D. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection. JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable fo� natural gas. B. C. 2.4 A. B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited. MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5 � CWP Rating: 125 psig. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME 61.20.1. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have inifials "WOG" permanently marked on vaNe body. C. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 1123-3 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2017 Construction n E. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. . 10 c. Lyall, R. W. 8� Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. CWP Rating: 600 psig. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 9 ti 10 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. �yall, R. W. 8� Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. CWP Rating: 600 psig. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. 8� Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout p�oof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 1123-4 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � � CJ � � � � fl � 2.5 2.6 f� A. A. Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Artides. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg: Co. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. Plug: Bronze. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. Pressure Class: 125 psig. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. MOTORIZED GAS VALVES Electrically Operated Valves: Comply with UL 429. 1 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson. b. Dungs, Karl, Inc. c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Goyen VaNe Corp.; Tyco Environmental Systems. e. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. f. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Climate 8� Industrial Controls Group; Skinner Valve Div. g. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Pilot operated. Body: Brass or aluminum. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel. 120-V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty molded coil, and replaceable. NEMA ICS 6, Type 4, coil endosure. Normally dosed. Visual position indicator. PRESSURE REGULATORS General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. ' lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 1123-5 Vail, Colorado � , FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction Q C. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. a. b. c. d. e. 9� Actaris. American Meter Company. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. Invensys. Maxitrol Company. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig. Appliance Pressure Reguiators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. � Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Canadian Meter Company Inc. b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div. c. Harper Wyman Co. d. Maxitrol Company. e. SCP, Inc. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. Seal Plug: Ultravidet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. Regulator may indude vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 1123-6 Vail, Colorado u � � C_� LJ �� u � � FACILITY NATURAL�AS PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction � 2.7 DIELECTRIC UNIONS A. Dielectric Unions: 2.8 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 9� h. Capitol Manufacturing Company. Central Plastics Company. Hart Industries International, Inc. Jomar International Ltd. Matco-Norca, Inc. � McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Description_ a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Detectable Warning Tape; Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and iden#ifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 � � � INDOOR PIPING 1NSTALLATION A. Comply with the Intemational Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. !� [ Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or paralle! to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 1123-7 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction ' G H. I. J. K. L. M N. O. P. Q. R. S. T. U. V. Locate valves for easy access. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements. � Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Instalt with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view. Use eccentric reducer �ttings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons fo� HVAC Piping." Lionshead Transit Welcome Cente� 23 1123-8 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � � � � � � O u � � � 3.2 A. B. 3.3 A. B. VALVE INSTALLATION Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing or copper connector. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing. PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings befo�e assembly. C. Threaded Joints: 3.4 1. Thread pipe with tape�ed pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove bu�rs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape o� thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. D. Welded Joints: E F 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten. G. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket fittings: Use socket fusion. HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and suppo�ts specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: Lionshead Transit Welcome Ce�ter 23 1123-9 FACIIITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Connect to utiliry's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment. E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance. 3.6 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and EquipmenY' for piping and valve identification. B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the Intemational Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction. B C 3.8 Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Annealed-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed flared joints. 2. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. B. Aboveg�ound, distribution piping shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 1123-10 Vail, Colorado FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction � 3.9 A. � C� ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim_ 2. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. Distribution piping valves fo� pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 1123-11 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 1123-12 Vail, Colorado � O � � � :� �_; � � � FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction � SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following: 1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Condensate-drain piping. 3. 8lowdown-drain piping. 4. Air-vent piping. 5. Safety-valve-inlet and -outiet piping. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature: 1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 psig at 200 deg F. 2. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F. 3. Blowdown-Drain Piping: 200 deg F. 4. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F. 5. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to which it is attached. 1.3 A. L:3 C. D. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. 2. Air control devices. 3. Hydronic specialties. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. Field quality-control test reports. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME 631.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, Lio�shead Tra�sit Welcome Center 23 2113-1 HYDRONIC PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction products, and installation. Safery valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. D. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS Drawn-Tempe� Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME 616.22. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. c. Victaulic Company. E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3"Piping Applications" Article. B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Pa�t 3"Piping Applications" Article. C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME 616.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3"Piping Applications" Article. F. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME 616.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. Lionshead Transit Welcome Ce�ter Vail, Colorado 23 2113-2 HYDRONIC PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction � i� 2.3 A. 2.4 � C � JOINING MATERIALS Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or 8Ag-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matcallorca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder joi�t copper alloy and threaded fer�ous. 2.5 VALVES A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2113-3 HYDRONIC PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 a. b: d. e. f. 9� Armstrong Pumps, Inc. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. Flow Design Inc. Gerand Engineering Co. Griswold Controls. Taco. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. Plug: Resin. Seat: PTFE. End Connections: Threaded or socket. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. D. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1 'r: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 11 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design tnc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi. Ball: &ass or stainless steel. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. Seat: PTFE. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. E. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Be8 8� Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2113-4 HYDRONIC PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � J � � � � fl � � � ' L� � � i , r � �' � � �1 , n � ' �J � , F C 2. 3. 5. 6. 7. 9. 10 d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Body: Bronze or brass. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. Seat: Brass. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. Diaphragm: EPT. Low inlet-pressure check valve. Inlet Strainer: <Insert materials>, removable without system shutdown. Valve Seat and Stem: Nonco�rosive. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6: 8. 9. 10. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Body: Bronze or brass. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. Seat: Brass. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. Diaphragm: EPT. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. Inlet Strainer: <Insert materials>, removable without system shutdown. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. Automatic Flow-Control Valves: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls. 2. Body: Brass or feROUS metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2113-5 HYDRONIC PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.6 2.7 A. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F. AIR CONTROL DEVICES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amtrol, Inc. 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 4. Taco. B. Manual Air Vents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Body: Bronze. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. CWP Rating: 150 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. C. Expansion Tanks: 1. 2. 3. 4. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F inaximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VI I I, Division 1. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter. Provide tank fittings for 125-psig working pressure and 250 deg F inaximum operating temperature. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure and 240 deg F inaximum operating temperature; constnacted to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch- diameter gage glass, and slotted-metal glass guard. D. In-Line Air Separators: 1. Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation. 2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig. 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F. HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: [40] [60J-mesh startup strainer, and pertorated stainless-steel basket Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2113-6 HYDRONIC PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � � L LJ � � c i� with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. I' B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: I � C. 1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Perfonnance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping." I� PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered brazed pressure-sealjoints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints. B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveg�ound, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following: C. D. E. F. G 1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered brazed joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. . Hot-Water Heating Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. Use the fewest possible joints. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints or Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints. Condensate-Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which blowdown drain is installed. Air-Vent Piping: 1 r. lnlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions. Ou�et: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints. H. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety vaNe is installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems acco�ding to the piping manufacturer's written instructions. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2193-7 HYDRONIC PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff-duty vaives at each branch connection to supply mains, and at suppfy connection to each piece of equipment. B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main. C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. F. 3.3 A. B. C. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure. PIPING INSTALLATIONS Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Instalt piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Instatl piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G H I Install piping free of sags and bends. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 02 percent upward in direction of flow. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2113-8 HYDRONIC PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � ' , N. O. P. Q. R. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. Install branch connections to mains using [mechanically formed] tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "Gene�al-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to vaNes, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. T U u Install expa�sion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." ' W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for � HVAC Piping." ' 3.4 ' , � , � X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Compl.y with �equirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel devis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-dad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado , 23 2113-9 HYDRONIC PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction � C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: � 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum �od size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. E. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points. F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intenrals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 61.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to extemal pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2113-10 HYDRONIC PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � ' t H ' I. , 3.6 i , ' � A. B. C. D. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints. HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. , 2. Support tank from floor o� structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not ove�load building components and structural members. ' 3.7 ' A. B. ' ' , 3.8 � � r � ' C. D. A. TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME 631.9 and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Leave joints, induding welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints f�om testing. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado 23 2113-11 HYDRONIC PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction �: C. protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 3. 4. 5. �� Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME 631.9, "Building Services Piping." After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. Prepare written report of testing. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION 23 2113-12 �I � �I � � LJ � HYDRONIC PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction � �� ' ' ' ' SECTION 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications. � 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410a: ' 1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 185 psig. 2. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 325 psig. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop based on manufacturer's test data. 6. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. 1. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 A. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems." Comply with ASME 631.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components." 1.5 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are dean when installed. Lionshead T�ansit Welcome Center 23 2300 - 1 REFRIGERANT PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L. B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM 6 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. F. Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch- long assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. 2.2 A. �:3 C. VALVES AND SPECIALTIES Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern. 2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring. 3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel. 4. Seat: Nylon. 5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Packed-Angle Valves: 1. Body and Bonnet: Fo�ged brass or cast bronze. 2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure. 3. Operator: Rising stem. 4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene. 5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Check Valves: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2300 - 2 Vail, Colorado � � REFRIGERANT PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction � �, �� C ' � ' � ' , ' ' � ' �_I , r ' � � � fi] E F C H. 1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern. 2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug. 3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat. 4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel. 5. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, o� flanged. 6. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Tempe�ature: 275 deg F. Service Valves: 1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. 2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Copper spring. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. 2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and [24] [115] [208]-V ac coil. 6. Working Pressu�e Rating: 400 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal. 2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750. 1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass o� steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Packing and Gask�;ts: Non-asbestos. 4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. 5. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 450 psig. Straight-Type Strainers: 1. Body: Welded steel with coROSion-resistant coating. 2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Socket or flare. 4. W�king Pressure Rating: 500 psig. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2300 - 3 Vail, Colorado REFRIGERANT PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction [� J � L WJ 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Angle-Type Strainers: 1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug. 3. Screen: 100-mesh monel. 4. End Connections: Socket or flare. 5. Working P�essure Rating: 500 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 1. Body: Forged brass. 2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter screen. 3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm. 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: tndicate moisture above 60 ppm. 5. End Connections: Socket or flare. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. Body and Cover. Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and neoprene gaskets. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated charcoal. 4. End Connections: Socket. 5. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. Body and Cover. Painted-steel shell. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated charcoal. 4. End Connections: Socket. 5. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495. 1. Body: Welded steel with cor�osion-resistant coating. 2. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2300 - 4 Vail, Colorado L! � � REFRIGERANT PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction � 2.3 A. REFRIGERANTS Availabie Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. 2. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints. B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Coppe�, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints. C. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and uvrought-copper fittings with soldered joints. D. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper flttings with soldered joints. 3.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS Install packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor. Install senrice valves for gage taps at strainers if they are not an integral part of strainers. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection. Except as otherwise indicated, install packed-angle valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators. 1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2300 - 5 REFRIGERANT PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construdion G. Instail safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressu�e Vessel Code. Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15. H. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube. 0 J K 3.3 Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for device being protected: 1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Compressor. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve, and in the suction line at the compressor. Install flexible connectors at compressors. PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings. B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. C. Install piping in concealed locations unless othenrvise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Q E F Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and senrice areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch con�ections. I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. J. Refer to Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation. K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2300 - 6 REFRIGERANT PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction ' ' , , � ' ' , � ' , i ' ' ' � , ' ' L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces. M. V C P. Q. R. S. T. U. 3.4 A. B. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. Identify ref�igerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." Instal! sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Pipi�g." PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." B�azed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. 2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2300 - 7 REFRIGERANT PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 3.5 A. 0 C. D. 3.6 A. B. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller. MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Tests and Inspections: 1. Comply with ASME 631.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping and specialties. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. 3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1"Performance Requirements" Article. a b c. 0 FiA system with nitrogen to the requi�ed test pressure. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 2300 - 8 Vaif, Colorado CI � � � � � REFRIGERANT PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction � 3.7 A. SYSTEM CHARGING Charge system using the following procedures: 1. lnstall core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat. B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure. C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature. D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings. - E. Replace core of replaceable fllter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Weicome Center 23 2300 - 9 REFRIGERANT PIPING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Tra�sit Welcome Center 23 2300 - 10 Vail, Colorado C'- J � �� u a �I REFRIGERANT PIPING � 04 February 2011 Construction � PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.2 SECTION 23 3113 METAL DUCTS 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, , components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes. ' 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. ' 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and jant construction. 9. Penetrations through fire rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. , 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3113-1 METAL DUCTS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction C. V E. 1.4 A. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: Calculations for selecting hangers and supports. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general const�uction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated const�uction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling induding the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings. Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. . Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. 3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 I� RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select jant types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3113-2 METAL DUCTS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � �'' �' � � O �' r' � � �' � ;J u ' �' ' ' C� ' ' C' ' , ' ' Flexibie." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular DucULongitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Dud Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCOIncorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable s�aling requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ' Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intenrals, and o#her provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." LJ CI' D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Late�als," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." ' 2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS ' A. General Material Requi�ements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. ' Lionshead Transit Weicome Center 23 3113-3 METAL DUCTS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction , B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article. C F G Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diamete� for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning cha�acteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 1 2. 3. 5. 6. 7. 9. 10 11 � u L�' � Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight � seal. Tape Width:3 inches. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. Wate� resistant. Mold and mildew resistant. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. Senrice: Indoor and outdoor. � Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when � calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic � Emissions from Various Sou�ces Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. Lio�shead Transit Welcome Center 23 3113-4 Vail, Colorado � METAL DUCTS , 04 February 2011 Construction �. � , ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' , ' 2.5 � , � ' , , '� C 3. 4. 5. 6: 8. 9. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. Water �esistant. Mold and mildew resistant. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. Service: Indoor or outdoor. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel {both PVC stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. coated and bare), 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. DUCT LINER A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 906 and with NAIMA AH124. 1 r. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville International, Inc. c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. d. Owens Corning. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airst�eam shall be coated to prevent erosion of glass fibers. a. Thickness: 1 inch. b. Thermal Resistance (R-Value): Minimum R-5 for ducts located within unconditioned spaces. c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 906 and with ASTM C 916. e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Cente� Vail, Colorado � L� 23 3113-5 METAL DUCTS 04 February 2011 Construction � when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct. 1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-Ib- tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall. 2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inchinto airstream. � 3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard classification of duct liner system. 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. � B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. � G. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and aRangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. � E. lnstall factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3113-6 METAL DUCTS ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � F G � branch connections. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosu�es. J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. L. 3.2 A. B. C. D. E. 3.3 A. B. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-pa�t tape sealing system. . Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. DUCT SEALING Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Artide according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3113-7 METAI DUCTS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 3.4 A. � 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Class C. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Class C. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION � Seal � Seal � � Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. E. F. 3.5 A. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. Suppo�t vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities app�opriate for supported loads and building materials where used. CONNECTIONS Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and teRninal unit connections. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3113-8 METAL DUCTS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � , ' 3.6 � A. 3 DUCT CLEANING Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. Use senrice openings for entry and inspection. � 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with ' Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. � 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. r J , �I '� ' ' � ' � �J � i �. ❑� E. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment �ooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of inetal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and Geaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado �� 23 3113-9 METAL DUCTS 04 February 2011 Construction 3.7 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.8 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel. B. Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Fur�aces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units : a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. C. Return Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units : a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. D. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C if negative pressure, and C if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C if negative pressu�e, and C if positive pressure. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3113-10 METAL DUCTS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � � � � c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. E. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units : a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. F. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum. I� G. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mite�ed Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexibte," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3113-11 METAL DUCTS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. Branch Configuration: . 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3113-12 Vail, Colorado METAL DUCTS � 04 Feb�uary 2011 Construction ' SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Smoke dampers. 6. Flange connectors. 7. Turning vanes. 8. Duct-mounted access doors. 9. Flexible connectors. 10. Flexible ducts. 11. Duct accessory hardware. 1.2 A. B. C. 1.3 A. B. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. lnclude dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control damper installations. d. Fire-damper and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Operation and maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3300-1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.2 A. Q C. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. . Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts. D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. A. B. C. D. E. BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. American WaRning and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Duro Dyne Inc. 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. Lloyd Industries, Inc. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 9. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 10. Ruskin Company. 11. SEMCOIncorporated. 12. Vent Products Company, Inc. Description: Gravity balanced. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg. Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel , with welded comers[ and mounting flange]. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3300-2 Vail, Colorado � � AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES � 04 February 2011 Construction , F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges. G. Blade Action: Parallel. H. Blade Seals: Vinyl foam. J. K. L. M Blade Axles: 1. Material: Nonferrous metal. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. Bearings: Steel ball. Accessories: 1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve. a. Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage minimum. b. Sleeve Length:.6 inches minimum. 6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel Aluminum. 8. Screen Type: Bird. 9. 90-degree stops. 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Wanning and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. METALAIRE, Inc. f. Nailor Industries Inc. g. Potto�(f; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. h. Ruskin Company. i. Trox USA Inc. j. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � ' 23 3300-3 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 04 February 2011 Construction a. Hat-shaped, galvanized -steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness. b. Mite�ed and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized -steel, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: 1 2. 3. 4. 5. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. METALAIRE, Inc. f. Nailor Industries tnc. g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. h. Ruskin Company. i. Trox USA Inc. j. Vent Products Company, Inc. Standard leakage rating. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet. e. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bea�ings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles futl length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of ope�ating shaft. C. Jackshaft: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3300-4 Vail, Colorado AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES � 04 February 2011 Construction � ❑� 2.4 � 1. Size: 1-inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly. Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. 3. Include elevated platfo�rn for insulated duct mounting. CONTROL DAMPERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. Duro Dyne Inc. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. Greenheck Fan Corporation. Lloyd Industries, Inc. M8�1 Air Systems Engineering; Division of M&I Heat Transfer Products Ltd. McGill AirFlow LLC. METALAIRE, Inc. Metal Fo�rn Manufacturing, lnc. Nailor Industries fnc. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. Ruskin Company. Vent Products Company, Inc. Young Regulator Company. B. Frames: 1. Hat shaped. 2. Galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. 3. Mitered and welded corners. C. Blades: 1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches. 2. Parallel- and opposed -blade design. 3. Galvanized steel. 4. 0.064 inch thick. 5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals. D. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3300-5 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.5 E. Bearings: 1. Oil-impregnated bronze. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade. FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. C. D. E. F. G. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. Greenheck Fan Corporation. McGill AirFlow LLC. METALAIRE, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. PHL, Inc. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc. Ruskin Company. Vent Products Company, Inc. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream ; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application. 2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors. I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring. J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links. K. Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable link and switch package, factory installed, 165 deg F rated. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3300-6 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction i� I ' 2.6 f I , � ' r � I ' � � ' ' � � 1 �l � �� a A. � SMOKE DAMPERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. PHL, Inc. 6. Ruskin Company. General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL. C. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection. D. E. F. G H. I. J. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream ; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. Blades: Roll-formed, ho�zontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interiocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors. Leakage: Class 1 . Rated pressure and velociry to exceed design airflow conditions. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application. Damper Motors: two-position action. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." 3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains. 4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x Ibf. 5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F. 6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x Ibf. 7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. K. Accessories: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3300-7 Vail, Colorado AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 04 February 2011 Construction 1. Auxiliary switches for position indication. 2. Test and reset switches, mounted. 2.7 FLANGE CONNECTORS � IQ C. 0. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. Description: Add-on, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. Material: Galvanized steel. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. 2.8 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. SEMCOIncorporated. 5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars pe�pendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate cunred blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. D. General Requi�ements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." E. Vane Construction: Single wall. F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions. 2.9 DUCTaVIOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3300-8 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � � � 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. Greenheck Fan Corporation. McGili AirFlow LLC. Nailor Industries Inc. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. Ventfabrics, Inc. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart 8 Cooley, Inc. B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible' ; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." 1. Door: 2. 3. a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. ManufaCturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. VentFabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Complywith UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf/inch in the warp and 360 Ibf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3300-9 AIR DUCT ACCESSORtES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2019 Construction 2.11 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrie� film. � � L F 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Ai� Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapo�-barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, inte�locking spiral of aluminum foil; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapo�-barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg positive or negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 5000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 250 deg F. G. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. 2. Non-Clamp Connectors: Liquid adhesive plus tape. 2.12 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE u a � � � A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap � and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3300-10 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � [Q suit duct-insulation thickness. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. INSTALLATION Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless othen�vise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and teRninate liner with nosing at hat channel. E. F. G. H. J 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Upstreamand downstream from duct filters. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. At drain pans and seals. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. Adjacent to and dose enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors; and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward ope�ation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. Upstream from turning vanes. Control devices requiring inspection. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. Access Door Sizes: ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado , 23 3300-11 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 04 February 2011 Construction K. L. M N. O. � . � 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. � 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. � 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and EquipmenY' to indicate the purpose of access door. � Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with � loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible � duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of � flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape . Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach � thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of fans. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. . 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3300-72 Vail, Colorado � AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES � 04 February 2011 Construction � SECTION 23 3423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Indudes: 1. Ceiling-mounted ventilators. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A_ Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to stn.icture and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. 4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases. C. Operation and maintenance data. ' 1.3 �J � � ' � I � A L:� QUALITY ASSURANCE . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. PennBarry. B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado i , 23 3423-1 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 04 February 2011 Construction 2.2 2.3 C. ❑� E Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service. Grille: Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in. F. Accessories: 1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light. 3. Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate. 4. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer. 5. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." L:' 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to ope�ate in senrice factor range above 1.0. 2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. [� INSTALLATION Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." � � � � � ;J C. Install units with clearances for senrice and maintenance. � D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado 23 3423-2 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS , 04 February 2011 Co�struction r 3.2 Piping and Equipment." CONNECTIONS A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. C. D. 3.3 A. B. C. D. 3.4 A. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 11 Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. Verify that deaning and adjusting are complete. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation. direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. Adjust belt tension. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. Verify iubrication for bearings and other moving parts. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Prepare test and inspection reports. ADJUSTING Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. ' B. Adjust belt tension. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � 23 3423-3 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 04 February 2011 Construction C. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. E. Lubricate bearings. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3423-4 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction SECTION 23 3713 OIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed face grilles. 2. Linear bar grilies. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integ�al to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Fixed Face Grille : 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Krueger. b. Price Industries. c. Titus. 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Core Constniction: Integral. 5. Frame: 1 inch wide. 6. Mounting: Countersunk screw. B. Linear Bar Grille : Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3713-1 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Co�struction 1 2 3 4 5 6 Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Krueger. b. Price Indust�ies. c. Titus. Material: Steel. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. Frame: 9 inch wide. Mounting: Countersunk screw. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 3713-2 Vail, Colorado � � � � DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES , 04 February 2011 Construction ' � SECTION 23 5100 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the foilowing: 1. Listed double-wall vents . B. See Division 23 Section "Draft Control Devices" for induced-draft and mechanical fans and for motorized and barometric dampers. 1.2 A. Q SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. Special gas vents. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LISTED SPECIAL GAS VENTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, p�ovide products by one of the following: 1. Heat-Fab, Inc. 2. Metal-Fab, Inc. 3. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate. 4. Schebler B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 1738 and rated for 480 deg F continuously, with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211. C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1-inCh airspace. D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel. E. Outer Jacket: Stainless steel. F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 5100 -1 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND Vail, Colorado STACKS 04 February 2011 Construction 1. Termination: Round chimney top designed to exclude minimum 98 percent of rainfall. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Listed Special Gas Vents: Condensing gas appliances. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent. B. Support vents at intenrals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without exceeding appliance loading. C. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to nearest drain. D. Lap joints in direction of flow. E. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth and apply touchup finish to match factory or shop finish. F. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed or connected to equipment. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Wetcome Center 23 5100 - 2 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND Vail, Colorado STACKS 04 February 2011 Construction SECTION 23 5216 CONDENSING BOILERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled, gas-fired, wate�-tube and water�acketed condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. lnclude plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.3 A. B. C. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N, "Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers." UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-Industria! Gas Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY ' A. Special WaRanty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within ' specified warranty period. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 5216 -1 CONDENSING BOILERS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction I ' 1. Warranty Period for Water-Tube Condensi�g Boilers: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. War�anty Period for Water-Jacketed Condensing Boilers: a. Leakage and Materials: Eight years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Nonprorated for five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Lochinvar Corporation. 2. Viessmann Manufacturing Co. (US) Inc. 3. Patterson Kelley 4. Triangle Tube 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, water-tube condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket; flue-gas vent; combustion-air intake connections; water supply, return, and condensate drain connections; and controls. Water heating senrice only. B. Heat Exchanger: Finned-copper primary and stainless-steel secondary heat exchangers. C. Combustion Chamber: Stainless steel, sealed. D. Burner: Natural gas, forced draft drawing from gas premixing valve. E. Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner firing sequence and to prepurge and postpurge the combustion chamber. 1. Motors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. F. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator. G. Ignition: Silicone carbide hot-surface ignition that includes flame safety supenrision and 100 percent main-valve shutoff. H. Integral Circulator: Cast-iron body and stainless-steel impeller sized for minimum flow required in heat exchanger. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 5216 - 2 CONDENSING BOILERS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction I. Casing: 1 2 3 4 � Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures. Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A. Finish: Textured epoxy. Insulation: Minimum 1-inch-thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the heat exchanger. Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars. Mounting base to secure boiler. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, water-jacketed condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket; flue-gas vent; water supply, return, and condensate drain connections; and controls. Water heating senrice only. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Heat Exchanger: Stainless-steel primary and secondary combustion chamber. Pressure Vessel: Carbon steel with welded heads and tube connections where not in contact with combustion or flue gases. Burner: Natural gas, forced draft; swing-open front �nd burner observation port. Blower: Centrifugal fan, forced draft. include prepurge and postpurge of the combustion chamber. 1. Mo#ors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator. Include 100 percent safety shutoff with electronic flame supervision. Ignition: Electric-spark ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoff with electronic flame supervision. Casing: 1. .lacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures. 2. Cont�ol Compartment Endosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A. 3. Finish: Powder-coated protective finish. 4. Insulation: Minimum 4-inch- thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the heat exchanger. 5. Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars. 6. Mounting base to secure boiler. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 5216 - 3 CONDENSHVG BOILERS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.4 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 2.5 A. 2.6 A. B. 2.7 A. B. TRIM Include devices sized to comply with ANSI 631.1, "Power Piping." Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch- diameter, combination water-pressure and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure and -temperature ranges so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose-end gate valve. Circulation Pump: Non-overloading, in-line pump with split-capacitor motor having thermal-overload protection and lubricated bearings; designed to operate at specified boiler pressures and temperatures. ELECTRICAL POWER Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections. VENTING KITS Kit: Complete system, pipe, vent terminal, thimble, indoor plate, vent adapter, condensate trap and dilution tank, and sealant. Combustion-Air Intake: Complete system, stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal with screen, inlet air coupling, and sealant. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BOILER INSTALLATION A. Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 5216 - 4 CONDENSING BOILERS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. Vibration Isolation: Elastomeric isolation pads with a minimum static deflection of 0.25 inch. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Vbration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54. D. Assemble and install boiler trim. E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted. F. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices. - 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general aRangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance. C �� E. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of materials suitable for service. Flexible connecto�s and their installation are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC." Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas train connection. Provide a reducer if required. F. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. G. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain. H. Boiler Venting: 1. Install flue venting kit and combustion-air intake. 2. Connect full size to boiler connections. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." I. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." J. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 5216 - 5 CONDENSING BOILERS Vail, Colorado 04 Feb�uary 2011 Construction including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacture►'s written instructions. 2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air-fuel ratio and combustion. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set points of fuel supply, water level, and water temperature. b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.4 A. DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 5216 - 6 Vail, Colorado � � � � CONDENSING BOILERS ' 04 February 2011 Construction � SECTION 23 6313 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes packaged, air-cooled refrigerant condensers for outdoor installation. 1.2 A. B. C� SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on D�awings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Carrier Corporation; Commercial HVAC Systems. 2. McQuay Intemational. 3. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies. 4. YORK; a Johnson Controls company. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of casing, condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls. B. Refrigerant: R-410A . Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 6313 -1 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT Vail, Colorado CONDENSERS 04 February 2011 Construction C. Condenser Coil: Factory tested at 425 psig. D. Condenser Fans and Drives: Forward-curved centrifugal fans for horizontal air discharge. E. F. 2.3 A. 2.4 A. 1. Fan on steel shaft with self-aligning ball bearings. 2. V-belt drive with minimum of two belts; variable pitch drive pulley. 3. Motor mounted on adjustable slide base. Operating and Safety Controls: Include condenser fan motor thermal and overload cutouts; 115-V control transformer, if requi�ed; magnetic contactors for condenser fan motors and a nonfused factory-mounted and -wired disconnect switch for single external electricat power connection. Casings: Galvanized or zinc-coated steel treated and �nished with manufacturer's standard paint coating, designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and controls, and with the following: 1. Removable panels for access to controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives. 2. Plated -steel fan guards. 3. Lifting eyes. MOTORS Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 3. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. 4. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to ARI 270. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. INSTALLATION Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Equipment Mounting: Install air-cooled condenser refrigerant condensers using elastomeric pads Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment_" C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 6313 - 2 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT Vail, Colorado CONDENSERS 04 February 2011 Const�uction � � � � � � � � � L � [�J � ' � i D. 3.2 A. B. C. 3.3 A. B. � � � Loose Components: Instali electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted. CONNECTIONS Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. Refrigerant Piping: Connect piping to unit with pressure relief, service valve, filter-dryer, and moisture indicator on each refrigerant-circuit liquid line. Refrigerant piping and specialties are specified in Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanicai inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, cha�ge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 5. Verify proper airflow over coils. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure. Air-cooled refrigerant condensers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 6313 - 3 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT Vail, Colorado CONDENSERS 04 February 20'!1 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado �J � � ' � , �I � CI � � � LJ ' , ' ' � 23 6313 - 4 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT � CONDENSERS 04 February 2011 Const�uction ' SECTION 23 8219 FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.7 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required dearances, method of field assembly, components, and focation and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Powe�, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, ArtiGe 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In the Fan-Coil-Unit Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to p�oduct selection: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each fan-coil unit is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 DUCTED FAN-COIL UNITS A. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 8219 - 1 FAN COIL UNITS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction G3 C. D. E. F. Coil Section Insulation: 1/2-inch thick foil-faced glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916. 1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. Drain Pans: Stainless steel. Fabricate pans and drain connections to comply with AS H RAE 62.1-2004. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture, with baked-enamel finish and removable access panels. Cabinets: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturers standard paint color. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. G. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain. H. Direct-Driven Fans: Double width, fonivard curved, centrifugal; with permanently lub�icated, multispeed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel whee�s, and painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls. I. Belt-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the cabinet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls. 1. Motors: Comply with �equirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." J. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controts for a single electrical connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. INSTALLATION Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Verify locations of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above finished floor. � �I � u � � 1 � �J � D. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion. l.ionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 8219 - 2 FAN COIL UNITS � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � i� s� I ' � E. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows: 1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 2. Connect piping to fan-coil-unit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package if shipped loose. 3. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste. ' a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction. � F. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections. 3.2 FIELD QUALtTY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. � �ionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado I , END O.F SECTION 23 8219 - 3 FAN COIL UNITS 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 8219 - 4 Vail, Colorado � �--' n ��I � � � �� I � � � � FAN COIL UNITS � 04 February 2011 Construction � SECTION 23 8239 UNIT HEATERS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and hot-water coiis. 2. Propeller unit heaters with hot-water coils. 1.2 SUBMITTALS � 0 C. D. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characte�istics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each product indicated. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. Field quality-control test reports. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CABINET UNIT HEATERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 2. Car�ier Corporation. 3. International Environmental Corporation. 4. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation. 5. Marley Electric Heating; a division of Mariey Engineered Products. 6. McQuay International. 7. QMark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 8. Trane. B. Description: A factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with ARI 440. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 8239-1 UNIT HEATERS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.2 C. C� C F A. 0 C. 1. Comply with UL 2021. Coil Section Insulation: Glass-fiber insulation; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be aluminum-foil facing to prevent erosion of glass fibers. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 4. Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 906. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004. Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect. 1. 2. 4. 6. Vertical Unit, Exposed Front Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel, removable panels with channel-formed edges secured with tamperproof cam fasteners. Horizontal Unit, Exposed Bottom Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel, removable panels secured with tamperproof cam fasteners and safety chain. Recessing Flanges: Steel, flnished to match cabinet. Base: Minimum 0.0528-inch- thick steel, finished to match cabinet, 4 inches high with leveling bolts. Extended Piping Compartment: 8-inch- wide piping end pocket. False Back: Minimum 0.0428-inch- thick steel, finished to match cabinet. Hot-Wate� Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain. Fan and Motor Board: Removable. 1. Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor. Thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels, and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steel fan scrolls. 2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 3. Wiring Terminations: Connect moto� to chassis wiring with plug connection. PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Engineered Air Ltd. 2. McQuay International. 3. Trane. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in horizontal discharge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers. Comply with UL 2021. D. Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to controls. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 8239-2 UNIT HEATERS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction LJ u � �- i' � � � �i , � � �_� � � � � � � � i E F Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's [standard] [custom) baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heater before shipping. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical units. G. Hot-Water Coil: Test and rate hot-water propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33. Copper tube, minimum 0.025-inch wall thickness, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 325 deg F, with manual air vent. Test for leaks to 350 psig underwater. H. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi. I. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in"" Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Type: Permanently lubricated. I' PART 3 - EXECUTION ( � 3.1 I � � � I � � ' i� I � � ' � � � � INSTALLATION A. Install unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolatorsare specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to stn.�cture are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Vibration hangers are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." � E Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on supply-water connection and union and calibrated balancing valve on return-water connection of unit heater. F. Install new #ilters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion. G. � Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. Connect piping to cabinet unit heater's factory, hot-water piping package. Install the piping package if shipped loose. J. Connect supply and return ducts to cabinet unit heaters with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 8239-3 UNIT HEATERS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction K. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995. �. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Rep�ace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 8239-4 UNIT HEATERS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction SECTION 23 8316 RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes radiant heating piping, including pipes, fittings, and piping � specialties. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of radiant heating pipe, fitting, manifold, specialty, and control. B. Shop Drawings: Show piping layout and details drawn to scale, including valves, manifolds, controls, and support assemblies, and their attachments to building structure. C. Operation and maintenance data. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 A. . D. E. PEX PIPE AND FITTINGS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. REHAU. 2. Uponor Wirsbo Co. Pipe Material: PEX plastic according to ASTM F 876. Oxygen Barrier: Limit oxygen diffusion through the tube to maximum 0.10 mg per cu. m/day at 104 deg F according to DIN 4726. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, metal insert and copper crimp rings. Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 100 psig and 180 deg F. 2.2 DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLDS A. Manifold: Minimum NPS 1, copper. B. Main Shutoff Valves: 1. Factory installed on supply and return connections. l.ionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 8316 -1 Vail, Colorado RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction 2. Two -piece body. 3. Body: Brass or bronze. 4. Bali: Chrome-plated bronze. 5. Seais: PTFE. 6. CWP Ra6ng: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. C. Manual Air Vents: ❑� E 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Body: Bronze. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. Operator: Key furnished with valve, or screwdriver bit. tnlet Connection: NPS 1/2. � Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. CWP Rating: 150 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. Balancing Valves: 1. Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type. 2. Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel. 3. Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer. 4. Seat: PTFE. 5. Visual Flow Indicator: Flowmeter with visible indication in a clear plastic cap at top of valve. 6. Differential Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable meter to measure ioss across calibrated orifice. 7. Handle Style: Lever or knob, with memory stop to retain set position if used fo� shutoff. 8. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. Zone Control Valves: 1. 2. 3. 4. 6. 7. Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type. Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel. Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer. Seat: PTFE. Actuato�: Replaceable electric motor. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. F. Thermometers: 1. Mount on supply and return connections. 2. Case: Dry type, metal or plastic, 2-inch diameter. 3. Element: Bourdon tube o� other type of pressure element. 4. Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer. 5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Black metal. 7. Window: Plastic. 8. Connector: Rigid, back type. 9. Thermal System: Liquid- or mercury-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 8316 - 2 RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC Vail, Colorado PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction � � O �I ' I FJ � u � � � u �i �J � � � aluminum, or brass stem. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. G. Mounting Brackets: Copper, or plastic or copper-clad steel, where in contact with manifold. 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Cable Ties: 1. Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 2. Minimum Width: 1/8 inch. 3. Tensile Strength: 20 Ib, minimum. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. 3.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Install the following types of radiant heating piping for the applications described: 1. Piping in Exterior Pavement: PEX . INSTALLATION Drawing plans, schematics, and diag�ams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop or Coordination Drawings. Install radiant heating piping continuous from the manifold through the heated panel and back to the manifold without piping joints in heated panels. Connect radiant piping to manifold in a reverse-return arrangement. Do not bend pipes in radii smaller than manufacturer's minimum bend radius dimensions. Install manifolds in accessible locations, or install access panels to provide maintenance access as required in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." Refer to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" for pipes and connections to hydronic systems and for glycol-solution fill requirements. Fire- and Smoke-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire �ating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penet�ations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." Piping in Exterior Pavement: 1. Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to reinforcement using cable ties. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 23 8316 - 3 RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC Vail, Colorado PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction � L. 3.3 A. B. C. n 2. Space cable ties a maximum of 18 inches o.c., and at center of turns or bends. 3. Maintain 3-inch minimum cover. 4. Install a sleeve of 3/8-inch- thick, foam-type insulation or PE pipe around tubing and extending for a minimum of 10 inches on each side of slab joints to protect the tubing passing through expansion or control joints. Anchor sleeve to slab form at control joints to provide maximum clearance for saw cut. 5. Maintain minimum 40-psig pressure in piping during concrete placement and continue for 24 hours after placement. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and ensure integrity of piping and as approved by Architect. After system balancing has been completed, mark balancing valves to permanently indicate final position. Perform the following adjustments before operating the system: 1. Open valves to fully open position. 2. Check operation of zone control valves. 3. Set temperature controls so all zones call for full flow. 4. Purge air from piping. After the concrete or plaster heating panel has cured as recommended by concrete supplier, operate radiant heating system as follows: Start system heating at a maximum of 10 deg F above the ambient radiant panel temperature, and increase 10 deg F each following day until design temperature is achieved. 2. For freeze protection, operate at a maximum of 60 deg F supply-water temperature. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Prepare �adiant heating piping for testing as follows: 1. Open all isolation valves and close bypass valves. 2. Open and verify operation of zone control valves. 3. Flush with clean water, and clean strainers. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Subject piping to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure but not more than 100 psig. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Remove and replace malfunctioning radiant heating piping components that do not pass tests, and �etest as specified above. Prepare a written repo�t of testing. Lionshead Tra�sit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION � LJ J � � [- i �� [- i � � �I 23 8316 - 4 RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC � PIPING 04 February 2011 Construction � � ' LJ t SECTION 260010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS � A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further for instructions and be governed by the requirements contained there under. � 1.02 � A. DESCRIPTION Work Included 1. Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and materials, unless � othennrise specified, necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems as required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the completion of those details of � electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems. B. , � � 1.03 A. � � r ' ' � S Work Not Included Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other sections of these specifications, by Utility Companies or by the Owner; when this is the case, the extent, source, and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as described in the specification. PROVISIONS Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, the electrical drawings, and all items hereinafter specified. � 3. 4. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine architectural, structural, civil, and landscape mechanical, drawings and specifications. If any discrepancies occur between them and the electrical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual constn.iction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the electricat work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. Coordinate the electrical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the same. Coordinate electrical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner's agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 0010 -1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colo�ado 04 February 2011 Construction 1.04 A. In acceptance or rejection of installed electrical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. CODES AND STANDARDS The latest editions of the following standards (including supplements and official interpretations) are minimum requirements: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). NFPA 72 — National Fire Alarm Code. NFPA 101 — Life Safety Code. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). Uniform Building Code. Uniform Mechanical Code. Uniform Fire Code. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). B. The complete installation shall comply with requirements of the utility and telephone companies furnishing service to this installation. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, statutes, or ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with the drawings and specifications. 1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install". "Furnish" means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application. "Install" means to join, unit, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation. The words "accept" or "acceptable" denote only that the equipment items are in general conformance with the design concept of the project. B. Drawings: The drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches, panelboards and other work. Information shown on the drawings is schematic, however, re-circuiting will not be permitted without specific acceptance. Drawings and specifications are complementary to each other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Data presented on these drawings is accurate as planning can be determined, but accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of al! dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to suit �eld conditions is directed. Review all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications; adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. The Architectural drawings shall take precedence over all other drawings. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � � �J � � � � 26 0010 - 2 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS , 04 February 2011 Construction O ' � � 2. Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between specifications or regulations and codes governing this installation shall be brought to the attention of the Architect in writing before the date of bid opening. In the event such discrepancies exist, and the Architect is not so notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall be solely at the discretion of the Architect. � MINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.06 EXA � � � i LJ � i � ' �-, J u � � � a A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request tathe Engineer for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or cor�ection will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. Failure to request clarification during the bid period of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of their responsibilities. The signing of the contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of the full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.07 PERMITS, FEES 8 NOTICES A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, inspections and certificates that may be necessary for the full completion of the work. Furnish the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval f�om the AHJ over the electrical installation. B. 1.08 A. 1.09 Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and regulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. TESTS Upon completion of all work and adjustment of all equipment, provide complete operational tests of all electrical equipment provided under this division. WARRANTY A. Guarantee that all work governed by this division shall be free of defects in workmanship, materials and pa�ts for a period of one (1) year after written acceptance. Promptly repair, revise, and replace defects as directed with no additional cost to the Owner (lamps and fuses are exempt). Lionshead Transit Welcome Cerrter 26 0010 - 3 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain a current set of electrical drawings at the site. Neatly mark all changes and deviations from the original drawings. Use a color which contrasts with the prints. This shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be kept up to date as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the Architect at all times. These updated progress drawings shall be used to produce the final record drawings that shall be in AutoCad electronic format media upon project completion. B. C. 1.11 A. B. Upon completion of the contract, both sets (electronic and hard copy drawings) of record drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. The Contractor shall mark all record drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a stamp impression that reads'RECORD DRAWINGS' or simila�. PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of job and ascertain all conditions affecting the proposed installation and adjust all work accordingly. Make provisions for these costs. C. Coordinate the work with that of all other trades. Where conflicts of work occur and departure from the indicated arrangements are necessary, consult with other Contractors involved; come to agreement as to changed locations and elevations, etc., and obtain written acceptance from the Architect of proposed changes before proceeding with work. D. All outages of electrical senrice shall be scheduled with the Owner and Utility Company five (5) days in advance of proposed outage. Include an overtime allowance in the bid for the performance of all work requiring outages at such time as it is approved by the Owner. Outages shall be at a time and of such duration as accepted by the Owner. 1.12 � 1.13 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. USE OF THE ARCHITECT'S AND/OR ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS � � �! � � � O � A. The Contractor shall obtain, at the Contractor's expense, from the Architect or Engineer a set � of AutoCAD or compatible format architectural and engineering drawings on electronic media where desired by the Contractor and/or required by the Specifications for use in preparing the � shop drawings, coordination drawings, and record drawings. The Contractor shall provide to the Architect and Engineer a written release of liability acceptable to the Architect and Engineer prior to receiving the electronic media. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 0010 - 4 Vail, Colorado O � ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS � 04 February 2011 Construction � �' � ' PART 2 - GENERAL � 2.1 � � � 2.2 � STANDARD FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. L-'-� �� All electrical materials shall be acceptable for installation only if labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities. SUBMITTALS Submit under provision of Division 1 B. Listing of Equipment: ihe Contractor shall submit, within thirty days after the award of the � contract, a complete typewritten list of those items of equipment which will be furnished under this contract. Include the name or description of the item, name of manufacturer, model, type, and catalog number. ' � f� � C. Present shop drawing submittal data at one time, bound in three-ring binders, indexed in a neat and orderly manner. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Do not begin work until (1) copy is returned. D. Submit five (5) copies of shop drawings, layouts, manufacturer's data, wiring diagrams and material schedules that may be requested by the Architect for his review. The review by the Architect will not constitute concurrence with any deviation from the plans and specifications unless such deviations are specifically identified by the method described below, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the submitted data. � E. Processed shop drawings shall not be construed as change orders. The shop drawings shall demonstrate that the Contractor understands the design concept, indicate which equipment and materials he intends to provide, and detail the fabrication and instailation methods he intends ' to use. If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and the design drawings and specifications are discovered, the design drawings and specifications shall govern. ' i i � � � F. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (which he shall confirm and correlate at the job site), fabrication processes and techniques of constn.�ction and coordination of his work with that of other trades. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review shop drawings before submitting them and sign a statement on the shop drawings which signifies that they comply with plans and specifications and that equipment is dimensionally suitable for the application. If any deviations from the specified requirements for any item of material or equipment exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing a�d incorporated with the submittal. The Owner's copies (two of each) of the reviewed submittals shall be retained by the Contractor until completion of the project and presented in bound form to the Owner. G. Provide, with shop d�awing submittal, 1/4" scale layout drawings of room with switchboards, transformers, telephone backboards, panelboards, and data equipment. Layouts shall show locations of, and shall be coordinated with mechanical equipment. Equipment shall be drawn to scale. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 0010 - 5 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.3 2.4 A. � BID ALTERNATE(S) Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. Alternate(s) for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid altemates at the time the base bids are due. SUBSTITUTIONS (CONTRACTOR AND/OR OWNER INITIATED) A. Materials or equipment listed by several manufacturers' names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed manufacturers may be used in the base bid. Materials or equipment not listed are considered substitutions. B. Performance Specification: When any item is specified by requirement to meet a performance, industry or regulating body standard or is specified generically (no manufacturer's name listed), no prior review by the Consulting Electrical Engineer is needed unless specifically called for in these specifications. C. C�] Contractor to be responsible for any changes and costs to accommodate any equipment except the first named in the specification. Substitutions fo� Material 1. Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item to the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such substitutions shall not be substituted for the base bid and must be accompanied by a full description of the difference between the Contract Document requirements and that of the substitution, the comparative features of each, and the effect of the change on the end result perfo�mance. Include the impact of all changes on other contractors and acknowledge the inclusion of additional costs to the other trades. If any such alternates are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions will not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concems. Lionshead T�ansit Welcome Cente� 26 0010 - 6 Vail, Colorado � LJ !_! � � LJ � � � ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS � 04 February 2011 Construction � ' � PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 � 'I � I' A. �3 WORKMANSHIP AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perform the work shall be weii versed and skilled in the trades involved. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components. C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. D. Any changes or deviations from the drawings and specifications must be accepted in writing by � the Architect/Engineer. All errors in installation shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. All specialties shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Where detail or specific installation requirements are not provided, manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed. � ' �l �J � 3.2 1 � 3.3 u �� E. Upon completion of work, all equipment and materials shall be installed complete, thoroughly checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or operation. All work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all residue shall be removed from surfaces. Exterior surfaces of all material and equipment shall be delivered in a perfect, unblemished condition. F. Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material, cartage, insurance, permits, and taxes. PROGRESS OF WORK A. Order the progress of electrical work to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill-timed work performed under this Section shall be bome by this Contractor. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Perform all trenching and backfilling required by work performed under this Section in accordance with the excavating and grading specifications as herein specified. This work shall comply with the requirements of Table 300-5 of the National Electrical Code. B. Excavate trenches to the depth required for the utilities involved. The trench bottom shall be graded true and free from stones or soft spots. Trenches through specially treated or surfaced areas, such as paving or blacktop, shall have the width of the surface cutting extended for a width of eight inches (8") on each side of the open trench. Uniess otherwise noted, the disturbed surfaces shall be replaced equal to the original construction, to the original grade with the same type of material, and to the same depths and limits as the materials removed. After acceptance by the Architect, backfill, tamp, and compact to insure against the possibility of differentiat settling, in conformity with Division 2 Specifications. Verify location of existing or new utilities and, if damaged by this Contractor, replace or repair. , Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado ' 26 0010 - 7 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 04 Feb�uary 2011 Construction 3.4 CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any damage to the building, structure, piping, ducts, equipment or any defaced finish shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Architect. Any necessary cutting, channeling, drilling or ancho�ing of raceways, outlets, or other electrical equipment shall be performed in a careful manner, and as accepted by the Architect. � �J � �� B. All openings made in fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a � manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated. C. All penetrations required through existing concrete construction shall be core drilled at � minimum size required. Precautions shall be taken when drilling to prevent damage to structural concrete. Contractor shall obtain permission from the Architect before proceeding with drilling. D. 3.5 A. B. C. D. 3.6 Provide all cutting, trenching, backfilling, patching and refinishing or resurfacing required for electrical work in a manner meeting the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS Arrange and be held responsible for delivery and safe storage of materials and equipment for electrical installation. Store materials and equipment for easy inspection and checking. Carefully mark and store all materials. Deliver materials to the job site in stages of the work that will expedite the work as a whole. E. Carefully check materials furnished to this Contractor for installation, and provide receipt acknowledging acceptance of delivery and condition of the materials received. Thereafter, assume full responsibility for its safekeeping until the final installation has been reviewed and accepted. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any faciliry must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. B. Close all conduit openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Any equipment or conduit systems found to have been damaged o� contaminated above "MILL" or "SHOP" conditions shall be replaced o� cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 0010 - 8 E�ECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � �J � i � , � 3.7 i LJ � ' ' � , ' ' � , r ' , � FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions a�e received and Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in the maintenance and operation of all equipment. B. Operating manual, parts lists, and indoctrination of operating and maintenance personnel: Furnish the services of a qualified representative of the supplier for each item or system itemized below who shall instruct specific personnel, as designated by the Owner, in the operation and maintenance of that item or system. C. Instruction shall be made when the pa�ticular system is complete and shall be of the number of hours indicated and at the time requested by the Owner. A representative of the Electrical Contractor shall be present for all demonstrations. SYSTEM HRS. OF INSTRUCTION 1. Fire alarm s stem 2 2. Li htin control s stems 2 D. Deliver three (3) complete operating manuals and parts lists to the Owner (or his designated representative) at the time of the above required indoctrination. Fully explain the contents of the manuals as part of required indoctrination and instruct the Owners personnel in the correct procedure in obtaining service, both during and after the guarantee period. The operating manual and parts lists shall give complete information as to whom the Owner shall contact for service and parts, including the address and phone number. Furnish evidence that an authorized service organization regularly carries a complete stock of repair parts for these items (or systems), and that the organization is available for service. Service shall be furnished within twenty four (24) hours after requested. E. Clean up:� Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation and leave the premises and all equipment, lamps, fixtures, etc. in a clean, orderly condition. Any costs to the Owner for clean up of the site will be charged against the Contractor. F G Acceptance Demonstration: Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the A�chitect, the Contractor shall demonstrate for the Owner the operation of the entire installation, including all systems provided under this contract. Operating and Acceptance Tests: Provide all labor, instruments, and equipment for the performance of tests as specified. Submi# three (3) copies of a typewritten test report for the Architect for his approval. 1. Record the full load current in each phase or line at the main service entrance and for each feeder leaving the main distribution panelboard. Readings shall be taken with the maximum installed load connected and in operation. 2. Perform a careful inspection of the main switchboard bus stn.icture and cable connections to verify that all connections are mechanically and electrically tight. 3. Measure the resistance to ground for the service ground, which shall not exceed ten (10) ohms under normal soil moisture conditions. If required, install additional ground provisions in a manner accepted by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. , Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado , 26 0010 - 9 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 04 February 2011 Construction 3.8 A ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR ROOFS Raceways penetrating roofs shall be installed in a manner to preserve the integrity of the roof Provide flashing and counter flashing for all roof penetrations required for the work. B. Conduits routed above roofs shall be installed a minimum of twelve inches (12") above the finished roof surface, supported on metal stands installed with flashing and counter flashing, with maximum spacing of ten feet (10'-0"). 3.9 CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING AND POWER A. Provide all temporary facilities required to supply construction power and light. Install and maintain facilities in a manner that will protect the public and workmen. Comply with all applicable laws and regulations. 0 C. ❑� Provide covered walkway lights and obstruction lights which shall be kept burning continuously between sunset and sunrise where required. Upon completion of the work, �emove all temporary facilities from the site. The General Contractor shall pay for all power and light used by him and his subcontractors where construction power is separately metered, or is taken from the permanent project metered service solely for construction use. E. The cutoff date for power cost allocation where permanent mete�s are used shall be either the agreed date of occupancy by the Owner or the date of final acceptance of the project, whichever shall be the earlier date. 3.10 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING AND CONNECTIONS A. Furnish, set in place, and wire, except as indicated, all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing, fire protection, motors and controls in accordance with the following schedule. Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical Division of these specifications. SET IN PLACE WIRED FURNISHED OR MTD. CONNECTED ITEM UNDER UNDER UNDER 1. Equipment motors and MD MD ED thermal overload, resistance heaters. 3 2. Motor controllers, magnetic sta�ters, reduced MD ED(a) ED voltage starters and overload rela s. 3. Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, h.p. rated ED(a) ED(a) ED switches, thermal overload switches and fuses, manual Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 0010 -10 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �1 O � � � � � O � LJ �! � J � , , i ' ' � � ' li � ' , � � C� ' ' , , , ' B. C. 3.11 o eratin switches. 4. Pushbutton stations, pilot lights, multi-speed switches, float switches, thermostats, control relays, time clocks, MD MD(b) MD(b) control transformers, control panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and interlocks. 5. Contactors, 120V control circuit outlets for control ED ED ED panels and for boiler controls and for fire protection cont�ols and smoke detectors. 6. Duct Detectors, MD MD ED(c) Fi�e/Smoke Dampers, and Elevator Vent Dam ers. MD=Mechanical, Division 15. ED=Electrical, Division 16. a. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, then wiring and connections only by ED. b. If float switches, line thermostats, p.e. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, the Mechanical Division shall furnish them. They shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except there where such items are an integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the full load current to any motor, they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division. Control devices carrying FULL LOAD CURRENT furnished by Mechanical and wired by Electrical shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. 1) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. c. The above list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. Provide electrical connections to mechanical equipment. Refer to the Mechanical specifications and plans covering sprinkler systems, motor interlocks, switching, etc. Provide wiring, conduit, outlets and final electrical connections to all equipment. Where motor controllers are furnished by others, install controller and provide connections at line and load side of controllers. ELEVATORS A. Locate equipment and points of connection in elevator machine rooms and elevator pits in accordance with the requirements of the elevator vendor and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 0010 - 11 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. Provide a fused switch or circuit breaker, dedicated 3-phase branch circuit, and power connection for each elevator. Fused switch or circuit breaker shall be located within elevator machine room. Circuit breaker rating shall be in accordance with elevator manufacturer's requirements. C. D. E. F. G. H. �� 3.12 A. B. C. Provide a dedicated 120V, 20A circuit with lockable disconnect switch and connection to each elevator cab fo� elevator cab lighting and ventilation. Provide a dedicated 120V, 20A circuit and connect to elevator system intercom in elevator machine room. Provide a dedicated circuit and connect to each elevator controller for control power. Circuit rating shall be in accordance with the elevator vendor's requirements. Provide a dedicated circuit for weatherproof lighting fixtures, lighting switches and duplex receptacles within each elevator pit. Provide a dedicated telephone outlet for each elevator. Provide and empty 3/" raceway from each telephone outlet to the nearest telephone backboard. Provide empty raceways from elevator shafts to the elevator control and status panel(s). Size, quantity and location of raceway termination points shalt be in accordance with the elevator vendor's requirements. Provide a fire alarm speaker within each elevator cab. Connect to the Fire Management System –Voice Communication System. Provide a firefighter's telephone jack in each elevator cab. Connect to Fire Management System—Firefighter's Telephone System. Connect power supply circuits serving elevators and related controls and accessories to the emergency power distribution system. Provide conduit and wire between elevator controllers and automatic transfer switches and make connections required for automatic recall and operation of elevators from the emergency power distribution system in the event of power failure. OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT Provide electrical connections to owner furnished equipment. Inspect owner furnished equipment for damage, defects, missing components, etc. Report deficiencies to the Owne� immediately. Do not install or connect deficient equipment. Provide supports, fastenings, and auxiliary hardware necessary for a complete installation in accordance with the finished building conditions. f �: t�Z�I��iC�I:I Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 0010 -12 Vail, Colorado � CJ O � � � ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS � 04 February 2011 Construction � SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 A. � QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrica! Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN andXHHW. C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-dad cable, Type MC with ground wire. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work indude, but are not limited to, the following: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 260519 -1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL Vail, Colorado POWER CONDUCTORS AND CAB�ES 04 February 2011 Construction PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC. D. Feeders Conceafed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-TMNN, single conductors in raceway. F. G 3.3 A. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Metal-clad cable, Type MC. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, induding fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 260519 - 2 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL Vail, Colorado POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 04 February 2011 Construction F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4866. H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. 3.4 A. 3.5 A. SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." FIRESTOPPING Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-�esistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 260519 - 3 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL Vail, Colorado POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 04 February 2011 Construction �ionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado �J � O �.1 � O � u � 260519 - 4 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND � CABLES 04 February 2011 Construction u SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 A. B. C. CONNECTORS Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conducto�s and other items connected. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; in diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductor Te�rninations and Connections: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 0526 -1 Vail, Colorado GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 04 February 2011 Construction 3.2 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING Bolted connectors. A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Feeders and branch circuits. Lighting circuits. Receptacle circuits. . Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. Flexible raceway runs. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. C. ❑� 3.3 Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors. INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otheruvise indicated o� required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. L:3 C Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as othervvise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least [three] <Insert number> rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service g�ounding electrode conductor. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent pa�ts. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 0526 - 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING Vail, Colorado FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 04 February 2011 Construction � �l �� ' ' ' ' ' ' �� ' ' � �J n LJ � ' ' ' ' ' ' a � E. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 2. 3. Metal Water Senrice Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. Bond each aboveground po�tion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install [tinned )bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION 26 0526 - 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado C! LJ � � � � C°J i 26 0526 - 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING , FOR ELECTRICAL SYSiEMS 04 February 2011 Construction � SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembty. 1. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 2. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Vail, Colorado ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 04 February 2011 Construction B. C. D. 3.2 A. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1 /4 inch in diameter. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1 /2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. SUPPORT INSTALLATION Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be supported by openings through stn,icture members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 Ib. 3.3 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. G3 C. Apply paint by b�ush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado END OF SECTION � � � �I', � LJ �II � � 26 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR , ELECTRICAI SYSTEMS 04 February 2019 Construction � SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. TMis Section indudes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. - 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. B. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Minimum Raceway Size: [1/2-inch] [3/4-inch] trade size. B. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 260533 -1 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR Vail, Colorado ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 04 February 2011 Construction 3.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. � INSTALLATION Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless othen�vise indicated. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conducto�s smaller than No. 4 AWG. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-Ib tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of finro 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes o� terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Whe�e conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 260533 - 2 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR Vail, Colorado ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 04 February 2011 Construction � �II � � � � � � � � � K�3 A. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. FIRESTOPPING Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-�esistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 260533 - 3 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR Vail, Colorado ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 04 February 2011 Construction Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � � � � � � �J � � 260533 - 4 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR � ELECTRICAI SYSTEMS 04 February 2011 Const�uction � SECTION 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Photoelectric switches. 2. Indoor occupancy and switchbox-mounted occupancy sensors. 6. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual light switches. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings o� comparable product by one of the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Intermatic, lnc. 3. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand. 2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc. Lionshead Transit Welcome 260923 -1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Center 04 February 2011 Vail, Colorado Construction f:3 C. D. 2.3 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 3. Lightolier Controls. 4. Lithonia Ligh6ng; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 5. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 6. Watt Stopper. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 30 minutes. 3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack. 4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. 5. Mounting: Q 7 a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage a�ea by their heat and movement. _ 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that p�esents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of reflected ultrasonic energy. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Lightolier Controls. Lionshead Transit Welcome 260923 - 2 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Center 04 February 2011 Vail, Colorado Construction �J � � � � � O � � O u � � , ' ' j�J L__J ' ' ' ' CI' , 1 � ' ' �J ' ' � � 2.4 A. 0 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 6. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 7. Watt Stopper. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V, and 800-W incandescent. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sou�ces: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturers written instructions. 6. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. C. ❑� 3.2 For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: Lionshead Transit Welcome 260923 - 3 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Center 04 February 2011 Vail, Colorado Co�struction � � 1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome 260923 - 4 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Center 04 February 2011 Vail, Colorado Construction SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 A. B. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with NEMA PB 1. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoo� Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Hinged F�ont Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 3. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. C. Phase, Neut�al, and Ground Buses: Tin-plated aluminum. D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 2416 -1 PANELBOARDS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction E. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: [Compression] [Mechanical] type, suitable for use with conducto� material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: {Compression] [Mechanical] type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and b�anch devices, and listed and labeled for series-connected sho�t-circuit rating by an NRTL. 2.2 A. 2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Square D or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secu�ed with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. � E Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Plug-in circuit breakers. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches. A. ;� C. LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer 8� Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy 8� Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1,lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. Mains: lugs only. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 2416 - 2 Vail, Colorado i- � � ��' � � �I, � C! � � -, 4. � � C� � LJ � � PANELBOARDS � 04 February 2011 Construction I '�� D. E. 2.4 A. B. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-cuRent element for low-level ove�loads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Shunt Trip: 120 -V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage. f. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position. g. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. INSTALLATION Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 2416 - 3 PANELBOARDS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction F. G. H. 3.2 A. B. C. D. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. Comply with NECA 1. IDENTIFICATION Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to c�eate directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 2416 - 4 Vail, Colorado PANELBOARDS � 04 February 2011 Construction ' SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Wall-box motion sensors. 3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 4. Communications outlets. B. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizonta� Cabling" for workstation outlets. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. B. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices 8� Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Lionshead T�ansit Welcome Center 26 2726 -1 WIRING DEVICES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES � A. General Description: Straight blade, [feed] [non-feed]-through type. Comply with � NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: � 2.4 SNAP SWITCHES A. Com{�ly with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 2.5 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Wall-Switch Sensors: 1. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. 2.6 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS A. Telephone Outlet: 1. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-6.1 complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863. B. Combination N and Telephone Outlet: 1. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-6.1; complying with Category 5e; and one Type F coaxial cable connector. 2.7 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match cor�esponding wi�ing devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate �nish. 2.8 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Type: Modular, flap-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used. B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. C. Senrice Plate: Rectangular, die-cast aluminum with satin finish. � D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise � indicated. E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 : Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 2726 - 2 WIRING DEVICES � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � 2.9 A. Category 5e jacks for UTP cable. FINISHES Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 0� device listing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. 2. 3. 4. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just befo�e they are spliced or teRninated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conducto�s that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is pe�rnitted provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during constn.�ction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 2726 - 3 WIRING DEVICES Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction E. F. 3.2 A. connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG. pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. IDENTIFICATION Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with [black] [white] [red]-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 2726 - 4 Vail, Colorado �'' � �� O � � � �I � � � WIRING DEVICES � 04 February 2011 Construction i SECTlON 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Enclosures. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. B. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and inte�locked with cover in closed position. 2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 2816 -1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND Vail, Colorado CIRCUIT BREAKERS 04 February 2011 Construction 2.3 A. B. 2.4 A. MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS Generai Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overioads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. ENCLOSURES Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert type>. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, [Type 3R] <Insert type>. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. C. Install fuses in fusible devices. D. Comply with NECA 1. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 2816 - 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND Vail, Colorado CIRCUtT BREAKERS 04 February 2011 Construction SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Indudes: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fi�ure, arranged in orde� of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, and flnishes. 1.3 A. 0 QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrica! Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LlGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. C. Metal Parts: F�ee of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. Lionshead Transit Welcome 26 5100 -1 INTERIOR LIGHTING Center 04 February 2011 Vail, Colorado Const�uctio� E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. F. Diffusers and Globes: 2.3 A. 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a � Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. � UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless othenNise indicated. EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Compiy with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 900 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push-tatest type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay. 5. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency ope�ation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.4 EXIT SIGNS A. � General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with U� 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS � �I �I � �l �� O � �J � � O � A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying lionshead Transit Weicome 26 5100 - 2 INTERIOR LIGHTING � Center 04 February 2011 Vail, Colorado Construction � ' � � ' � � i ' ' � ' C �� i ' 2.6 A. � C with UL 924. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automafically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit.operability. 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow i�dicates charging at end of discharge cycle. FLUORESCENT LAMPS T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (mi�imum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start[, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts] unless otherwise indicated. 1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. INSTALLATION Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fi�ure. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical fower Conductors and Cables." Lionshead Transit Welcome 26 5100 - 3 INTERIOR �IGHTING Center 04 February 2011 Vail, Colo�ado Construction 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome 26 5100 - 4 INTERIOR LIGHTING Center 04 February 2011 Vail, Colorado Construction SECTION 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Poles and accessories. 1.2 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M. B. Live Load: Single load of 500 Ibf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M. C. Ice Load: Load of 3 Ibf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M Ice Load Map. D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M. 1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet high or less is 100 mph. 1.3 A. a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0. b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years. c. Velocity Conversion Facto�s: 1.0. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." C. Comply with NFPA 70. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 5600 -1 EXTERIOR LIGHI7NG Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Const�uction PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. B. C. D. E. MANUFACTURERS Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available p�oducts that may be inco�porated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not wa�p, sag, or deform in use. Provide filtedbreather for enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 5600 - 2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction O � �J � � �; �r: J � CJ � LJ Ll � � > ' ' , � ' u ' ' � � -� '�_J � � , � ' � M N 2.3 A. � C. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. � Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "1lVhite Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. a. Color: b. Color: color. c. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors. Match ArchitecYs sample of [manufacturer's standard] [custom] As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service pe�sonnel, but not seen from noRnal viewing angles when lamps are in place. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for compact fluorescent luminaires. c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) compact fluorescent luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M. 1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article. 2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of [1.1J <Insert number> to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. 1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. ' 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 5600 - 3 EXTERIOR LIGHTING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 , Construction ' � E. fabrication unless otherwise indicated. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches, with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." F. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. 2.4 STEEL POLES A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig; one-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall. 1. Shape: Round, straight. 2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support. B. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top. C. Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads, positioned for 15-inch vertical spacing, alternating on opposite sides of pole; first step at elevation 10 feet above finished grade. D. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole. � F. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2 3. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal corrosion protection. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more �ionshead Transit Welcome Ce�ter 26 5600 - 4 Vail, Colorado EXTERIOR LIGHTING 04 February 2011 Construction u � � �� O � � � �' � � i coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. a. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match ArchitecYs sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. � 1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. 3.2 POLE INSTALLATION A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole. B. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." C. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable). 3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent ove�lap. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Ground metal poles and support stn.�ctures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system. 6. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 5600 - 5 EXTERIOR LIGHTING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations. END OF SECTION lionshead Transit Welcome Center 26 5600 - 6 EXTERIOR LIGHTING Vait, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction PI II SECTION 28 3111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM i� PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.2 A. 1.3 A. B. C. � E. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Fire-alarm contro/ unit. Manual fire-alarm boxes. System smoke detectors. Heat detectors. Notification appliances. Sprinkler monitoring modu/es Digita/ alarm communicator transmitter. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Noncoded, addressab/e system, with multiplexed signa/ transmission, dedicated to �re-alarm service only. SUBMITTALS General Submitta/ Requi�ements: 1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. ' NICET-cerfi�ed �re-alarm technician, Level lll minimum. Product Dafa: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. lnclude plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamenials of Fire A/arm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include vo/tage drop ca/cu/ations for notification appliance circuits. 3. lnclude battery-size calculations. 4. Include performance parameters and instal/ation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system Is operating. 5. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressab/e device. Show size and route of cable and conduits. Quali�cation Data: For qualified Instailer. Field quality-control reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. ln addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 28 3111 - 1 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 1.4 A. B. 1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Provide "Recorri of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. 3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, lnspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the foi/owing: a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals. � �I � � �I 5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. � 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at �re-alarm control unit QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certiflied by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. Installer Qualifications: Instal/ation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Leve! ll technician. C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system. D. Electrica/ Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a quali�ed testing agency, and marked for intended /ocation and application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: one of the following: 1. Firelite 2. Notifier 3. Silent Knight 4. SimplexGrinnell 5. EST Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by 2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shal/ be by one or more of the following devices: 1. Manual stations. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 28 3111 - 2 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 CJ � � u � i � ' � � 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Sprinkler watertlow. B. Fire-alarm signai shall initiate the following actions: 1. Continuously operate alarm-notification appliances. � 2. Identify alarm at the fire-alarm control unit 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Record events in the system memory. ' � , ' ' , ' 2.3 � � ' ' ' � �' � ' C. System supervistory signai initiadon sha/l be by one or more of the fol/owing devices and actions: Q E. A. 1. Sprinkler Supervisory (Tamper) switch System troub/e signal initiation shall be by one or more of the fo/lowing devices and actions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit Ground or a single break in Fre-alarm control unit internal circuits. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. Break in standby battery circuitry. Failure of battery charging. Abnormal position of any switch at fre-a/arm control unit or annunciator. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit. FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT General Requirements for Fire=A/arm Control Unit: 1. F� Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL. a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electricaliy erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies. Addressable control circuits for operation of inechanical equipment. B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. 9. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 2 line(s) of 40 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. C. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device, Noti�cation Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 28 3111 - 3 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 Q E. C/ass B. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a Temporal 3 pattern. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit a/arm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station. F. Primary Power. 24V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supp/y module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signalsshall be powered by 24-V dc source. 1. Alarm current draw of entire �re-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supp/y module rating. G. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. 2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES A. General Requirements for Manua/ Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes sha// be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed out/et box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 2.5 A. B. 9. Double-action mechanism requiring iwo actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or troub/e) to �re-a/arm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS Genera/ Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comp/y with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shal/ be two-wire type. 3. Integral Addressab/e Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects % a Fxed base. Provide terminals in the fxed base for connection to building wiring. 5. Se/f-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 6. /ntegral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector address shal/ be accessible from fire-alarm contro/ unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at �ire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shal/ be able to manua/ly access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 28 3111 - 4 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 u � � � �I � � LJ � 2.6 A. B. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). HEAT DETECTORS Genera/ Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm contro/ unit. 2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signa/ circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a gril/e. Comp/y with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the hom, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protoco/. C. Visibie Noti�cation Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1979, with clear or nomina/ white po/ycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high /etters on the�lens. 2.8 A. 2.9 A. 1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 4. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 5. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red. ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts. DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptab/e to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL. ' - B. Functiona/ Performance: Unit shall receive an a/arm, supervisory, or trouble signa/ from Liooshead Transit Welcome Center 28 3111 - 5 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM ' Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 C� � fire-alarm contro/ unit and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall iniGate a loca/ trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating /oss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the /oca/ frouble signal. Secondary Power: lntegral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Self-Test: Conducted automatical/y every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. EQU/PMENT INSTALLATION Comp/y with NFPA 72 for instaHation of fire-a/arm equipment. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: 1. 2. 3. � u � � � � � Comply with NFPA 72 and Vail Fire 8 Emergency Services. � HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 5 feet from air-supp/y diffuser or return-air opening. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture. � C. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not /ess than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. D. E. F. 3.2 Visible A/arm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or a/arm hom and at /east 6 inches be/ow the ceiling. Fire-Alarm Contro/ Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. Annunciator. Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished f/oor.Comp/y with Town of Vail requirements for conduit instal/ation; �re alarm wiring shall be installed in listed raceways. CONNECTIONS A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following � devices and systems. lnsta/l the interface device /ess than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressab/e confirmation connection when such feedback is � available at the device or system being contro/led. 3.3 A. GROUNDING Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comp/y with IEEE 1100. lnstall a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm contro! uniL Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 28 3111 - 6 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 � � L.J 3.4 A. B. C. D. E. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform tests and inspections as required by Vail Fire & Emergency Services. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or rep/aced devices and appliances. Fire-alarm system wil/ be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 28 3111 - 7 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 28 3111 - 8 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Vail, Colorado 18 February 2011 Addendum #1 �J � � LI J � S � � ' ' ' i ' � C� ' ' SECTION 31 2000 EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, removing and satisfactorily disposing of all materials taken from within work limits, dust control, including excavation for ditches and channels, inlet and outlet ditches for culverts and structures, all necessary shaping and sloping for the construction, preparation, processing soil to proper moisture content, and completion of all backfill, embankments, subgrade, shoulders, slopes and intersections, to required alignment, grade, and typical cross section shown on drawings. B. Related Work: Site Demolition: Section 02 4100 2. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 31 2500 C. Definitions: 1. Suitable Material: Earth fill material consisting of on-site or similar non-organic sands, gravels, clays, silts and mixtures thereof with maximum size of 6". 2. Unsuitable Material: Any material containing vegetable or organic matter, muck, peat, � excessive expansive materials, organic silt, topsoil, frozen materials, trees, stumps, oversize rocks, certain manmade deposits, or industrial waste, sludge or landfill, or other undesirable materials. ' , ' LJ ' ' , � u 3. Unclassified Excavation: Any and all materials, including surface boulders, encountered during construction. Rock formations that can be removed by ripping. with D-9 tractor in good repair with single tooth hydraulic ripper are considered as unclassified excavation. 4. Rock Excavation: Rock formations which cannot be excavated without blasting. Includes removal and disposal of all rock. 5. Backfill and Embankment: Embankments, including preparation of area upon which they are to be placed, dikes within or outside right-of-way. Placing and compacting approved material within areas where unsuitable materials have been removed. Placing and compacting of material in holes, pits and other depressions to lines and grades shown on drawings. Use only suitable materials in construction of embankments and backfills. C� 7 1.02 PERMRS Borrow: Backfill or embankment material which must be acquired from designated borrow areas to make up deficiencies which cannot be completed from excavation within work limits. Borrow material must be agreed to by Engineer. Proof Rolling: Applying test loads over subgrade surface by means of heavy pneumatic-tired roller of specified design, to locate weak areas in subgrade. A. Road Cut (Town of Vail) Lionshead Transit Welcome Center ' Vail, Colorado 3i 2000 -1 Earthwork 04 February 2011 Construction PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL AND EMBANKMENT MATERIAL Any suitable material or borrow as defined above. Free-running water shall be drained from materials before placement. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION WATER Acceptable water shall be provided at Contractor's expense. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION Unclassified Excavation: All excess or unsuitable excavated materials, including rock and boulders, that cannot be used in backfill and embankments, shall be disposed of off site. Where shown on drawings or considered necessary, construct intercepting ditches above top of cut slopes and carry to outlets near ends of cuts. To blend intersection of cut slopes with slope of adjacent natural ground surfaces in uniform manner, shape tops of all cut slopes, except those in solid rock, for flattening and rounding in accordance with details shown on drawings. Treat earth overburden above solid rock cuts in same manner as earth cut. Engineer reserves the right to change cut slopes during progress of excavation. Scale all exposed rippable rock cuts of loose, potentially falling rock at Contractor's expense. 3.02 PROOF ROLLING Proof rolling will be required to determine whether certain areas of subgrade meet compaction and/or stable requirements. Proof roll designated areas with heavy rubber-tired roller approved by Engineer. Areas found to be weak or fail the test shall be repaired in accordance with recommendations by the Engineer. 3.03 SUBGRADE PREPARATION Adjust completed subgrade from slope or grade stakes to assure surface width conforms to typical section, dimensions, lines, and grades on drawings. Compact subgrade in accordance with compaction requirements. 3.04 EMBANKMENT AND FILL CONSTRUCTION A. Place earth fill materials for backfill or embankment in thin horizontal layers near optimum moisture content and compact as specified before next layer is placed. Use effective spreading equipment on each lift to obtain uniform thickness prior to compacting. As compaction of each layer p�ogresses, continuously level and manipulate to assure uniform density. Add or remove water as necessary to obtain ma�amum density. Place embankment in layers not greater than 12" which have been demonstrated to meet compaction standards. Occasional cobble and boulder-sized pieces of excavated rocks with sizes from 6" to 12", may be placed in earth fill if agreed to by Engineer. Space large rocks so compaction of earth fill will meet compaction requirements. B. When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or when new embankment is to be compacted against existing embankments, or when embankment is built one-half width at a time, slopes which are steeper than 4:1 measured longitudinally or at right angles to roadway shall be continuously benched over as work is brought up in layers. Benching shall be well keyed into existing slopes a minimum of 8' wide. Begin each horizontal bench at intersection of original ground and sides of previous benches. Material benched shall be excavated and recompacted atong with new embankment material at Contractor's e�ense. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 31 2000 - 2 Earthwork Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � Ci �I� � � � � ' ' 1 ' ' ' Il �� ' I� , ' ' � , ' ' , ' C. Rock fill embankment material consists predominantly of rock 6" to 12" in diameter placed in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than ma�amum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer provided material is carefullyplaced, large stones well distributed, and voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer with suitable equipment, distributing soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. Embankments consisting predominantly of rock larger than 6" in greatest dimension, shall not be constructed above an elevation 2' below finished subgrade. Balance of embankment shall be composed of suitable material smoothed and placed in layers not exceeding 8" in loose thickness and compacted as specified. D. E. F. G. Remove all sod and vegetable matter from surface upon which embankment is to be placed. Completely break up cleared surface by plowing, scarifying, or stepping a minimum of 8" to insure a bond between embankment and original ground. Recompact to specifications. Frozen materials shall not be used in construction of embankments. During construction maintain area in such condition that it will be well-drained at all times. At the end of every construction day all fill areas must be flat rolled to provide proper drainage. 3.05 BORROW Provide test pit if required by Engineer to evaluate acceptability and limits of source at Contractor's expense. If more borrow is placed than required, amount of overrun will be deducted from borrow volume. Contractor shall notify Engineer at least 10 working days in advance of need before opening borrow area. Strip all borrow pits of sod, topsoil, and unsuitable materials. Restore borrow area, grade and shape to provide proper drainage before placement of topsoil, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.06 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. 3.07 COMPACTION RE(IUIREMENTS A. � Thoroughly scarify surface upon which embankment is to be placed to depth of 8". Compact scarified materials and embankments to following %AASHTO T99. Moisture content shal! be within 2% of optimum. 1. Landscaped area 95% 2. Roadway 95% 3. Driveways 95% 4. Parking lots 95% 5. Public roadways 95% 6. Beneath structures 100% Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 31 2000 - 3 Earthwork ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction C. Where Engineer agrees to rock fill material embankments constructed without moisture and density control, place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension not exceeding 12". Apply water as necessary to facilitate compaction. Route construction equipment, compactors, or both, uniformly over each lift prior to placing additional lifts. Apply sufficient compactive effort to each lift to achieve uniform, well-compacted rock fill. Distribute rocks throughout layer, spaced far enough apart to allow compaction equipment to pass between and permit cross rolling. Place, move and compact embankment materials, and apply water to facilitate compaction and prevent voids in embankment. Number of passes required will depend on available compaction equipment to achieve compactive effort agreed to by Engineer. 3.08 DUST CONTROL Contractor shall take appropriate measures to minimize adverse impacts caused by dust by watering exposed surfaces and haul roads and by implementing other measures. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 31 2000 - 4 Earthwork Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � C_i � � � � � SECTION 31 2500 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PARTIGENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, g�ading, and installation and maintenance of riprap, stabilized construction entrances, sediment ponds, filter material, sediment and debris sacks, jute netting, straw bale sediment barriers, and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Earthwork: Section 31 2000 2. Storm Drainage: Section 33 4000 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory 1. Gradation and Soundness of Riprap. 2. Gradation of Filter Material. 1.03 PERMITS A. Road Cut (Town of Vail) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RIPRAP Hard, dense, sound, angular rough fractured stone meeting AASHTO T 85. Excavated shot rock may be used 'rf agreed to by the Owner's representative and the Engineer. Neither breadth nor thickness of single stone to be less than one-third its length. Nominal Size Min. Volume Min. Weight 9" 0.25 CF 30 Ibs. 12" 0.5 CF 75 Ibs. 18" 1.8 CF 2501bs. 24" 4 CF 600 Ibs. Size of stone and total thickness of riprap as shown on drawings. Stone well graded so voids can be filled, and at least 50% of mass equal to or larger than size called for on drawings. 2.02 FILTER MATERIAL Aggregate Filter: Conform to following gradation: Sieve Size Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves 3" 100 3/4" 20-90 Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 31 2500 -1 Erosion And Sedimentation Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction Sieve Size Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves No. 4 0-20 No. 200 0-3 2.03 FILTER FABRIC Manufactured especially for stability of erosion control construction. Made from polyethylene and polypropylene yarns, in accordance with following: Weight Thickness Grab Strength Elongation Break Burst Strength Trapezoid Tear Strength Water Permeability Water Flow Rate Equivalent Opening Size 4.0 oz/yd 15 mils 130 Ibs. 62% 125 psi 70 Ib. 0.02 cm/se 4.80 gal/min/ft 70-100 U.S. Sieve ASTM D1910 ASTM D1777 ASTM D1682 ASTM D1682 ASTM D7742 ASTM 2263 CFMC CFMC ASTM D422 2.04 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS AND TURF REINFORCEMENT MATS A. Install Landlok 450 TRM, C2 Fabric or as shown on plans 2.05 EROSION LOGS Erosion logs shall be curled aspen wood excelsior with a consistent width of fibers evenly distributed throughout the log. The casing shall be seamless, photodegradable tube netting and shall have minimum dimensions as shown below, based on the diameter of the log called for in the plans. The curled aspen wood excelsior shall be fungus free, resin free and shall be free of growth orgermination inhibiting substances. Nominal Dimensions of Erosion Logs Diameter Length Weight (min.) Stake Dimensions 8 inch 7-10 feet 1.6 Ibs/ft 1.5 by 1.5 by 20 inches 12 inch 7-10 feet 2.5 Ibs/#t 1.5 by 1.5 by 24 inches 18 inch 7-10 feet 4 Ibs/ft 1.5 by 1.5 by 30 inches 2.06 DANDY SACK A. B. C. The Dandy SackT"^ inlet protection unit shall be a sewn in the U.S.A. geotextile fabric unit. The Dandy SackT"' shall have lifting straps to allow removal of the unit and manual inspection of the storm water system. The Dandy SackT"' unit shall utilize an orange monofilament fabric that is manufactured in the U.S.A. with the following characteristics: PROPERTY Grab Tensile Strength Grab Tensile Elongation Puncture Strength Mullen Burst Strength Trapezoid Tear Strength % Open Area Apparent Opening Size Permittivity TEST METHOD ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 4833 ASTM D 3786 ASTM D 4533 COE - 22125-86 ASTM D 4751 ASTM D 4491 UNITS kN (Ibs) % kN (Ibs) kPa (psi) kN (Ibs) % mm (US Std Sieve) sec' MARV 1.62 (365) x 0.89 (200) 24x10 0.44 (100) 3097 (450) 0.51 (115) x 0.33 (75) 10 0.425 (40) 2.14 Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 31 2500 - 2 Erosion And Sedimentation Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction CJ � � J f` I � � �' �� [i , � � ' ' PROPERTY TEST METHOD UNITS MARV Permeability ASTM 4491 cm/sec 0.142 Water Flow Rate ASTM 4491 I/min/m2 (gal/min/ft2) 5607 {145) ' Ultraviolet Resistance ASTM D 4355 % 70 Color Orange' 'The color orange is a trademark of Dandy Products, Inc. , , ' ' 2.07 DANDY CURB SACK A. The Dandy Curb SackT"' curb and gutter inlet protection unit shall be a sewn geotextile fabric unit made in the U.S.A. enclosing a porous structure in the form of a cylindrical tub placed in front and e�ending beyond the inlet opening on both sides and have a geotextile fabric sack attached designed to fit the opening of the catch basin or drop inlet and to hang underneath the grate and into the catch basin. � � The Dandy Curb SackTM shall have lifting straps to allow removal of the unit and manual inspection of the storm water system. The Dandy Curb SackT"" unit shall utilize an orange monofilament fabric that is manufactured in the U.S.A with the following characteristics: ' PROPERTY TEST METHOD Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 Grab Tensile Elongation ASTM D 4632 ' Puncture Strength ASTM D 4833 Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D 3786 Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 % Open Area COE - 22125-86 , Apparent Opening Size ASTM D 4751 Permittivity ASTM D 4491 Permeability ASTM 4491 ' Water Flow Rate ASTM 4491 Ultraviolet Resistance ASTM D 4355 Color 'The color orange is a trademark of Dandy Products, Inc. ' 2.08 SILT FENCE L_J � l� ' ' ' ' UNITS kN (Ibs) % kN (Ibs) kPa (psi) kN (Ibs) % mm (US Std Sieve) sec' cm/sec I/min/m2 (gaUmin/ft�) % MARV 1.62 (365) x 0.89 (200) 24x10 0.44 (100) 3097 (450) 0.51 (115) x 0.33 (75) 10 0.425 (40) 2.14 0.142 5607 (145) 70 Orange' A. Silt Fence Fabric: The fabric shall meet the following specifications: Fabric Properties Grab Tensile Strength (Ibs) Elongation at Failure (%) Mullen Burst Strength (PSI) Puncture Strength (Ibs) Slurry Flow Rate (gal/min/sf) Equivalent Opening Size Ultraviolet Radia6on Stability Minimum Acceptable Value 90 50 190 40 0.3 40-80 °/a 90 Test Method ASTM D1682 ASTM D1682 ASTM D3786 ASTM D751 (mod'rfied) US Std Sieve CW-02215 ASTM-G-26 B. Fence Posts (for fabricated units): The length shall be a minimum of 36 inches long. Wood posts will be of sound quality hardwood with a minimum cross sectional area of 3.0 square inches. Steel posts will be standard T and U section weighing not less than 1.00 pound per linear foot. C. Wire Fence (for fabricated units): Wire fencing shall be a minimum 14-1/4 gage with a maximum 6" mesh opening, or as approved. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 31 2500 - 3 Erosion And Sedimentation Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 � Construction �� D. Prefabricated Units: Envirofence or approved equal may be used in lieu of the above wire fence providing the unit is installed per manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FILTER FABRIC Place fabric over shaped surface loosely where, when large stones are placed, they will not cause stretching of fabric beyond elastic limits. Overlap joining sections 2' at edges. Secure overlapped edges to subgrade with cinch pins. If riprap is dropped, place aggregate bedding 2" thick over fabric. Place riprap in a manner that fabric will not be damaged by stretching, punching, or ripping. 3.02 RIPRAP A. Angular reasonably well-graded from smallest to ma�mum size specified. Stones smaller � than 10% of smallest size not permitted. Control gradation of riprap by visual inspection to assure thickness of riprap conforms with drawings. B. Hand Placed: Rectangular to facilitate butt placement. Fill openings with loose, well-graded road aggregate base material. 3.03 FILTER MATERIAL Wet subgrade, reasonably shape, and compact prior to placing filter material. Filter material may be —' backdragged with loader bucket to a reasonably smooth surface for placement to lines and grades of drawings. � 3.04 WATER BARS/INTERCEPTOR TRENCHES Construct ditch in accordance with drawings. Flow line of water bar not steeper than 1%. Discharge on existing vegetated slopes alternately to avoid erosion. 3.05 STRAW BALE SEDIMENT BARRIER Use straw bale barriers at storm drain inlets, across minor swales and ditches, and other applications where barrier is of temporary nature. Bind straw bales with nylon or baling wire, not twine. Anchor bales to ground with two posts per bale. 3.06 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS AND TURF REINFORCEMENT MATS A. Site Preparation 1. Grade and compact area of installation and remove all rocks, clods, vegetation or other � obstructions so that the installed blankeUmat will have direct contact with soil surface. 2. Prepare seedbed by loosening 2-3 in (50-75mm) of topsoil above final grade. 3. Incorporate fertilize� into soil. 4. Do not mulch areas where mat is to be placed B. Seeding 1. Apply seed to the soil surface before installing blanket/mat, or after installation (TRM only) � for enhanced performance (preferable) Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 31 2500 - 4 Erosion And Sedimentation , Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction ' ' ' � � � � ' ' � ' i � � C� ' C� ' � C� C 2. When seeding prior to installation, all check slots and other areas disturbed must also be reseeded. 3. When using a TRM and soil filling, seed TRM and entire disturbed area after installation, prior to filling mat with soil. Installation on Banks and Slopes 1. Extended blankeUmat 2-3 ft (600-900mm) over crest of slope and excavate a 12x6 in (300x150mm) terminal anchor trench. 2. Anchor blankeUmaf in trench on 1 ft (300mm) spacings, backfill and compact soil. 3. Unroll blankeUmat down slope with small netting on bottom, large netting on top. 4. Overlap adjacent rolls at least 3 in (75mm), and anchor every 18 in (450mm) minimum across the overlap. The higher elevation blankeUmat should be placed over the lower blankeUmat. 5. Overlap blankeUmat edges appro�amately 2 in (50mm) and staple according to anchor pattern guide. Make sure that edge overtaps are shingled away from prevailing winds. 6. Lay blankeUmat loose to maintain direct contact with soil. (Do not pull blanket/mat taut. This may allow bridging of soil surface.) 7. Secure blankeUmat to ground surface using U-shaped wire staples (preferred) or geotextile pins. 8. Refer to manufacturer's recommendation for appropriate number and pattern of anchors. 9. Place outer edge of blanket/mat in previously excavated longitudinal slots, anchor using prescribed staple pattern, backfill and compact soil. 10. Anchor, backfill and compact upstream end of blankeUmat in a 12x6 in (300x150mm) terminal trench. 11. Secure blankeUmat to ground surface using U-shaped wire staples(preferred) or geotextile pins. 12. When using a TRM, seed and fill with soil for enhanced performance. 13. When using a TRM with a geotextile attached. Always seed after installing mat, then fill with soil. Installation in Storm Water Channels 1. Excavate an initial anchor trench 12 in (300mm) deep and 6 in (150mm) wide across the channel at the lower end of the project area. 2. Construct check slots along the channel in the following manner: Excavate i�termittent check slots 6 in (150mm) deep and 6 in (150mm) wide across the channel at 30 ft(9.1 m) intervals. 3. Cut longitudinal channel anchor slots 4 in (100mm) deep and 4 in (100mm) wide along both sides of the installation to bury edges of blankeUmat. Whenever possible e�end mat 2-3 ft(600-900 mm) above crest of channel side slopes. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center ' Yail, Colorado 31 2500 - 5 Erosion And Sedimentation 04 February 2011 Construction E. 4. Beginning at the center if downstream end of the channel, place the end of the first roll in the anchor trench and secure with fastening devices at 1 ft(300mm) intervals. Note: blankeUmat will initially be upside down in anchor trench; smaller netting on top. 5. In same manner, position adjacent rolls in anchor trench. Overlapping the preceding roll minimum of 3 in (75mm). 6. Again, staple at 1 ft (300mm) intervals, backfill and compact soil. 7. Unroll blankeUmat over the compacted trench with smaller netting on bottom, large netting on top. Stop at next check slot or terminal anchor trench. 8. Unroll adjacent rolls upstream in order to maintain a minimum 3 in (75mm) overlap. Anchor every 18 in (450mm) minimum across the overlap. 9. Fold and secure blankeUmat rolls snugly into intermittent check slots. Lay blankeUmat in the bottom and fold back against itself. Anchor through both layers of blanket or mat at 1 ft(300mm) intervals then backfill and compact soil. Continue rolling upstream over the compacted slot to the next check slot of terminal anchor trench. 10. Overlap roll ends a minimum of 1 ft (300mm) with upstream blankeUmat on top. Begin all new rolls in a check slot. Anchor overlapped area by placing two rows of anchors, 1 ft (300mm) apart on 1 ft(300mm) intervals. Soil Filling 1. If specified, soil filling is recommended for optimum performance. 2. After seeding, spread and lightly rake Y2 - 3/a in (12-19mm) of fine topsoil into the TRM and completely fill the voids. Use backside of rake or other flat tool. 3. If equipment must operate on the TRM, make sure it is of the rubber-tired type. No tracked equipment or sharp turns are allowed on the mat. 4. Avoid any traffic over TRM if loose or wet soil conditions exist. 5. Use shovels, rakes or brooms for fine grading and finishing. 6. Smooth soils fill in order to just e�ose the top netting of matrix. Do not place excessive soil above the mat. 7. Broadcast additional seed and mulch above the soit-filled TRM. 8. Water as necessary to enhance growth. 9. Consult manufacturer's technical representative or local distributor for installation assistance. Particularly if unique conditions apply (i.e. fine sandy soils, infertile environment) 3.07 EROSION LOGS The Contractor shall maintain the erosion logs during construction to prevent sediment from passing over or under the logs or from sediment accumulation greater than two thirds of the original e�osed height of each erosion log. Stakes shall be embedded to a minimum depth of 12 inches. At the discretion of the Engineer, a shallower depth may be permitted if rock in encountered. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 31 2500 - 6 Erosion And Sedimentation Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � Cl J �I �' �' CJ u u � � � � ' � 3.08 DANDY SACK � , � � � ' � � !� � � A. : Remove the grate from the catch basin. For Oil and Sediment Model; to install or replace absorbent, place absorbent pillow in unit, on the bottom (below-grade side) of the unit. C. Stand the grate on end. Move the top lifting straps out of the way and place the grate into the Dandy SackT"" unit so that the grate is below the top straps and above the lower straps. The grate should be cradled between the upper and lower straps. D. Holding the I'rfting devices, insert the grate into the inlet, being careful that the grate remains in place and being careful not to damage the Dandy SackT"" unit. E. F Remove all accumulated sediment and debris from vicinity of unit after each storm event. After each storm event and at regular intervals, look into the Dandy SackT"" unit. If the unit is more than 1/3 full of accumulated sediment, the unit must be emptied. G. To empty the unit, using the lifting straps lift the unit out of the inlet and remove the grate. Transport the unit to an appropriate location for removal of the contents. Holding the dumping straps on the outside at the bottom of the unit, turn the unit upside down, emprying the contents. Reinstall unit as above. H. I. For Oil and Sediment Model; remove and replace absorbent when near saturation. Dispose of unit and/or absorbent in accord with applicable Federal, state and local environmental laws and regulations. 3.09 DANDY CURB SACK A. B. C. Remove the grate from the catch basin. For Oil and Sediment Model; to install or replace absorbent, place absorbent pillow in unit, on the bottom (below-grade side) of the unit. Stand the grate on end. Move the top lifting straps out of the way and place the grate into the Dandy Curb SackTM' unit so that the grate is below the top straps and above the lower straps. The grate should be cradled between the upper and lower straps. D. Holding the lifting devices, insert the grate into the inlet, then lower back edge with � cylindrical tube into place, being careful that the grate remains in place and being careful not to damage the Dandy Curb SackT"" unit. The cylindrical tube should partially block the curb hood opening when installed properly. � ' � � � E. Remove all accumulated sediment and debris from vicinity of unit after each storm event. F. After each storm event and at regular intervals, look into the Dandy Curb SackT"' unit. If the unit is more than 1/3 full of accumulated sediment, the unit must be emptied. G. To empty the unit, using the lifting straps lift the unit out of the inlet and remove the grate. Transport the unit to an appropriate location for removal of the contents. Holding the dumping straps on the outside at the bottom of the unit, turn the unit upside down, emptying the contents. Reinstall unit as above. H. For Oil and Sediment Model; remove and replace absorbent when near saturation. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 31 2500 - 7 Erosion And Sedimentation Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction i. Dispose of unit and/or absorbent in accord with applicable Federal, state and local environmental laws and regulations. 3.10 CHECK DAMS Install bottom of check dam at least 6" below ma�mum depth of newly graded channel. Extend to 6" above ma�amum design water depth. Install materials in accordance with drawings. 3.11 SEDIMENT POND/TRAP A. Construct pond per plans and as directed by Engineer. B. The area under embankment shall be cleared, grubbed and stripped of any vegetation and root mat. The pool area shall be cleared. C. The fill material for the embankment shall be free of roots or other woody vegetation as welt as over-sized stones, rocks, organic material or other objectionable material. The embankment shall be compacted by traversing with equipment while it is being constructed. Maximum height of embankment shall be 4' measured at centerline of embankment. D. All cut and fill slopes shall be 2:1 or flatter. E. Geotextile Class C shall be placed over riser. Fabric shall be embedded at least 6" into existing ground at bottom of pond. F. Outlet — An outlet shall include a means of conveying the discharge in a erosion free manner to an e�asting stable channel. Protection against scour at the discharge point shall be provided as necessary. G. Outlet channel must have positive drainage from the trap. H. Sediment shall be removed and trap restored to its original dimensions when the sediment has accumulated to Yz of the wet storage depth of the trap (900 cf/ac). Removed sediment shall be deposited in a suitable area and in such a manner that it will not erode. I. The structure shall be inspected periodically after each rain and repaired as needed. J. Construction of traps shall be carried out in such a manner that sediment pollution is abated. Points of concentrated inflow shall be protected. K. The structure shall be dewatered by approved methods, removed and the area stabilized when the drainage area has been properly stabilized. 3.12 SILT FENCE Install silt fence in accordance with drawings. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 31 2500 - 8 Erosion And Sedimentation Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Consiruction � � � � � _� � � �� '' �� ' � SECTION 321123 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Preparing surface of subgrade immediately prior to paving including proofrolling, repair of areas showing excess deflection during proofrolling and furnishing and placing one or more courses of aggregate in conformance with lines, grades, and typical sections shown on drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Earthwork: Section 31 2000 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish proposed source of materials and copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Sieve analysis - ASTM C136 2. Wear Abrasion - ASTM C131 3. Liquid Limit - AASHTO T89, T90 4. Moisture Density Curves - AASHTO T99 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE A. Aggregate shall conform to following gradation: Sieve Pe�centage by Weight Passing square Mesh Sieves Size Class 2 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 4" 100 - - - 3" 95-100 - - - 2" - 100 - - 1-1 /2" - 90-100 - - 1 " - - 100 - 3/4" - 50-90 - 100 No.4 - 30-50 30-70 30-65 No.8 - - - 25-55 No.200 3-15 3-12 3-15 3-12 Liquid limit not greater than 35 for Class 2; 30 for Class 4, 5, or 6. Plasticity Index not exceeding 6. B. Requirements for this Project: Furnish Class 6 aggregate for this Project. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1123 -1 Aggregate Base Course Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Contractor will provide at his expense all staking necessary to ensure work conforms with drawings. B. Subgrade Preparation: Shape and compact to crown, line, grades, and typical cross section shown on drawings before placing base material. Compact to 95% AASHTO T99. 3.02 MIXING The Contractor shall mix the aggregate by methods that insure a thorough and homogeneous mi�ure. 3.03 PLACEMENT If required compacted depth of aggregate base course exceeds 6", construct in two or more layers of appro�mately equal thickness. Maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 6". When vibratory or other approved types of special compacting equipment are used, compacted depth of single layer may be increased to 8" upon approval of Engineer. 3.04 SHAPING AND COMPACTION Compact each layer to 95% AASHTO T180. Maintain surface of each layer during compaction so that uniform texture is produced and aggregates are firmly keyed. Applywater un'rformlyduring compaction so moisture content is within 2% of optimum. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1123 - 2 Agg�egate Base Course Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction SECTION 321200 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing, laying, and compacting hot-mixed asphaltic concrete pavement in conformance with lines, grades, and typical cross-sections shown on the drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Aggregate Base Course: Section 32 1123 1.02 f�UALITY ASSURANCE A Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at atl times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement, temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C. Owner will arrange and pay for all field tests to determine compliance of base course and pavement materials and compaction with the specification and the approved design mix formula. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: If requested, provide samples of proposed materials. B. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Aggregate - AASHTO T96, CP-45, AASHTO T304, AASHTO T176, AASHTO T89, AASHTO T90 2. 3. 4. 5. PG Graded Binders, use PG 58-28 - AASHTO T48, TP48, TP5 AND T51 Liquid Asphalt - AASHTO M81, M82; ASTM D2026 Emulsified Asphalt - AASHTO M140 or M208 Compaction — Colorado Procedure 51, CP44 or CP81 C. Job Mix Formula: The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer. 1. A proposed job — mix gradation as required by the contract, which shall be wholly within the Master Range Table of Table 703 — 3 of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (CDOT Specifications) before the tolerances shown in Table 401 —1, of the CDOT Specifications, are applied. The job — mix formula shall establish a single percentage of aggregate passing each required sieve size. A single percentage of bituminous material to be added to the aggregate and a single temperature for the mixture at the discharge point of the plant. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321200 -1 Flexible Pavement � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Trucks used for hauling bituminous miutures shall have tight, clean, smooth metal bedsthinly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, iime solution, or other approved release agent. Petroleum distillates such as kerosene or fuel oil will not be permitted. Each truck shall have a cover of canvas or other suitable material to protect the mixture from the weather. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Bituminous plant mix shall be placed only on properly constructed surfaces that are free from water, snow, or ice. The bituminous mixtures shall be placed in accordance with the temperature limitations of Table 401-3 "of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction" and only when weather conditions permit the pavement to be properly placed and finished, as determined by the Engineer. B. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphaltic concrete pavement until cooled and hardened. Provide barricades, flagmen, and warning devices as required to protect pavement. Maintain pedestrian and vehicular traffic as required. Cover openings of structures in paving until permanent coverings are placed. C. Confirm in writing, aggregate base course constructed by others has been compacted to requirements of these specifications. Use any means necessary to proof roll or test to confirm aggregate base is satisfactory to receive asphaltic concrete. Notify in writing to Owner any deficient areas so they may be brought into conformance with spec'rfications priorto placement of asphaltic concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE Clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed gravel, natural gravel, or crushed slag with not more than 45% of wear, AASHTO T96. Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves Grading SX 1-1/2" - 1" - 3/4" 100 1 /2" 90-100 3/8" - #4 - #8 28-58 #30 - #200 2-10 Sizes #8 and larger, tolerances + 8%; #30 + 6%; #200 + 3%; where 100% passing, no tolerance. Use Grading SX for this project. 2.02 ASPHALTIC CEMENT A. Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M226, Table 2. B. Superpave Performance Graded Binders shall conform to AASHTO Provisional Standard MPi for PG 58-28 Performance Graded Binders Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1200 - 2 Flexible Pavement Vail, Colorado 04 Feb�uary 2011 Construction a � � � � � � � �I�, u � I�� ' � � 2.03 TACK COAT One of the following, grade and type as recommended by supplier: - Emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M140 Cationic emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M208 � 2.04 MIX DESIGN � � � � � � � � � ' � � A. B. C. 2.05 MIXING A. Use Grading SX, 75 Design Gyrations, PG 58-28 Binder. Job — Mix Formula as defined in the Submittal Section (02740 — 3, Part 1.03 C). Furnish aggregate gradation. Accepted design mix shall meet compaction requirements of these specifications. General: Comply with ASTM D995 for material storage, control, mixing, and plant equipment and operation. 6. Aggregates: Keep each component of various-sized combined aggregates in separate stockpiles. Maintain so separate aggregate sizes will not be intermixed and to prevent segregation. Heat-dry aggregates to reduce moisture content to not more than 2%. Deliver dry aggregate to mixer at recommended temperature to suit penetration, grade, and viscosity characteristics of asphaltic cement, ambient temperature, and workability of mixture. C. Asphaltic Cement: Heat bitumen to viscosity at which it can be un'rformlydistributed throughout mixture. Select temperature range of 275 degrees F to 350 degrees F to suit temperature - viscosiry characteristics of asphalt. Do not exceed 350 degrees F. D. Mi�ang: Accurately weigh or measure dry aggregates and weigh or meter asphaltic cementto comply with job-mix formula requirements. Mix aggregate and asphaltic cement to achieve 95% minimum coated particles for base mixtures in accordance with AASHTO T195 and 85- 90% coated particles for surface mixtures when tested in accordance with ASTM D2489. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Base Course: Blade, shape, and smooth aggregate base course to uniform section in accordance with the technical specification for Unbound Base Course Section 02720. Remove loose materials. Clean the surface to be paved by mechanical sweepers, blowers, or hand brooms, until surface is free from dust. B. E�asting Surfaces: Clean of all foreign materials. Fill holes and low places with levelling courses and compact prior to surface placement. Tack coat e�asting surfacing at 0.1 gallon per square yard. Apply only to areas on which surfacing is to be placed immediately. Do not extend more than 2000' ahead of paving equipment. Prevent traffic from travelling on tack coat. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center � Vail, Colorado 321200 - 3 Flexible Pavement 04 February 2011 Construction 3.02 FRAME ADJUSTMENTS Set frames of structures to final grade. Place compacted asphaltic concrete to top of frame. If permanent covers are not in place, provide temporary covers over openings until compaction is complete. Where frames and covers are paved over, mark so crews can find on emergencybasis until cut out and adjusted to final surfacing. 3.03 SPREADING AND FINISHING A. Place at temperatures of not less than 275 degrees F, or more than 305 degrees F. If temperature is below 50 degrees F and falling, asphaltic concrete mix shall not be less than 300 degrees F, while on trucks just prior to laydown. Mechanical, self-powered pavers shall be capable of spreading mix within specified tolerances, true to line, grade, and crown as indicated on drawings. Road grader equipped with automatic blade control may be used for leveling courses. Pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and distribution screws which place mix evenly in front of adjustable screeds. Screed shall be adjustable for height and crown, equipped with controlled heating device for use as required. Screed shall strike off mixwithout tearing, shaving or gouging surface, to depth and cross-section specified, without aid of manual adjustment during operation. Paver shall be capable of placing courses in thicknesses from 1/2" to 4" and from widths of 8' to 15'. Extensions and cut-off shall permit changes in widths by increments of 6". B. Strike finish surface smooth; true to cross section; uniform in densiry and texture; free from hollows, transverse corrugations, and other irregularities. Paint contact surfaces between gutters, manhole rings, catch basins, and other similar structures with thin, uniform coating of tack coat. Final surface shall be 1/4" above all structures and gutters sloping away from paving, flush with gutters sloping towards paving. C. Hand Placement: Where certain areas because of irregularity, inaccessibiliry, or unavoidable obstacles, do not lend themselves to machine placement, Engineer may agree to hand placement. Spread and compact to same finish and compaction tolerances of these specifications. D. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavement, or between successive day's work, to insure thorough bond between old and new surfaces. Clean surfaces free of sand, dirt, dust, or other materials, and apply tack coat. Construction joints must have same texture, density, and smoothness tolerances as other surfacing. Construct transverse joints to existing material by cutting material back to expose full depth edge. Paint thin uniform tack coat on joint and place new asphaltic concrete. 2. Prepare longitudinal joints by overlapping screed 1" on epsting surface. Deposit sufficient materia! to complete joint. Push excess by hand rake 1/2" on new mat leaving vertical uncompacted face appro�amately 1" high. Compact against joint by rolling equipment. No depression allowed exceeding 1/8" for width of 6", after final compaction. E. Finish Tolerance: Place leveling courses within 1/2" of design grade. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10' straight edge, parallel to center line at location of wheel paths for each lane. Straight edge will be advanced 5' and space under straight edge shall not exceed 1/4". Correct areas deficient in smoothness by completely removing surface material and replacing. Overlay corrections may be made only if approved by Owner. F. Thickness Tolerance: Compacted thickness shall be no less than that shown on drawings. Any surfacing which does not meet minimum thickness shall be removed and replaced. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321200 - 4 Flexible Pavement Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �J � L: � � I � � �� i � '� � � � � � �I'� ' i �I �J � � 3.04 COMPACTION A. General: Provide rollers to obtain required density, surface texture, and rideability. Begin rolling operations immediately following placement of asphaltic concrete. Do not permit heavy equipment, rollers, etc. to stand on finished surface where deformation may occur. End each pass of roller in different place. B. Rollers Steel-wheel rollers self-propelled, developing contact pressure under compression wheels of 250 to 350 psi per inch of width of roller wheel. Rollers equipped with adjustable scrapers and means for keeping wheel wet to prevent mix from sticking. 2. Pneumatic-tired rollers self-propelled, developing contact pressure under each tire of 85 to 110 psi. Wheels so spaced that one pass will accomplish one complete coverage equal to rolling width of machine. Wheels oscillate but not wobble. Remove and replace immediately any tires picking up fines. C. Compaction Procedures 1. Compact longitudinal joints and edges first, starting at outside edge and gradually 1 progress towards center of pavement. Begin superelevated curves rolling on lowside on previously transversely compacted material. Successive passes should overlap by one halt width of roller. Mat temperature must not be below 185 degrees F. lJ � � L �� ' � � u 2. Immediately follow rolling of longitudinal joint and edges with breakdown rolling. Place drive wheel nearest paver and pull roller towards paver. Return roller to existing surface and make gradual shift to overlap previous pass by half roller width. Operate pneumatic-tired rollers as close to paver as necessary to obtain density required. Make enough passes for reasonably smooth surface. 3. Final rolling by a combination of steel and pneumatic rollers to obtain density, surface texture, and surface tolerances required. Pavement shall be compacted to a densiry of 92% to 96% of fhe mabmum theoretical density, determined according to Colorado Procedure 51. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with Colorado Procedure 44 or 81. 3.05 PATCHING Cut out and fill with fresh, hot asphaltic concrete. Remove deficient areas for full depth of surface and base course. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel, and perpendicular to direction of traffic to e�ent of failure. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new pavement. Compact and finish to specification. 3.06 CLEAN UP After completing operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess paving materials, and clean work area. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321200 - 5 Flexible Pavement � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction (This page intentionally left blank) Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1200 - 6 Flexible Pavement Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction O � � � � � [_.J � � SECTION 321300 RIGID PAVEMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing, forming, jointing, placing and curing of concrete pavement, curbs and gutters, sidewalks, pans, in conformance with lines, grades, and typical cross sections shown on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork: Section 31 2000 B. Aggregate Base Course: Section 32 1123 C. Concrete Paving Joints: Section 32 1301 D. Concrete Paving Curing: Section 32 1302 E. Cold Weather Concreting: Section 32 1303 F. Hot Weather Concreting: Section 32 1304 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement, temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C. Installers: 1. All work in this section to be accomplished under direct on-site supervision of thoroughly trained and experienced journeymen who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work and the recommendations contained in the reference standards. Unless otherwise specified, hand finishing methods will be permitted only when performed under the direct supervision of a Craftsman holding the following cert'rficate: ACI Concrete Flatwork Finisher and Technician (ACICFFT) or other Flatwork Finisher certification program approved by CDOT. A minimum of one cert'rfied Craftsman is required at each finishing operation. A minimum of one certified Craftsman is required for each three or fewer finishers (non-certified ACICFFTs) at each operation 2. In acceptance of the finished work, allowance will not be made for lack of skill on the part of the workers. D. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly adhered to concerning both methods and materials. Where surrounding conditions or base materials are not compatible with manufacturer's recommendations, notify Engineer in writing prior to bidding. E. Design Criteria: See Part 2 Products Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321300 -1 Rigid Pavement � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction F. Testing Agency: All testing shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory and paid by the Owner with the exception of Contractor submittal requirements, qualifications of proposed materials and establishment of mixture proportions and other tests required by the Contractor to assure Contractor is furnishing materials and construction in compliance with the contract documents. G H Source Qualiry Control: The Engineer or his representative shall be offered uninterrupted access to the ready-mix batching plant at all times that the work is in progress. Record of Work: Keep record listing time, location and date of placement of concrete for structure. Keep such record until completion of project and make available to Engineer for examination at any time. 1.03 SUBMITTALS /� � Shop Drawings: Reinforcement, precast sections. Manufacturers Data: Additives, joint materials, curing compounds, concrete sealant with 10-year manufacturer warranry, fly ash, reinforcement, concrete bonding agent, precast concrete reinforcing supports. C. Mix Design: Proportions of fine and coarse aggregate, water, cement, air content, admixtures, fly ash. A laboratory trial mix shall be prepared and test results submitted. The Concrete Mix Design will not be approved when the laboratory trial mix data are the results from tests performed more than two years in the past or aggregate data are the results from tests performed more than two years in the past. Provide all of the information outlined below for the concrete mix proposed for the project: Identification: 1. Project. 2. Name and address of Contractor and concrete producer. 3. Mixture designation. 4. Class of concrete and intended use. Materials and Proportions: 1. Name and location of material sources for aggregate, cement, admixtures and 2 3 4 7 8 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. water. Type of cement and additives (if used). Cement content in kilograms per cubic meter (pounds per cubic yard) of concrete. The water/cement ratio of modified concrete is the ratio of the mass of water to the combined masses of Portland cement and supplementary cementitious material. The saturated surface dry batch mass for the coarse and fine aggregate in kilograms per cubic meter (pounds per cubic yard) of concrete. Water content (including free moisture in the aggregate plus water in the drum, exclusive of absorbed moisture in the aggregate) in kilograms per cubic meter (pounds per cubic yard) of concrete. Target water/cementitious ratio. Dosage of admixture(s). Entrained air may be obtained either by the use of an air- entraining Portland cement or by the use of an air-entraining admixture. Sieve analysis of aggregates. Absorption of fine and coarse aggregate. Bulk spec'rfic gravity (dry and saturated surface dry) of fine and coarse aggregate. Dry rodded unit mass of coarse aggregate in kilograms per cubic meter (pounds per cubic yard). Fineness modulus (FM) of fine aggregate. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1300 - 2 Rigid Pavement Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � LJ � � � L_.1 � � �� , � � , ' � � � � � � � � � � � i ' � �� ' � 14. Concrete unit mass. 15. Material certifications for Portland cement, admixtures, and aggregate. The laboratory trial mix shall include results of the following: 1. AASHTO T119 slump of hydraulic cement concrete. 2. AASHTO T121 weight per cubic foot, yield, and air content (gravimetric) of concrete. Air content from AASHTO T152 air content of freshly mixed concrete by the pressure method may be used in lieu of the air content by the gravimetric method in AASHTO T121. 3. AASHTO T22 compressive strength of cylindrical concrete specimens shall be performed with at least two specimens at 7 days, two at 14 days and three specimens at 28 days. 4. Report compressive strength at other times as necessary for e�ected opening to traffic requirements. _ D. Placement: Method proposed. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hauling Time: 1. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. When air temperature is above 85°F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is above 90°F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Excessive slump or delivery time will be considered as a basis for rejection of the concrete placement. B. Extra Water: 1. Deliver concrete to site in exact quantities required by design mix. 2. Should extra water be required before depositing concrete, the General Contractors Superintendent shall have sole authority to authorize addition of water. Any additional water added to mix after leaving batch plant shall be indicated on truck ticket and signed by person responsible. 3. Where extra water is added to concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly for 40 revolutions of drum or 3-1/2 minutes at mixing speed, whichever is greater. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placement: a. When placing concrete in cold weather, as defined in Section 32 1303, follow specifications for Cold Weather Concreting, Section 32 1303. b. When placing concrete in cold weather that does not meet the definition of "cold weather" in Section 32 1303, the following requirements shall be observed: 1. Maintain concrete temperature at minimum of 50°F for not less than 72 hours after depositing. 2. Maintain forms in place for minimum of 72 hours after depositing concrete.. 3. Do not place concrete without acceptance of Engineer on days when temperature 9:00 A.M. is below 40°F until, the General Contractor has taken all necessary precautions and supplied all necessary equipment to prevent concrete from freezing. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321300 - 3 Rigid Pavement � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction PART 2 2.01 2.02 2.03 2.04 2.05 2.06 2.07 2. Hot Weather Placement: a. When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow specifications for Hot Weather Concreting, Section 32 1304. B. Protection: Protect newly finished slabs from rain damage. Cover masonry walls, glazing and other finish materials with polyethylene or othenivise protect from damage due to pouring slabs, sidewalks, or other concrete. PRODUCTS READY-MIXED CONCRETE AASHTO M157 CEMENT � Portland Cement ASTM C 150, TYPE UII. CONCRETE Use CDOT Concrete Class P or as indicated on plans and details. AGGREGATES A. Fine Aggregate - AASHTO M 6. 1. Fineness Modulus (FM) — AASHTO T 176, 2.50 < FM < 3.50 B. Coarse Aggregate - AASHTO M80. Coarse Aggregate shall conform to the requirements of CDOT Class P concrete. For curb and gutter, curbs, sidewalks, pads and pans use AASHTO M43 coarse aggregate gradation #67. WATER - AASHTO T26 A. The ma�amum slump of the delivered concrete shall be the slump of the approved concrete mix design plus 1-1/2". B. Water cement ratio - 0.44 maximum ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining Agent - AASHTO M154. For CDOT Class P concrete, 4-8% total air content. B. Chemical-Admixtures AASHTO M194 GIUALITY A. Provide approved mix design B. Conform to applicable requirements of ACI 301 C. Field cylinders shall produce 28-day minimum compressive strength of 4200 psi. Cement content 660 Ib/cy minimum. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321300 - 4 Rigid Pavement Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction i� I� 2.08 REINFORCEMENT A. � Deformed and plain billet-steel bars AASHTO M31 Fabricated steel bar rod mats, steel wire fabric AASHTO M54 2.09 JOINT MATERIAL AASHTO M173 2.10 CURING MATERIALS A. Burlap cloth fram jute or kenaf - AASHTO M182 B. Liquid membrane - AASHTO M148, 1 gal/150 SF C. Sheet Materials - AASHTO M171, 4 mil 2.11 SEALANTS A. Euclid Baracade Silane 100 High Performance Water Repellent or Symons Silane 40% 2.12 WATER: CLEAN AND POTABLE 2.13 FLY ASH: A. ASTM C 618. Use Class F fly ash only. The amount of fty ash shall conform to the percentages allowed in CDOT Class P concrete. Fly ash shall be from a source listed on CDOT's Approved Products List (APL). Ver'rfication from the supplier shall be submitted, confirming the fly ash is currently on CDOT's APL. 2.14 DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS: A. Dowel bars for transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 254 for the coating and to ASTM A615, Grade 60 for the core material and shall be epoxy coated, smooth and lightly greased for their full length. Dowel bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M&S Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. B. Tie bars for longitudinal and transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 284 and shall be grade 40, epoxy coated, deformed steel bars. Tie bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M&S Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. When tie bars are required between concrete pavement and adjacent curb and gutter, the gutter thickness shall be increased to match the pavement thickness. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBGRADE/BASE COURSE A. Check fo� soft spots by proof-rolling or other means prior to setting forms. Remove soft yielding mate�ial and replace. Compact to specification. Wet to optimum moisture to 6" deep, not more than 12 hours prior to placement so subgrade will not absorb moisture from concrete. B. Test for crown and/or elevation to assure specified thickness. If additional material used to bring subgrade to correct elevation, compact to specification. Before placing concrete, clean subgrade of all loose materials. No disturbance inside forms after fine grading subgrade. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321300 - 5 Rigid Pavement Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 3.02 INLETS, MANHOLES AND SIMILAR STRUCTURES CAST IN PAVEMENT: Thicken pavement and install joints and bond breaker at inlets, manholes and similar structures according to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Smaller structures such as valve and monument boxes do not require a bond breaker. 3.03 FORMS � � A. Capable of supporting loads imposed by construction equipment, with maximum deflection of 1/4". Straight and free from warp, with maximum surface deviation of 1/8". In good � condition, clean, and strong enough to resist pressure of concrete when placed. Joined neatly and accurately to line and grade, and mechanically tamped to assure firm placement. Oil prior to concrete placement. � B. Set dowels if required and expansion joints, preformed construction joints, and header boards in accordance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Securely stake preformed baskets to prevent movement. Lightly grease dowels full length. C. Backfitl behind forms as required to prevent water from entering subgrade. 3.04 REINFORCEMENT When indicated, place wire mesh as shown on drawings. If required for this project, place dowels and tie bars in accordance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and � details. Hold all tie and marginal bars in proper position by sufficient supports or pins. If center longitudinal joint sawed in lieu of placing metal or plastic strip, bars may be mechanically installed or placed on supports. Where rebar, rod mats or steel wire mesh is required, support with bar � chairs. Where two layers of inesh are required, support bottom layer by bar chairs with separators for top mesh. 3.05 READY-MIXED CONCRETE The use of ready-mixed concrete shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proportion, mix, delivery, or placement of concrete. All ready-mixed concrete shall comply with ASTM C94. Concrete shall be continuously mixed or agitated from the time the water is added until the time of use. The concrete shall be deposited in place within 90 minutes after batching when concrete is delivered in truck mixers or agitating trucks. The 90 minute time limit for mixer or agitating truck may be extended to 120 minutes if: (1) no water is added after 90 minutes (2) the concrete temperature prior to placements is less than 90° F. The 90 minute time limit for mixer or agitating trucks may be extended � to 180 minutes if (1) no water is added after 90 minutes (2) the concrete temperature prior to placement is less than 90°F (3) the approved concrete mix contains a water reducing and retarding admixture which conforms to AASHTO M194, Type D. In accordance with ASTM C94, water may be added to ready-mix concrete one time in order to get slump within range, as long as the specified � water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Engineer shall have free access to the ready mix plant at all times. The organization supplying the � concrete shall have sufficient plant and transportation facilities to assure continuous delivery of the concrete at the required rate. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1300 - 6 Rigid Pavement � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � n �i � 1 � ' � � The contractor shall collect delivery or batch tickets from the driver for all concrete used on the project and shall deliver them to the Engineer. Batch tickets shall provide the following information in accordance with ASTM C94: A. Name of ready-mix batch plant B. Serial number of ticket C. Date D. Truck number E. Name of purchaser F. Specific designation of job (name and location) G. Mix # or spec'rfic class or designation of the concrete H. Amount of concrete in cubic yards I: Time loaded or of first mixing of cement and aggregates J. Water added by receiver of concret� and his initials K. Weights of fine and coarse aggregates L. Type, brand and amount of cement M. Type, brand and amount of admixtures N. Weight (in gallons) of water, including surface water on aggregates 3.05 P�ACEMENT Deposit near final position on grade with minimum segregation and without damage to subgrade. � Operate transit mixer outside forms at all times, except in locations agreed to by Engineer. Place concrete on subgrade in successive batches for full width between forms in manner requiring as little rehandling as possible. Spread mechanically to prevent segregation and separation of ' materials. Additional spreading may be by hand shovels. Deposit excess concrete to provide roll ahead of strike off screed for full length of screed. Consolidate concrete with vibrators and spade next to forms, so final surfaces will not have holes or honeycombs. ' 3.06 FINISHING A. Use equipment designed to spread, consolidate, screed and float freshly placed concrete ' in one pass, providing well consolidated, homogenous mixture, requiring minimum of hand finishing to meet surface tolerances. Strike hand finished surfaces to tolerances by methods agreed to by Engineer. � � � ' B. C. D. E. F. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10' straight edge parallel to centerline immediately following first floating of surface. Straight edge will be advanced 5' and space under straight edge shall not exceed 3/16". Final finish pavements after floating and straight edging. Curbs, gutters, pans, and sidewalks shall be broom finished unless otherwise indicated. Finish: Broom finish unless otherwise indicated. Finish edges with a slightly rounded edging tool. ACI certificated finisher(s) must be on-site during finishing. The contractor shall not add water to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations. , 3.07 CURING (see Section 321302 Concrete Paving Curing for detailed specifications) � � � Apply curing compounds or sheets immediately after finishing. Do not mark or mar finished surface. Coat sides within one hour after form removal. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1300 - 7 Rigid Pavement Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 3.08 PROTECTION A. B. C. D. E. Have plastic sheeting or other suitable materials available at all times to protect fresh uncured surfaces from rain. Provide full protection from freezing. Admixtures (calcium chloride) are not acceptable for freeze protection. For hot weather, use fog spray or water retarding additives. Do not throw water directly on surface. When indicated, apply two (2) coats deep penetrating sealant. Conform to ACI 102.2R-09 "Guide to Durable Concrete" 3.09 JOINTS (see Section 321301 Concrete Paving Joints for detailed specifications) A. Contraction joints. For concrete pavement and concrete pans, depth 1/3 the thickness of concrete. For sidewalks, depth 1/4 the thickness of concrete. For curb and gutter, depth 1/4 the thickness of the gutter concrete. If curb and gutter is poured monolithically with concrete pavement, transverse joints shall be to the same depth as the pavement. L:� Hand formed with tool, header board, or trowel pushed into surface to move all aggregate from joint. 2. Saw joints as soon as concrete can support equipment without marring and cutting can proceed without chipping, spalling or tearing, no later than 12 hours after placement. Saw as soon as possible to prevent erratic or uncontrolled cracking and prior to the development of shrinkage cracking. Transverse joints to be perpendicular to centerline. First joints sawed approwmately 60 feet apart, intermediate joints sawed after initia� joints. Suitable guidelines shall be provided to ensure joint is straight and true to line. 3. 4. Curb and gutter, sidewalk and pan joints shall have tooled radii per current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details.. Longitudinal joints, including tie bars if required, shall conform with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 5. Fabricated steel or plastic strip held rigidly in place. Construction joints shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details and, 'rf required, tie bars shall be installed. Transverse construction joints shall be planned to coincide with a contraction joint location. 1. Joints constructed by forms with tie bars. C. E�ansion joints with preformed joint filler in a vertical position, deviating not more than 1/4" from a straight line. Install at all ebsting and proposed structures projecting through, into, or against pavement, in accordance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. D. Install joint sealant in all joints, at temperatures above 50 degrees F., in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clean all dust, debris and water from joint. Lionshead Transit Wetcome Center 32 1300 - 8 Rigid Pavement Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �l �J � �� ' � � � � � � � ' 3.10 THICKNESS Remove and replace work less than 95% of thickness according to drawings at Contractor's e�ense. 3.11 CLEANUP After completing concrete operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess materials, and clean work area. 3.12 OPENING TO TRAFFIC Pavement shall not be opened to traffic until 14 days after the con�rete was placed and the concrete has achieved a flexural strength of 650 psi. 3.13 FIELD C�UALITY CONTROL A. �;� C. General: All testing, with the exception of slump tests, shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory. The following tests and procedures are subject to change during construction at the discretion of the Engineers. Testing Laboratory: The selection of a testing laboratory for any of the following tests shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Testing Prioriry: Control tests shall be used to determine the concrete quality throughout the project, however, special tests shall have precedence over control tests, and core tests shall have precedence over all previous tests. ' D. Slump Tests: Provide all necessary equipment and make tests in conformity with ASTM C143 at a minimum frequency as indicted by CDOT specifications, with additional testing as needed or as directed by the Engineer. Provide for tests to be made by a person , thoroughly familiar with the requirements specified. Reject batch if slump excess the limits specified. Keep accurate �ecord of time, location in the work, and the results of all slump tests. Make available for inspection by the Engineer. , � � , � LJ � E. Control Tests: Control tests of concrete work, as a minimum, shall be made at such times and in such manner as indicated by CDOT specifications, with additional testing as needed or as directed by the Engineer at the expense of the Owner. For this project, each test shall consist of 5 standard 6" test cylinders cast and cured in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C172. Compressive strength samples shall be obtained at a minimum frequency of one sampling per day and more if deemed necessary by materials testing organization. Two cylinders shall be broken at the end of 7 days after placing and three cylinders shall be broken 28 days after placing. The Engineer resenres the right to stop all future concrete work when the 7 or 28-day tests indicate unsatisfactory results; until, in his opinion, proper corrective measures have been taken to assure quality concrete in futu�e work. Tests shall be made at the time test cylinders are taken, and recorded on the reports to determine the slump, air content, unit weight, and temperature of the concrete. All tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C39, ASTM C138 or ASTM C231. F. Maturity metering: When maturity metering is required, each pour shall include the necessary wires and connectors for maturity meter monitoring. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1300 - 9 Rigid Pavement � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 3.14 PROTECTION General: Protect all exposed surfaces of concrete from premature drying and frost. Protect freshly placed concrete against rain damage. Protect all concrete surfaces from staining, cracking, chipping and other damage during progress of work, and leave in good condition upon completion. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1300 -10 Rigid Pavement Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �I � � I ' I' PARTIGENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 SECTION 32 1301 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS DESCRIPTION Work of this section generally includes provisions for joints for concrete paving; concrete sidewalks; curbs, pans, stairs and curb and gutter; and saw-cutting existing concrete or asphalt pavements for new joints. RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork: Section 31 2000 B. Flexible Pavement: Section 32 1200 C. Rigid Pavement: Section 32 1300 D. Concrete Paving Curing: Section 32 1302 E. Cold Weather Concreting: Section 32 1303 F. Hot Weather Concreting: Section 32 1304 MEASUREMENT A. No measurement will be made for street pavement load transfer expansion joints. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. B. No measurement will be made for saw-cutting existing concrete or asphalt pavement or concrete curbs for new joints. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. C. No measurement will be made for formed, tooled or sawed street pavement contraction joints; construction joints and non-load transfer expansion joints regardless of material. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. D. No measurement will be made for jointing in concrete paving; concrete sidewalks; curbs, pans, stairs and curb and gutter. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving; concrete sidewalks; curbs, pans, stairs and curb and gutter. REFERENCES A. ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet — Steel 8ars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM D994 — Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). C. ASTM D1751 — Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1301 - 1 Concrete Paving Joints ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction D. E. F. G, ASTM D6690 — Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements ASTM D5893 — Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements. AASHTO M 254 - Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant Coated Dowel Bars AASHTO M 284 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment for approval. Submit samples of dowel cup, metal supports, and deformed metal strip for approval. If tie bars are required, submit method of tie bar placement. PART2PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. B. C. D. Foam Expansion Joint Material: Polyethylene foam conforming to ASTM D4819. Provide with a pre-sco�ed removal strip or removable cap for creating the joint sealant reservoir. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Bituminous fiber and bituminous composition material conforming to ASTM D994 and ASTM D1751. Provide with a pre-scored removal strip or removable cap for creating the joint sealant reservoir. Joint Sealing: Silicon based mastic, color to match paving, conforming to ASTM D5893 or Hot Applied conforming to ASTM D6690. All joint sealing to conform to manufacturer's recommendations�and requirements. Dowel Bars and Tie Bars (if required) Dowel bars for transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 254 for the coating and to ASTM A615, Grade 60 for the core material and shall be epoxy coated, smooth and lightly greased for their full length. Dowel bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 2. Tie bars for longitudinal and transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 284 and shall be grade 40, epoxy coated, deformed steel bars. Tie bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. When tie bars are required between concrete pavement and adjacent curb and gutter, the gutter thickness shall be increased to match the pavement thickness. E. Supports for Reinforcing Steel and Joint Assembly: Employ metal or concrete supports of approved shape and size that will secure reinforcing steel and joint assembly in correct position during placing and finishing of concrete. Space supports as needed to adequately maintain reinforcing location. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1301 - 2 Concrete Paving Joints Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � �� J O � � � � i � �� LJ � � � n ilL� � � � � � , , , PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Concrete jointing shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on plans and details.. If the contractor proposes variations or the project has unusual or irregular conditions not covered, the contractor shall prepare a pavement jointing plan for approval by the Engineer. B. When new work is adjacent to existing concrete, place joints at same location as existing joints in adjacent pavement, or as shown on jointing plan if jointing plan has been prepared for the project. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Place transverse construction joint wherever concrete placement must be stopped for more than 30 minutes, but in no case shall a transverse construction joint be constructed within 2 feet of another transverse joint. If 2' long slab cannot be provided, remove concrete back to preceding joint and place standard transverse construction joint bulkhead. Transverse construction joints, and tie bars if required, shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. B. Place longitudinal construction joints at interior edges of pavement lanes. Place longitudinal construction joints at the exterior edge of pavement lanes where pavement is placed adjacent to concrete pans or curb and gutter. Longiiudinal construction joints, and tie bars if required, shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 3.03 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Place Yrinch preformed joint filler expansion joints at locations indicated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details and at all existing or proposed structures and features projecting through, into or against the pavement, or as located in adjacent pavement. For concrete pavement, use boards no shorter than 6 feet. When pavement is 24 feet or narrower, use no more than 2 lengths of board. Secure pieces to form straight joint. Shape board filler accurately to cross-section of concrete slab. Thicken pavement and provide jointing around inlets, manhotes and other fixed structures per current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Seal joint in conformance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. , 3.04 CONTRACTION (WEAKENED PLANE) JOINTS � ' � � a A. Place transverse contraction joints at locations and spacing indicated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Joints for concrete pavement and pans shall be tooled or sawed to a depth of 1/3 the concrete thickness. Additional joint depths are as specified below. If dowel bars are required, they shall be installed within the tolerances and of the size, spacing and locations as indicated in the CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Dowel bars shall be furnished in a rigid welded assembly securely fastened to the sub-base and constructed to firmly hold all the dowel bars at the specified depth and parallel to each other and pavement grade and alignment B. Place longitudinal contraction joints at locations and spacing indicated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Joints shall be tooled or sawed to the depth specified. If tie bars are required, they shall be installed to the size, Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1301 - 3 Concrete Paving Joints Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction spacing and location as indicated in the CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 3.05 SAWED JOINTS A. Contractor may use sawed joints as an alternate to tooled joints. Circular cutter shall be capable of cutting straight line joint a minimum of 1/8 inch wide. Commence sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling or tearing and prior to initiation of cracks. Saw joints at required spacing in sequence with concrete placement. The time of sawing shall be determined by the Contractor to prevent random cracking and raveling from the sawing. If uncontrolled cracking begins during or prior to joint sawing, the Contractor shall move sawing operations ahead, and if necessary, provide additional sawing units to prevent uncontrolled cracking. If concrete is snowmelted, care shall be taken to not damage any snowmelt tubing or heat trace. B. Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to required dimensions and within required time. Provide at least one standby saw in good working order. Maintain sawing operations. Sawing equipment shall be on job at all times during concrete placement. 3.06 JOINTS FOR CURB, CURB AND GUTTER, AND PANS A. Place'/r inch preformed joint filler expansion joints through curb and gutters at locations of adjacent expansion joints in pavement; at locations and spacing indicated in the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details and between concrete curb or pan and any fixed structure or bridge. -Provide 1/8-inch wide joints on 10-foot centers, or, if curb or curb and gutter is poured adjacent to a concrete sidewalk, provide joints at every other sidewalk joint (maximum spacing of 12-feet). Joint depth shall be 1/4 of the gutter thickness and 1/3 of the pan thickness. If curb and gutter is poured monolithically with concrete pavement, transverse joints shalt be to the same depth as the pavement. 3.07 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE SIDEWALKS A. Provide Yr inch preformed joint filler expansion joints at intervals of not more than 500 feet and between sidewalk and any fixed structure, including utility penetrations. Extend the expansion joint material full depth of the sidewalk. Provide 1/8-inch wide joints, extending �/a the depth of the sidewalk, at intervals approximately equal to the width of the sidewalk. 3.08 JOINT SEALING (all joints shall be sealed) A. Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry, ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F and less than 85 degrees F, and weather is not foggy or rainy. B. Joint sealing equipment shall be in first class working condition, and be approved by the Engineer. Use concrete grooving machine or power-operated wire brush and other equipment such as plow, brooms, blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints. C. Thoroughly clean joints of loose scale, dirt, dust, residue, curing compound and other foreign material that will prevent bonding of the joint sealant. Compressed air, if used, shall be free of oil. The term joint includes wide joint spaces, contraction joints, construction joints, expansion joints, dummy g�oove joints or cracks, either preformed or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1301 - 4 Concrete Paving Joints Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � � 4.� � � LJ � � � � D. Install backer rod and fill joints neatly with joint sealer per the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details.. Provide sufficient joint sealer so that, upon completion, surface of sealer within joint will be'/a inch below level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Maintain joints in good condition until completion of work. B. Replace damaged joint material with new materials as required by this Section. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1301 - 5 Concrete Paving Joints Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction (This page left intentionally biank) Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1301 - 6 Concrete Paving Joints Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � O � � � � � � u SECTION 321302 CONCRETE PAVING CURING PARTIGENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this section includes curing of Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earihwork: Section 31 2000 B. Rigid Pavement: Section 32 1300 C. Concrete Paving Joints: Section 32 1301 D. Cold Weather Concreting: Section 32 1303 E. Hot Weather Concreting: Section 32 1304 1.03 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M 171 — Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. B. AASHTO M 148 — Standard Specifications for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. C. AASHTO M 182 - Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats 1.04 SUBMITTALS . A. Submit manufacturer's product data for cover materials and liquid membrane-forming compounds. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. If concreting occurs during cold weather as defined in Section 32 1303, concrete curing shall conform to the recommendations of Section 32 1303. 2. If concreting occurs during hot weather as defined in Section 32 1304, concrete curing shall conform to the recommendations of Section 32 1304. PART 2 PRODUCTS, CURING MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM TO ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: 2.01 COVER MATERIALS FOR CURING A. Polyethylene Film: Opaque pigmented white film conforming to requirements of AASHTO M 171 B. Waterproofed Paper: Paper conforming to requirements of AASHTO M 171 Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321302 - 1 Concrete Paving Curing Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction C. Cotton Mats: Single layer of cotton filler completely enclosed in cover of cotton cloth. Mats shall contain not less than 3/a of a pound of uniformly distributed cotton filler per square yard of mat. Cotton cloth used for covering materials shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per square yard. Mats shall stitched so that mat will contact surface of pavement at all points when saturated with water. 2.02 LI(�UID MEMBRANE — FORMING COMPOUNDS A. Liquid membrane-forming compounds shall conform to AASHTO M 148. Membrane shall be Type 2 for non-colored concrete and Type 1 for colored concrete and shall restrict loss of water to not more than 0.55 Kg/m2 of surface in 72 hours. PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. B. C When the ambient temperature is below 35° F the Contractor shall maintain the concrete temperature above 50° during the curing period. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine for himself the necessity for undertaking protective measures. The minimum curing period shall be determined by one of the following methods. The Engineer shall review for adequacy, the Contractor's determination of the curing period The minimum curing period shall be 120 hours 2. The minimum curing period shall be from the time the concrete has been placed until the concrete has met a compressive strength of 80 percent of the required field compressive strength. The Contractor shall cast information cylinders on the final portion of a placement and store as close to the structure as possible. The information cylinders shall receive similar thermal protection as the structure. The Contractor shall protect the information cylinders from damage. In-place strength shall be determined by at least two cylinders. If the information cylinders are destroyed in the field, the minimum curing period shall be 120 hours. . Immediately after placing fresh concrete, all concrete shall be cured by one of the following methods. The Engineer shall review for adequacy, the curing method proposed by the Contractor. 3.02 WATER METHOD A. All surfaces other than slabs shall be protected from the sun and the whole structure shall be kept wet throughout the curing period. All concrete slabs shall be covered as soon as possible with suitable material so that concrete is kept thoroughly wet for at least five (5) days. The concrete surface shall be kept moist at all times by fogging with an atomizing nozzle until the covering is places. 3.03 MEMBRANE FORMING CURING COMPOUND METHOD A. A volatile organic content (VOC) compliant curing compound conforming to AASHTO M148, Type 2 shall be used on surfaces where curing compound is allowed, except that Type 1 curing compound shall be used on exposed aggregate or colored concrete, or when directed by the Engineer. Curing compound shall not be used on construction joints. The rate of application of curing compound will be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation, but shall not be more than 300 square feet per gallon. All concrete cured by this method shall receive two applications of the curing compound. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321302 - 2 Concrete Paving Curing Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Co�struction � � LJ � LJ �J L� J � � � � J , ' ' , ' n LJ rl L ' , ' ' , ' ' ' ' , , The first coat shall be applied immediately after stripping of forms and acceptance of the concrete finish. If the surface is dry, the concrete shall be thoroughly wet with water and the curing compound applied just as the surface film of water disappears. The second application shall be applied after the first application has set. During curing operations, all unsprayed surfaces shall be kept wet with water. The coating shall be protected against marring for a period of at least ten days after application. Coating marred, or otherwise disturbed, shall be given an additional coating. When using a curing compound, the compound shall be thoroughly mixed within an hour before use. If the use of a curing compound results in a streaked or blotchy appearance, its use shall be discontinued. Water curing shall then be applied until the cause of the defective appearance is corrected. 3.04 BLANKET METHOD A. Electrically heated curing blanket or insulation blankets may be used in cold weather to maintain specified curing temperature and to retain moisture in concrete. Blankets shall be lapped at least 8-inches and shall be free of holes. Blankets shall be secured at laps and edges to prevent moisture from escaping. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321302 - 3 Concrete Paving Curing ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction (This page left intentionally blank) Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321302 - 4 Concrete Paving Curing Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � LJ � J � C__l � i 0 i , , ' 1-GENERAL �il L_. ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' , ' , ' , ' SECTION 321303 ACI 306.1-90 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 1.1 - Scope 1.1.1 This Standard Specification covers requirements for cold weather concreting and protection of concrete from freezing during the specified protection period. 1.1.2 The provision of this Standard Specification shall govern unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 1.2. - Definitions These definitions are to assist in interpreting the provisions of this specification. Accepted - Accepted by or acceptable to the Engineer. Engineer -The engineer or engineering firm issuing Project Drawings and Specifications,or administering the Work under the Contract Documents. Cold weather - A period when for more than three successive days the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 F. The average daily temperature is the average of the highest and lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight. When temperatures above 50 F occur during more than half of any 24 hr duration, the period shall no longer be regarded as cold weather. Cold weather concreting - Operations concerning the placing, finishing, curing, and protection of concrete during cold weather. Contracto� - The person, firm, or corporation with whom the Owner enters into an agreement for construction of the Work. Contract documents - Documents including the Project Drawings and Project Specifications covering the required Work. Day - A time period of 24 consecutive hours. Owner - The corporation, association, partnership, individual, or public body or authority with whom the Contractor enters into an agreement and for whom the Work is provided. Project drawings -The drawings, which along with the Project Specifications, complete the descriptive information for constructing the Work required or referred to in the Contract Documents. Project specifications - The written documents which specify requirements for a project in accordance with the service parameters and other specific criteria established by the Owner. Protection period - The required time during which the concrete is maintained at or above a specific temperature in order to prevent freezing of the concrete or to ensure the necessary strength development for structural safety. Reference standards - Standards of a technical society, organization, or association, including the codes of local or state authorities, which are referenced in the Contract Documents. Required - Required by this Specification or the Contract Documents. Submitted - Submitted to the Engineer for review. Work - The entire construction or separately identifiable parts thereof which are required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of performing services, furnishing labor, and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 1.3 - Reference organizations ACI: American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Detroit, MI 48219 ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1303 - 1 Cold Weather Concreting � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 1.4 - Reference standards 1.4.1 ACI Standards 301-89 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 1.4.2 ASTM Standards C 31-88 Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field C 150-86 Standard Specification for Portland Cement C 494-86 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete C 803-82 Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete C 873-85 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete Cylinders Cast in Place in Cylindrical Molds C 900-87 Standard Test Method for Pullout Strength of Hardened Concrete 1.5 - Submittal of procedures � 1.5.1 Detailed procedures - If required, submit detailed procedures for the production, transportation, placement, protection, curing, and temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather. In the submittal, include procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment failures. Do not begin cold weather concreting until these procedures have been reviewed and accepted. Minimum procedures for placement, curing and protection of the concrete shall follow the recommendations in ACI 306R, "Cold Weather Concreting." The details should include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Procedures for protecting the subgrade from frost and the accumulation of ice or snow on reinforcement or forms prior to placement. b. Methods for temperature protection during placement. c. Types of covering, insulation, housing, or heating to be provided. d. Curing methods to be used during and following the protection period. e. Use of strength accelerating admixtures. f. Methods for verification of in-place strength. g. Procedures for measuring and recording concrete temperatures. h. Procedures for preventing drying during dry, windy conditions. 2 - - MATERIALS 2.1 Scheduling protection materials All materials and equipment required for protection shall be available at the project site before cold weather concreting. 2.2 - Concrete Concrete for slabs and other flatwork exposed to cycles of freezing and thawing in a wet condition during the construction period shall be air entrained. 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 - Preparation before concreting Remove all snow, ice, and frost from the surfaces, including reinforcement, against which the concrete is to be placed. Before beginning concrete placement, completely thaw the subgrade. Do not place concrete around massive embedments identified in the Contract Documents unless such embedments are at a temperature above freezing. 3.2 - Concrete temperature 3.2.1 Placement temperature - The minimum temperature of concrete immediately after placement shall be as specified in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1. The temperature of concrete as placed shall not exceed the values shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1 by more than 20F. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1303 - 2 Cold Weather Concreting Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � f_ 1 u � _J u � �J � � � � �� L' � � � , ' , ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' � , ' , ' , , CJ Table 3.2.1 - Concrete temperature �) (21 (3) Least dimension of Minimum temperature Maximum gradual section, in. of concrete as placed decrease in surface and maintained during temperature during protection period, °F any 24 h after end of protection, °F Less than 12 55 50 12 to less than 36 50 40 36 to 72 45 30 Greater than 72 40 20 3.2.2 Protection temperature - Unless otherwise specified, the minimum temperature of concrete during the protection period shall be as shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1. Temperatures specified to be maintained during the protection period shall be those measured at the concrete surface, whether the surface is in contact with formwork, insulation, or air. Measure the temperature with a surface temperature measuring device having an accuracy of +/-2 F. Measure and record the temperature of concrete in each placement at regular time intervals at a frequency not less than twice per 24-hr period. 3.2.3 Termination of protection - The maximum decrease in temperature measured at the surface of the concrete in a 24-hour period shall not exceed the values shown in Column 3 of Table 3.2.1. Do not exceed these limits until the surface temperature of the concrete is within 20 F of the ambient or surrounding temperatures. When the surface temperature of the concrete is within 20 F of the ambient or surrounding temperature, all protection may be removed. 3.3 - Curing of concrete Prevent concrete from drying during the required curing period. If water curing is used, terminate use at least 24 hr before any anticipated exposure of the concrete to freezing temperatures. 3.4 - Protection of concrete 3.4.1 Combustion heaters - Vent flue gases from combustion heating units to the outside of the enclosure. 3.4.2 Overheating and drying - Place and direct heaters and ducts to avoid areas of overheating or drying of the concrete surface. 3.4.3 Maximum air temperature - During the protection period, do not expose the concrete surface to air having a temperature more than 20 F above the values shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1, unless higher values are required by an accepted curing method. 3.4.4 Protection against freezing - Cure and protect concrete against damage from freezing for a minimum period of 3 days, unless otherwise specified. Maintain the surface temperature of the concrete during that period in accordance with Column 2 of Table 3.2.1, unless otherwise specified. The protection period may be reduced to 2 days if use of one or more of the following to alter the concrete mixture is accepted: • Type III portland cement meeting the requirements of ASTM C 150 •, A strength accelerating admixture meeting the requirements of ASTM C 494 • 100 tb/yd3 of additional cement During periods not defined as cold weather, but when freezing temperatures may occur, protect concrete surtaces against freezing for the first 24 hr after placing. Any changes in the concrete mix proportions for reducing the duration of the protection period to prevent early freezing should be submitted for review or acceptance. 3.4.5 Protection deficiency - If the temperature requirements during the specified protection period are not met but the concrete was prevented from freezing, continue protection until twice the deficiency of protection in degree-hours is made up. Deficient degreehours may be determined by multiplying the average deficiency in temperature by the number of hours the temperature was below the values shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1303 - 3 Cold Weather Concreting Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction APPENDIX - METRIC CONVERSIONS Inch-pound unit Facto� S1 unit In. x25.4 = mm Lb/yd3 x0.5933 =kg/m' Psi x0.006895 =Mpa Temperature, °F (°F-32)/1.8 =°C Temperature interval °F °F/1.8 =°C END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1303 - 4 Cold Weather Concreting Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction ' ' ' SECTION 1—GENERAL SECTION 32 1304 ACI 305.1-06 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 1.1—Scope ' This Specification covers requirements for hot weathe� concrete construction. Provisions of this Specification shall govern, except where other provisions are specified in Contract Documents. This Specification shall not be used in conjunction with ACI 301 or ACI 530.1. � � L � ' ' ' 1.2—Referenced standards 1.2.1 Standards of ACI and ASTM referred to in this Specification are listed with serial designation, including year of adoption or revision, and are part of this Specification. 1.2.2 ACI Standards 308.1-98 Standard Specification for Curing Concrete 1.2.3 ASTM Standards C 31/C31 M-03a C 39/C 39M-05 C 78-02 C 94/C 94M-05 C 138/C 138M-01 a C 143/C 143M-05a C 171-03 C 173/C 173M- 01 £1 C 192/C 192M-05 C 231-04 C 293-02 C 1064/C 1064M-05 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third- Point Loading) Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete Test Method #or Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam With Center- Point Loading) Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydrautic-Cement Concrete ' 1.2.4 Abbreviations for and complete names and addresses of organizations issuing documents referred to in this Specification are listed: ' American Concrete Institute (ACI) PO Box 9094 Farmington Hills, MI 48333-9094 ' Phone: (248) 848-3700 Fax: (248) 848-3701 website: www.concrete.org , ASTM International (ASTM) 100 Barr Harbor Dr West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 ' Phone: (610) 832-9500 Fax: (610) 832-9555 website: www.astm.org , , � 1.3—Definitions day—a period of 24 consecutive hours. evaporation retardant—a material that generates a continuous thin film when spread over water on the surface of fresh concrete and thus retards the evaporation of bleed water. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1304 -1 Hot Weather Concreting Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction hot weather—job-site conditions that accelerate the rate of moisture loss or rate of cement hydration of freshly mixed concrete, including an ambient temperature of 27 °C (80 °F) or higher, and an evaporation rate that exceeds 1 kg/m2/h, or as revised by the Engineer. hot weather concreting—operations concerning the preparation, production, delivery, placement, finishing, protection, and curing of concrete during hot weather. moist—slightly damp but not quite dry to the touch; "wet" implies visible free water, "damp" implies less wetness than "wet," and "moisY' implies not quite dry. protection period—the required time during which the concrete is protected against thermal cracking due to rapid temperature drops. temperature of fresh concrete—the temperature measured during the discharge and placement in accordance with ASTM C 1064/C 1064M. temperature of hardened concrete—the temperature measured at the concrete surface. units—�ralues stated in either 11.S. Customary or SI units shall be regarded separately as standard. Values stated in each system might not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system must be used independently of the other, without combining values in any way. 1.4—Submittal of procedures 1.4.1 Before hot weather concreting and the preplacement conference, submit to Engineer for review and comment detailed procedures, including production, placement, finishing, curing and protection of concrete during hot weather concreting. 1.�Preplacement conference 1.5.1 At least 15 days before the start of the concrete construction schedule, hold a preplacement conference for the purpose of reviewing hot weather concreting requirements and mix designs. 1.5.2 Send a preplacement conference agenda on hot weather operations and procedures to representatives of concerned parties not less than 10 days before the scheduled date of the conference. 1.5.3 Preplacement conference shall include, but is not limited to, representation of Contractor, Concrete Subcontractor, Testing Agency, Pumping Contractor, and Ready-Mixed Concrete Producer. 1.5.4 Distribute the minutes of the preplacement conference to representatives of concerned parties within 5 days after the preplacement conference. � � � � rI '�J � � 1.6—Documents required on site 1.6.1 Copies of ACI 305R, ACI 305.1, and ACI 308.1 must be available at the project site during concrete � construction. SECTION 2—PRODUCTS 2.1—General 2.1.1 Store all materials and equipment required for curing and protection at or near the project site before hot weather concreting commences. 2.1.2 Initial site curing of strength test specimens for acceptance—Provide facilities that ensure compliance with the initial curing requirements of ASTM C 31/C 31 M. 2.2—Concrete mixture proportions 2.2.1 Submit concrete mixture proportions to Engineer for review. Include specific materials, manufacturer, and type fo� hot weather concreting. The submittal shall include concrete mixture adjustment parameters and methods to be implemented during changes in weather conditions. SECTION 3—EXECUTION 3.1—General 3.1.1 Do not place concrete against surfaces of absorbent materials that are dry. Do not place concrete against surfaces that have free water. 3.1.2 Prepare all materials required for accepted evaporation control measures and have them available on site so that specified measures can be executed as necessary. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321304 - 2 Hot Weather Concreting Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � L� 1 '�J � � � ' ' ' 3.1.3 Initiate accepted evaporation control measures when concrete and air temperatures, relative humidity of the air, and the wind velocity have the capacity to evaporate water from a free water surface . at a rate that is equal to or greater than 1.0 kg/m2/h (0.2 Ib/ft2/h), unless otherwise specified. Determine , the evaporation rate of surface moisture by use of the Menzel Formula: W= 0.315(eo - ea)(0.253 + 0.0601� [SI units] W= 0.44(eo - ea)(0.253 + 0.096V) [U.S. Customary units] , where W= mass of water evaporated in kg (Ib) per m2 (ft2) of water-covered surface per hour; eo = saturation water vapor pressure in kPa (psi) in the air immediately over the evaporating surface, at ' the temperature of the evaporating surface. Obtain this value from Table 3.1(a) or (b). The temperature of the evaporating surface shall be taken as the concrete temperature; ea = water vapor pressure in kPa (psi) in the air surrounding the concrete. Multiply the saturation vapor pressure at the temperature of the air surrounding the concrete by the relative humidity of the air. Air ' temperature and relative humidity are to be measured at a level approximately 1.2 to 1.8 m(4 to 6 ft) above the evaporating surface on the windward side and shielded from the sun's rays; and V= average wind speed in km/h (mph), measured at 0.5 m(20 in.) above the evaporating surface. , ' ' 3.1.3.1 Monitor site conditions (air temperature, humidity, wind speed) to assess the need for evaporation control measures beginning no later than 1 hour before the start of concrete placing operations. Continue to monitor site conditions at intervals of 30 minutes or less until specified curing procedures have been applied. 3.1.3.2 For measuring the rate of evaporation of surface moisture, use equipment or instruments that are certified by the manufacturer as accurate to within 1°C (2 °F), 5% relative humidity, and 1.6 km/h (1 mph) wind speed. Use equipment in accordance with the product manufacturer recommendations. Table 3.1(a�Saturation water vapor pressure (kPa) over water (SI units) ' Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature. °C pressure, kPa temperature, °C pressure, kPa 4 0813 28 3.78 5 0.872 29 4.01 ' 6 0.934 30 4.24 7 1.00 31 4.49 8 1.07 32 4.75 ' 9 1.15 33 � 5.03 10 1.23 34 5.32 11 1.31 35 5.62 12 1.40 36 5.94 � 13 1.50 37 6.28 14 1.60 38 6.63 15 1.70 39 6.99 ' 16 1.82 40 7.38 17 1.94 41 7.78 18 2.06 42 8.20 19 2.20 43 8.64 ' 20 2.34 44 9.10 21 2.49 45 9.58 22 2.64 46 10.1 ' 23 2.81 47 10.6 24 2.98 48 11.2 25 3.17 49 11.7 26 3.36 50 12.3 ' 27 3.56 Data source: CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 68th Edition, 1987, mathematically converted into kPa. ' Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321304 - 3 Hot Weather Concreting ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction Table 3.1(b�Saturation water vapor pressure (psi) over water (U.S. Customary units) Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature, °F pressure, qsi temperature. °F pressure, psi 40 0.121 81 0.523 41 0.127 82 0.542 42 0.132 83 0.559 43 0.137 84 0.577 44 0.143 85 0.595 45 0.147 86 0.615 46 0.153 87 0.637 47 0.159 88 0.658 48 0.166 89 0.679 49 0.171 90 � 0.698 50 0.178 91 0.722 51 0.185 92 0.746 52 0.192 93 0.769 53 0.199 94 0.789 54 0.206 95 0.816 55 0.214 96 0.843 56 0.222 97 0.870 57 0.231 98 0.896 58 0.238 99 0.920 59 0.247 100 0.951 60 0.257 101 0.981 61 0.267 102 1.01 62 0277 103 1.04 63 0.285 104 1.07 64 0.296 105 1.10 65 0.308 106 1.13 66 0.319 107 1.17 67 0.327 108 1.20 68 0.339 109 1.24 69 0.352 110 1.27 70 0.366 111 1.31 71 0.378 112 1.35 72 0.388 113 1.39 73 0.403 114 1.43 74 0.418 115 1.47 75 0.433 116 1.52 76 0.443 117 1.56 77 0.459 118 1.60 78 0.476 119 1.65 79 0.494 120 1.70 80 0.510 Data source: CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 68th Edition, 1987, mathematically converted into °F and psi. 3.2-Maximum allowable concrete temperature 3.2.1 Limit the maximum allowable fresh concrete temperature to 35 °C (95 °F), unless otherwise specified, or unless a higher allowable temperature is accepted by Engineer, based upon past field experience or preconstruction testing using a concrete mixture similar to one known to have been successfully used at a higher concrete temperature. 3.2.2 Measure the fresh concrete temperature at the point and time of discharge in accordance with ASTM C 1064/C 1064M. Frequency of temperature determination shall be in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M and at the option of the inspector. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321304 - 4 Hot Weather Concreting Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction O � a � � � J � � � � �J � � � � � L�' ' ' ' ' C ' C ' ' ' � ' ' I_ ; ' ' 3.3—Qualification of concrete mixture proportions 3.3.1 Approval of concrete mixture and proposed maximum allowable fresh concrete temperature, supported by past field experience of Section 3.2.1, shall be based, on similar climate and production conditions, materials, mixture proportions and temperatures, placing and finishing methods, and concrete delivery time. 3.3.2 Approval of concrete mixture and proposed maximum allowable fresh concrete temperature, supported by preconstruction testing of Section 3.2.1, shall require materials similar to those proposed for use in the project. 3.3.3 Laboratory trial batch—$atch the laboratory concrete trial mixture within 2°C (3 °F) of the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature and mix in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M, except as modified herein. If necessary, move the laboratory mixer into an enclosed, heated and ventilated space, or use heated mixing water, or both, to achieve and maintain the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature. For drum-type mixers, the concrete mixture shall remain in the mixer for 47 minutes after completion of the 3-minute initial mixing period unless specified otherwise. During the 50-minute period, cover the mixer opening with a non-absorbent material, such as plastic, to prevent moisture loss, and rotate the mixer continuously at an agitation speed of 6 to 8 rpm. For laboratory mixers without speed adjustments, simulate agitation by rotating the mixer continuously at a drum angle between 45 and 75 degrees from horizontal. At the end of 50 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing speed designated by the manufacturer (8 to 20 rpm) for 2 minutes. For pan-type mixers, the concrete mixture shall remain in the mixer for 41 minutes after completion of the initial 3-minute mixing period. During the 44-minute period, the mixer shall cycle through periods of rest for 5 minutes, and then mixing for 1 minute. During the rest period, cover the mixer opening with a non-absorbent material, such as plastic, to prevent moisture loss. At the end of 44 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing speed designated by the manufacturer (8 to 20 rpm) for 2 minutes. During mixing and agitation periods for both drum-type and pan-type mixers, the addition of water, chemical admixture, or both, to adjust slump is permitted provided that the specified concrete mixture w/cm is not exceeded. As needed, check and adjust the slump of the concrete mixture during the middle 1/3 of the 50- or 44-minute laboratory trial mixing period. 3.3.3.1 The proposed concrete mixture shall meet the specified slump range at the end of the laboratory mixing period and meet the required strength at the specified test age. 3.3.4 Field trial batch—�atch the field concrete trial mixture within 2°C (3 °F) of the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature in a truck-mixer with a minimum batch size of 3 m3 (4 yd3). If necessary, move the truck mixer into an enclosed, heated, and ventilated space to achieve a concrete temperature within the specified tolerance of the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature. The concrete mixture shall be held in the mixer for 90 minutes, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. During the entire 90-minute period, agitate the mixer at 1 to 6 rpm. At the end of 90 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing speed designated by the manufacturer (6 to 18 rpm) for 2 minutes. During mixing and agitation periods, the addition of water, chemical admixture, or both, to adjust slump is permitted provided that the specified concrete mixture w/cm is not exceeded. As needed, check and adjust the slump of the concrete mixture during the middle 1/3 of the 90-minute mixing period. 3.3.4.1 The proposed concrete mixture shall be within the specified slump range at the end of the 90- minute field mixing period and meet the required strength at the specified test age. 3.3.5 Test values obtained in accordance with the appropriate ASTM Standard shall include compressive strength (C 192/ C 192M or C 31/C 31M, and C 39/C 39M), flexural strength (C 192/C 192M and either C 78 or C 293; C 31/C 31 M and either C 78 or C 293), or both; slump (C 143/C 143M); air content (C 231, C 173/C 173M, or C 138/C 138M); concrete density (unit weight) (C 138/ C 138M); and concrete temperature (C 1064/ C 1064M). Slump, air content, and concrete and air temperature measurements shall be performed after initial mixing, intermediately as needed or as desired, and at the conclusion of the mixing period along with the other specified tests. 3.3.6 Acceptance of concrete mixture proportion� Submit to the Engineer for acceptance a request for a specific higher maximum allowable concrete temperature. Include the constituent materials and proportions of the proposed co�crete mixture and all values obtained from past field experience or preconstruction testing. Test results shall be within the Project Specification ranges and tolerances. 3.4--Concrete production and delivery 3.4.1 Concrete shall be produced at a temperature such that its maximum temperature at discharge will not exceed the specified maximum allowable concrete temperature. Acceptable production methods to Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 321304 - 5 Hot Weather Concreting ' Vall, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction reduce the temperature of the concrete include: shading aggregate stockpiles, sprinkling water on coarse aggregate stockpiles; using chilled water for concrete production; substituting chipped or shaved iced for portions of the mixing water; and cooling concrete materials using liquid nitrogen. The submittals for hot weather concreting shall indicate which methods will be used and in what order they will be initiated when multiple methods are to be used. The substitution of other cooling methods will be considered by the Engineer when requested in the submittal and accompanied by satisfactory supporting data. 3.4.2 Unless otherwise specified, deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M, which requires the concrete to be discharged within 1-1/2 hours or before the truck-mixer drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first. 3.�oncrete placement and finishing 3.5.1 Concrete placement and finishing operations shall proceed as quickly as conditions will permit. 3.f�Concrete bleed-water evaporation 3.6.1 Control concrete surface bleed-water evaporation with application of evaporation reducers, plastic sheeting, fog spray, or wind breaks. Use these materials and methods in accordance with ACI 308.1 Submit for approval the desired method to be used when concreting during periods with evaporation rates higher than permitted 3.7—Concrete curing 3.7.1 Concrete curing—Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308.1. 3.8—Concrete protection 3.8.1 Protection perioc�Protect the concrete against thermal shrinkage cracking due to rapid drops in concrete temperature greater than 22 °C (40 °F) during the first 24 hours unless otherwise specified. 3.8.2 Protection material�Acceptable protection materials to prevent excessive temperature drops are insulating blankets, batt insulation with moisture-proof covering, layers of dry porous material such as straw, hay, or multiple layers of impervious paper meeting ASTM C 171. These protection materials shall not be applied until the concrete surface temperature has become steady or is beginning to decline. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1304 - 6 Hot Weather Concreting Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction J LJ � J 'J � �' � r, �:1 �II' � �� ' � � PART1 GENERAL SECTION 321413 PRECAST INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS , 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: � � � !J ' ' � � � � �,� l ' L� 1. Interlocking Concrete Paver Units (manually installed). 2. Bedding and Joint Sand. 3. Edge Restraints. B. Related Sections: 1. Section: Aggregate Base 2. Section: Paver Edging 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. C 67, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile, Section 8, Freezing and Thawing. 3. ASTM C 136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 4. ASTM C 140, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. 5. ASTM C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 6. ASTM C 936, Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units. 7. ASTM C 979, Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 8. ASTM D 698, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). 9. ASTM D 1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). 10. ASTM D 2940, Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports. B. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (ICPI): 1. ICPI Tech Spec Technical Bulietins 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. B. Sieve analysis per ASTM C 136 for grading of bedding and joint sand. C. Concrete pavers: 1. Four representative full-size samples of each paver type, thickness, color, finish that indicate the range of color variation and texture expected in the finished installation. Color(s) selected by Owner from manufacturers available colors. 2. Accepted samples become the standard of acceptance for the work. 3. Test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance of concrete pavers with ASTM C 936. 4. Manufacturer's certification of concrete pavers by ICPI as having met applicable ASTM standards. � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � 32 1413 -1 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS 04 February 2011 Construction 5. Manufacturer's catalog product data, installation instructions, and material safety data sheets for the safe handling of the specified materials and products. D. Paver Installation Subcontractor: 1. A copy of Subcontractor's current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program. 2. Job references from projects of a similar size and complexity. Provide Owner/Client/General Contractor names, postal address, phone, fax, and email address 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Paving Subcontracto� Qualifications: 1. Utilize an installer having successfully completed concrete paver installation similar in design, material, and extent indicated on this project. 2. Utilize an installer holding a current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program. B. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: Licensing or bonding as required by Town of Vail. C. Mock-Ups: 1. Install a 7 ft x 7 ft(2 x 2 m) paver area consisting of each paver Type utilized 2. Use this area to determine surcharge of the bedding sand iayer, joint sizes, lines, laying pattern(s), color(s) and texture of the job. 3. This area will be used as the standard by which the work will be judged. 4. Subject to acceptance by owner, mock-up may be retained as part of finished work. 5. If mock-up is not retained, remove and properly dispose of mock-up. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE 8� HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section. B. Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers packaging with identification labels intact. 1. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of buildings adjacent to paving. 2. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded or plastic wrapped packaging capable of transfer by forklift or clamp lift. 3. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product. D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected such that they are kept free from mud, dirt, and other foreign materials. Store concrete paver cleaners and sealers per manufacturer's instructions. 1. Cover bedding sand and joint sand with waterproof covering if needed to prevent exposure to rainfall o� removal by wind_ Secure the covering in place. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install sand or pavers during heavy rain or snowfall. 2. Do not install sand and pavers over frozen base materials. 3. Do not install f�ozen sand or saturated sand. 4. Do not install concrete pavers on frozen or saturated sand. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide any leftover material for use by owner for maintenance and repair B. Pavers shall be from the same production run as installed materials. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS Lionshead Tra�sit Welcome Center 32 1413 - 2 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 � � i I! � �I J � � �J � � �l � J � � Construction � � , � � � � � � 1 ' � i � .� � � � ' A. Manufacturer: Pavestone 1. Contact: Pavestone, DENVER, COLORADO 303.287.3700 B. Interlocking Concrete Pavers: 1. Paver Types and Patterns: See Details 1 and 2, Sheet L200 a. Material Standard: Comply with material standards set forth in ASTM C 936. b. Color: Winter Blend and Charcoal c. Color Pigment Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 979. d. Size: 80 mm and 60 mm e. Average Compressive Strength (C140): 8000 psi (55 MPa) with no individual unit under 7200 psi (50 MPa) pe� ASTM C 140. f. Average Water Absorption (ASTM C 140): 5% with no unit greater than 7%. g. Freeze/Thaw Resistance (ASTM C 67): Resistant to 50 freeze/thaw cycles with no greater than 1% loss of material. Freeze-thaw testing requirements shall be waived for applications not exposed to freezing conditions. 2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: Solely with written approval of TOV and landscape architect. 2.03 BEDDING AND JOINT SAND A. Provide bedding and joint sand as follows: 1. Washed, clean, non-plastic, f�ee from deleterious or foreign matter, symmetrically shaped, natural or manufactured from crushed rock. 2. Do not use limestone screenings, stone dust, or sand for the bedding sand material that does not conform to conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 33. 3. Do not use mason sand or sand conforming to ASTM C 144 for the bedding sand. 4. Where concrete pavers are subject to vehicular traffic, utilize sands that are as hard as practically available. 5. Sieve according to ASTM C 136. 6. Bedding Sand Material Requirements: Conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 33 with modifications as shown in Table 1. Table 1 Grading Requirements for Bedding Sand ASTM C 33 Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/8 in.(9.5 mm) No. 4 (4.75 mm) No. 8 (2.36 mm) No. 16 (1.18 mm) No. 30 (0.600 mm) No. 50 (0.300 mm) No. 100 (0.150 mm) No. 200 (0.075 mm) 100 95 to 100 85 to 100 50 to 85 25 to 60 10 to 30 2 to 10 0 to 1 7. Joint Sand Material Requirements: Conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 144 as shown with modifications in Table 2 below: �ionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1413 - 3 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction Tabie 2 Grading Requirements for Joint Sand ASTM C 144 ASTM C 144 Sieve Size No. 4 (4.75 mm) No. 8 (2.36 mm) No. 16 (1.18 mm) No. 30 (0.600 mm) No. 50 (0.300 mm) No. 100 (0.150 mm) No. 200 (0.075 mm) Naturai Sand Manufactured Sand Percent Passing Percent Passing 100 100 95 to 100 95 to 100 70 to 100 70 to 100 40 to 75 40 to 100 10 to 35 20 to 40 2to 15 10to25 Oto1 Oto10 2.04 EDGE RESTRAINTS A. Provide edge restraints installed around the perimeter of all interlocking concrete paving unit areas not otherwise constrained by wall or curb in accordance with Section 32-1414. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS A. Acceptable paving subcontractors shall have demonstrated prior experienced in installing Pavestone interlocking concrete unit pavers. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Site Verification of Conditions: 1. General Contractor shall inspect, accept and certify in writing to the paver installation subcontractor that site conditions meet specifications for the following items prior to installation of interlocking concrete pavers. a. Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and elevations conform to specified requirements. b. Verify that geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed according to drawings and specifications. c. Verify that aggregate base materials, thickness, compacted density, surface tolerances and elevations conform to specified requirements. Recommended base surface tolerance should be ±❑3/8 in. (±10 mm) over a 10 ft. (3 m) straight edge. Surface elevations of the base should be checked and accepted by the General Contractor or designated party, with written certification to the paving subcontractor, prior to placing bedding sand and concrete pavers. d. Provide written density test results for soil subgrade, aggregate base materials to the Owner, General Contractor and paver installation subcontractor. e. Verify location, type, and elevations of edge restraints or concrete collars around utility structures, and drainage inlets. 2. Do not proceed with installation of bedding sand and interlocking concrete pavers until subgrade soil and base conditions are corrected by the General,Contractor or designated subcontractor. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Verify base is dry, certified by General Contractor as meeting material, installation and g�ade specifications. B. Verify that base is ready to support sand, edge restraints, and, pavers and imposed loads. C. Edge Restraint Preparation: 1. Install edge restraints per the drawings and manufacturer's recommendations at the indicated elevations. 2. Mount directly to finished base. Do not install on bedding sand. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1413 - 4 Vail, Colorado � � ��J � �' � �I � � � � � � � � INTERLOCKING CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS � 04 February 2011 Construction � ' ' i � � � , lJ � � � ' ' � ' ' 3. The minimum distance from the outside edge of the base to the spikes shall be equal to the thickness of the base. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Spread bedding sand evenly over the base course and screed to a nominal 1 in. (25 mm) thickness, not exceeding 11/2 in. (40 mm) thickness. Spread bedding sand evenly over the base course and screed rails, using the rails and/or edge restraints to produce a nominal 1 in. (25 mm) thickness, allowing for specified variation in the base surface. 1. Do not disturb screeded sand. 2. Screeded area shall not substantially exceed that which is covered by pavers in a day. 3. Do not use bedding sand to fill depressions in the base surface. B. Lay pavers in pattern specified. Place units hand tight without using hammers. Make horizontal adjustments to placement of laid pavers with rubber hammers and pry bars as required. C. Provide joints between pavers between 1/16 in. and 3/16 in. (2 and 5 mm) wide. No more than 5% of the joints shall exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm) wide to achieve straight bond lines. D. Joint (bond) lines shall not deviate more than t1/2 in. (±15 mm) over 50 ft. (15 m) from string lines. E. Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut pavers or edge units. F. Cut pavers to be placed along the edge with a double blade paver splitter or masonry saw. G. Adjust pattern at pavement edges such that cutting of edge pavers is minimized. H. Keep skid steer and forklift equipment off newly laid pavers that have not received initial compaction and joint sand. I. Use a low-amplitude plate compactor capable of at least minimum of 4,000 Ibf (18 kN) at a frequency of 75 to 100 Hz to vibrate the pavers into the sand. Remove any cracked or damaged pave�s and replace with new units. J. Simultaneously spread, sweep and compact dry joint sand into joints continuously until full. This will require at least 4 to 6 passes with a plate compactor. Do not compact within 6 ft(2 m) of unrestrained edges of paving units. K. All work within 6 ft. (2 m) of the laying face must shall be left fully compacted with sand-filled joints at the end of each day or compacted upon acceptance of the work. Cover the laying face or any incomplete areas with plastic sheets overnight if not closed with cut and compacted pavers with joint sand to prevent exposed bedding sand from becoming saturated from rainfall. L. Rerriove excess sand from surface when installation is complete. M. Allow excess joint sand to remain on surface to protect pavers from damage from other trades. Remove excess sand when directed by Owner. N. Surface shall be broom clean after removal of excess joint sand. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The final surface tolerance from grade elevations shall not deviate more than ±❑3/8 in. (t10 mm) under a 10 ft(3 m) rigid straightedge. Tolerances on complex contoured slopes should be measured with a flexible straightedge capable of conforming to the complex curves on the pavement surface. B. Check final surface elevations for conformance to drawings. For installations on a compacted aggregate base and soil subgrade, the top surface of the pavers may be 1/8 to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 mm) above the final elevations after compaction. This helps compensate for possible mino� settling normal to pavements. C. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 mm) above adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels. D. Lippage: No greater than 1/8 in. (3 mm) difference in height between adjacent pavers. , Lionshead Transit Welcome Center Vail, Colorado � END OF SECTION 32 1413 - 5 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS 04 February 2011 Construction SECTION 32 1414 PAVER EDGE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WARRANTY A. 15-year limited material warranty for asphalt/concrete paver restraint edging from manufacturing defects in workmanship or material. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ASPHALT /CONCRETE PAVER RESTRAINT EDGING A. Product: Permaloc AsphaltEdge, with 0.210 inch (5.33 mm) thick exposed top lip x 4" (102 mm) high x 8 feet (2.44 meters) long, extruded aluminum, alloy 6005, T-5 hardness as manufactured by Permaloc Corporation, Holland MI 49424, telephone (800) 356-9660 or (616) 399-9600, or approved equal. Ho�izontal base to have upward facing angle profile designed to integrate restraint and asphalt surfaces for straight-line and curvilinear applications. Section shall have holes in base spaced 4 inches (102 mm) apart along its length to receive anchors. � � � � � � B. Connection Method: Section ends shall splice together with long aluminum sliding connector � recommended by manufacturer for use with 4" height edging. C. Anchors: 3/8 inch x 10 inches (9.5 mm x 254 mm) bright spiral steel spike, 3/16 inch x 1-1/2 inches (4.8 mm x 38 mm) or longer Ardox concrete nail, or drive pin fastener equal to Hilti DX 40 powder actuated pin or Ramset Trakfast Automatic Fastening System pin. D. Finish: Black DuraFlex Painted, AAMA 2603, electrostatically baked on paint. PART 3 EXECUTION Asphalt Base Pavement Installation: Shall be as specified by project engineer. 3.01 INSTALLATION OF RESTRAINT EDGING /1 f:3 Base Installation: 1. Extend base at least 6 inches (152 mm) beyond edge of restraint edging. 2. Level base beneath restraint edging. Edging Installation: 1. Install edging leaving 3/8" (9.5 mm) between sections for expansion. 2. Drive spikes through edging holes in base of asphalt restraint edging (or drive nails through aluminum base when using powder actuated fastening system) at spaces for following applications: a. Anchor each section end with anchor. b. Aggregate Base: Spiral steel spikes at 4 inches (102 mm) to 12 inches (305 mm) on center. c. Softer or Thinner Asphalt Base: 3/8 inch x 10 inches (9.5 mm x 254 mm) spiral steel spikes at 4 inches (102 mm) to 12 inches (305 mm) on center spacing. d. Older, Harder, or Thicker Asphalt Base: Hilti DX A41 Fully Automatic Powder Actuated Tool is desirable where sufficient hold can be obtained. Provide 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) to 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) nail at 4 inches (102 mm) to 12 inches (305 mm) on center spacing with applicable charge recommended. e. Concrete Base: Hilti DX A41 Fully Automatic Powder Actuated Tool is desirable where sufficient hold can be obtained. Provide 3/4 inches (19 mm) to 1 inches (25 Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1414 -1 Vail, Colorado C� � LJ � �� Li O � PAVER EDGE � 04 February 2011 Construction � mm) nail at 4 inches (102 mm) to 12 inches (305 mm) on center spacing with applicable charge recommended. Anchor into outer 1 inch (25 mm) of base of restraint edging and not less than 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) from edge of concrete. 3. Securely connect sections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide additional anchors at closer spacing as necessary to firmly secure edging for permanent intended use. C. Pavement Installation: 1. Install concrete pavers adjacent to and approximately'/z inch (12.7 mm) over top of restraint edging, depending on expected compaction results. Then, compact first pass with desired equipment within 6 inches (152 mm) of restraint edging. Subsequent passes may be directly against or over top of edging to ensure complete compaction of pavers. 2. Finish pavement shall be compacted and level with, but not to exceed 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) above top of restraint edging. D. Backfill side of edging on turf side and compact backfill material along edging to provide top of edging at'/z inch (13 mm) above �nish grade on turf side. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 1414 - 2 PAVER EDGE Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �l 0 � � � � 0 0 � � � �J 0 0 1 1 I 1 1 � � � V � i ' � l � �� L� �� i ' SECTION 32 80 00 IRRIGATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 This Section includes performance requirements for a design-build installation of a low volume irrigation system. A. The purpose of the irrigation system is to apply supplemental water that is needed by turf and landscape plants when natural rainfall is not sufficient. B. All proposed landscaping is to be irrigated by means of a low-water use, automatic, underground irrigation system with rain sensors, timers, and multiple zones based on aspect and vegetation groupings. Lawn areas are to be iRigated by pop-up spray components. Trees and shnabs shall be drip irrigated on a separate zone. Perennial beds are to be spray irrigated with "micro-jets" on their own zone. Revegetation areas are to be spray irrigated until cover is established. 1.2 These specifications require the IRigation Contractor ("Contractor") to design, install and maintain a landscape irrigation systems that enables the efficient application and conservation and protection of water. PART 1 - PERFORMANCE CRITERIA 2.1 QUALITY A. B. C. A quality irrigation system effectively distributes supplemental water in a way that maintains healthy plants while conserving water. The system is to be designed to distribute water efficiently and uniformly, and installed according to the manufacturer's specifications. A qualified (ce�tified, formally trained, licensed or some other certification) irrigation professional is to design, install and adjust�the system. Upon completion, the Town of Vail representative shall perform field observation to check for proper installation and function of the back flow prevention assembly, main line, pipes, valves, sprinkler heads, control wires and water conserving controls and devices. 2.2 DESIGN A. I�rigation designer/contractor to provide shop drawings of actual design and layout of irrigation system for TOV staff review and approval prior to installation. B. The system shall be designed to be efficient with water resources. Criteria to be considered in design includes soil type, slope, rooting depths, plant water needs, local climate, microclimates, water source quantity, quality and pressure, peak demand and watering timing. C. The designer shall select appropriate system components that meet all applicable plumbing and electrical local code requirements, Town of Vail system standa�ds, protects the water source, and results in the efficient distribution of wate�. D. The size and pressure of the water source shall be adequate to meet peak demands for iRigating with a window of no more than 10 hours on a daily basis. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 80 00 -1 IRRIGATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction E F G. The design shall have a designed Distribution Uniformity of 75 for the entire site. The system design shall consider minimizing evaporation losses or low-angle sprinkler heads to minimize the effects of wind. The watering of hardscapes is to be avoided. The design shall have appropriate pipe sizing with no more than 10% variation in pressure within a zone between emitters or sprinklers. Zone layout shall be based on soils, slopes, plant water requirements, rooting depths, weather conditions, supply pressure, minimum acceptable application rates and TOV requirements. H. The design shall consider minimizing ongoing system maintenance and easy management of the system. Contollers shall be selected with non-volatile memory to ensure programming information and settings are retained with power loss. A high performing controller is to be selected with flexible sheduling timers, interface to environmental, soil moisture and climate sensors to facilitate multiple programmed system management and suspend irrigation when unfavorable weather conditions exist. Zone by zone control is required to manage landscapes that have multiple differing watering requirements. The design shall include provisions for future expansion based on system extension needs identified by the Town of Vail Public Works Department, such as spare zone control wires or larger mainline piping. J. The design shall include a dedicated water meter if requested by Town of Vail Public Works Department. 2.3 INSTALLATION A. B. C. The system shall be installed according to the irrigation design to conserve water resources. Installed components shall meet the design and manufacturer's specifications, TOV, and site and local code requirements. The irrigation contractor shall be licensed, experienced and reputable. � � � � �1 � � �J D. Before commencing installation, ve�ify the tap, flow rate and pressure meet design and � TOV criteria. Obtain all necessary permits for irrigation system installation. Contact appropriate utility companies to locate underground utilities including gas lines, electrical, telephone, cable. Contractor shall be responsible to fix any utility problems created at their � own expense. E. Irrigation system trenches are to be dug outside the dripline of existing trees to the extent � practicable. F. Irrigation contractor to provide shop drawings to owner and landscape architect, detailing all irrigation components, vault locations, pressure loss, gpm calculations and water conservation methods, for review and approval prior to installation. An as-built drawing depicting the final irrigation system components and any adjusted locations is to be provided to the owner prior to acceptance of installation. G. The Irrigation Contractor is to preserve the existing irrigation system and connections to the extent feasible. Existing equipment valves and controls should be determined and relocated to an appropriate location if necessary. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 80 00 - 2 IRRIGATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction u � a � � ' � H. Valve boxes are to be located a minimum of 10 from buildings. Utility/valve boxes located in concrete unit paving areas shall be selected with lids that can be infilled with matching pavers. � 2.4 MAINTENANCE � A. The irrigation system shall be adjusted and maintained to keep the integrity of the design and conserve water resources until final acceptance of irrigation installation by Owner. B. The irrigation schedule is to be changed and controlled as required to provide an � appropriate level of supplemental water without waste and overwatering, and adjusted to continue to efficiently and uniformly distribute water, and continue to conserve and protect water resources. � � � � n �' � LJ ' � �I � ' [_' � C. The contractor shall thoroughly test and adjust the system so that it operates according to the design specifications. Verify that backflow prevention device is working correctly. Inspect and adjust valves and heads for proper flow and operation. Verify that sensors are working properly and are within calibration specifications. D. Contractor shall create and review with Owner the determined irrigation schedule and rationale for irrigation days, zone run times and start times. Contractor will educate Owner on the location and operation/features of the controller, valves, sensors, pressure regulators, backflow devices, sprinklers and emitters. E. Contractor will provide Owner with product warranties and operating instructions for all equipment. PART 3 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT 3.1 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be for the irrigation system necessary to design and deliver water for the landscaping areas indicated on the plans and these specifications complete in place and accepted. � 3.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment will be made as a lump sum, said price and payment shall be considered as full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and other incidentals necessary to furnish, fabricate, transport and install the irrigation system. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 80 00 - 3 tRRtGATION � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � �J � � � u � LJ � � � � � �-� �, i � � ' SECTION 32 9000 LANDSCAPE GENERAL CONDITIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 INSURANCE Upon entering into the Contract with Owner, the Landscape Contractor ("Contractor") shall at his own expense procure and, at all times during the prosecution of the work and until final completio�, maintain in full force and effect Workmen's Compensation Insurance and Public Liability Insurance. 1.02 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, or national origin. � 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE � ' � The Contractor may provide and maintain on the site for the duration of the work, a temporary office equipped with a telephone. 1.04 TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES The Contractor shall provide and maintain enclosed and weatherproof toilet facilities of the premises of sufficient size to accommodate all workmen on the job. 1.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES � � 1.06 � � ,.�7 ' ' i � � 1.08 The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, all temporary utility services such as water, gas, and electricity as necessary during construction of the work. This includes temporary lines, wiring, pipes, connections, disconnections and cost of electricity, gas or water used, lighting, electrical and other mechanical installations. . REFERENCES In addition to codes, laws, regulations, and the like mentioned elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Manufacturers' Specifications and other documents are refened to in certain sections of the Technical Specifications. These references, insofar as they apply, are a part of the Contract as if they were repeated in full therein. GUARANTEE All work shall be guaranteed by the Contractor against defects resulting from inferior materials, equipment or workmanship for one year from the date of final completion of the Contract or from acceptance by the Owner, whichever is earlier. For items requiring longer guaranty, see Specifications. CONFLICTS In case of conflicts in the drawings, in the Specifications, and between the drawings and the Specifications, not otherwise �esolved, the better grade of material, equipment, installation and application shall be considered the intent. In cases of conflict in dimensions of equipment and material between the drawings and Specifications, the more costly size shall be considered the intent for establishing the Contract Price. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9000 -1 LANDSCAPE GENERAL CONDITIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 1.09 ALTERATION OF PLANS OR CHARACTER OF WORK A. The Owner reserves the right to make, at any time during the progress of the work, such increases or decreases in quantities and such alterations in the details of construction, including alterations in the grade or alignment of the structure, as may be found to be necessary or desirable. Such increases or decreases and alterations shall not invalidate the Contract, nor release the surety, and the Contractor agrees to perform the work as altered, the Contractor agrees to perform the work as altered, the same as if it had been a part of the original Contract. B. Unless such alterations and increases or decreases materially change the character of the work to be performed or the cost thereof, the altered work shall be paid for at the same unit prices as other parts of the work. No claim shall be made by the Contractor for any loss of anticipated profits because of any such alteration, or by reason of any variation between the approximate quantities and the quantities of work as done. If, however, the character of the work or the unit costs thereof are materially changed, an allowance shall be made on such basis as may have been agreed to in advance of the performance of the work, or in case no such basis has been previously agreed upon, then an allowance shall be made, either for or against the Contractor, in such amount as the Owner, Contractor and Landscape Architect may determine to be fair and equitable. C. Should the Contractor encounter or the Owner discover during the progress of the work subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing materially from those indicated in this Contract, or unknown physical conditions at the site of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract, the Owner shall be promptly notified in writing of such conditions before they are disturbed. The Owner will investigate the conditions and if he finds they do so materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost of, or the time required for performance of the Contract, an equitable adjustment will be made. 1.10 OWNER'S USE OF PROPERTY A. f'.l The Owner reserves the right to occupy or use any part or parts, or the entirety of the grounds, when safe for use or occupancy. The Contract will be deemed completed only when all the work contracted for is duly and properly performed and accepted by the Owner. C. In exercising the above right to occupy or use incomplete facilities prior to the completion thereof, the Owner shall not make any use which will increase the cost to the Contractor, nor materially delay him in the execution of his contract without agreement and extension of time of completion. D. The Contractor shall not be responsible, beyond exercising reasonable precaution, for any damage to or theft of any equipment or facility not included in this Contract placed upon the premises of this project by the Owner. 1.11 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND METHODS A. Brand or trade names and references to products of specific manufacturers appearing in these Specifications are used to establish the standard of quality, utility, appearance and methods required for a given item. Other materials, equipment, and methods may be used, provided approval is first obtained in w�ting from the Landscape Architect. B. Substitutions will be considered only when requested by the Contractor in writing, accompanied by complete data, including samples, in duplicate, describing in detail the Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9000 - 2 LANDSCAPE GENERAL CONDITIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction O �� J � � � � � �I u �l � � a , � � � 1.12 � ' 1.13 � ' � �J � � � ' ' � � L_� item offiered for substitution. Such substitution will be accepted only when, in the judgment of the Landscape Architect, it is equal in every respect to the item specified. C. Requests for substitutions must be submitted by the Contractor within thirty-five (35) calendar days following the award of the Contract. Moreover, it is suggested that requests for substitutions be submitted at least ten (10) days before the bid opening date in order to expedite their review. D. The installation of an approved substituted item shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of all responsibility for any changes in space requirements, construction details or methods, connections and alterations in related work made necessary by such substitutions. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FURNISHED BY THE OWNER Up to seven (7) sets of Landscape Plans and Specifications will be supplied to the Contractor by the Owner without charge. STANDARDS A. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title or a specified standard such as a Commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or other similar standard, shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof and any amendments of supplement thereto, in effect on the date of Invitation for Bids, except as limited to type, class or grade, or modified in such reference. B. The standard referred to, except as modified in the Specifications, shall have full force and effect as though printed in these Specifications. These standards are not furnished to bidders for the reason that the manufacturers and trades involved are assumed to be familiar with their requirements. The Landscape Architect will furnish upon request information as to how copies of the standards referred to may be obtained. 1.14 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS Where it is required in the Specifications that materials, products, processes, equipment, or the like to be installed or applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, directions, or specifications, or words to this effect, it shall be construed to mean that said application or installation shall be in strict accordance with printed instructions furnished by the manufacturer of the material concerned for use under conditions similar to those at the job site. 1.15 PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS AND EQUIPMENT Existing improvements and equipment shall be protected by the Contractor from damage, debris and exposure to weather resulting from the work. 1.16 PAYMENT FOR PLANT MATERIAL ON HAND A. No partial payment will be made on living or perishable plant materials until planted. 1.17 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE A. The Owner, his Engineers and Landscape Architects, the Town Council, the Town Manager, and the Town Engineer or his authorized assistants, or other Town employees shall not be answerable o� accountable in any manner for any loss or damage that may happen to the work or any pa�t thereof, or to any material or equipment used in performing the work, or for injury or damage to any person or persons, either workmen or Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9000 - 3 LANDSCAPE GENERAL CONDITIONS Vail, Colorado 04 Febn.�ary 2011 Construction 1.18 L3 C. � the public, or for damage to adjoining p�operty from any cause whatsoever during the progress of the work or at any time before final acceptance. Contractor's Responsibility for Work Except as provided above, until the formal acceptance of the work by the Town, the Contractor shall have the charge and care thereof and shall bear the risk of injury or damage to any part thereof by the section of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or from the non-execution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and make good all injuries or damages to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the above causes before final acceptance and shall bear the expense thereof. No personal Liability � Neither the Owner, his Engineer, the Town Council, Town Manager, Town Engineer, nor any other officer or authorized assistant or agent shall be personally responsible for any liability arising under the Contract. Responsibility of City The Town, the Council, the Town Manager and the Town Engineer shall not be held responsible for the care or protection of any material or parts of the work prior to final acceptance. PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY A. The Contractor shall so conduct operations as to cause the least possible obstruction and inconvenience to the public. The Contractor shall fu�nish, erect and maintain such fences, barriers, lights, and signs as are necessary to give adequate warning to the public at all times that the work is in progress and of any dangerous conditions to be encountered as a result of the work or of the presence of equipment or machinery. B. Dust control if necessary shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. This shall be accomplished by the Contractor whenever so directed by the Landscape Architect. The method of dust cont�ol utilized shall be approved by the Town of Vail in advance of use. 1.19 INSPECTIONS A. L:� Authority of the Landscape Architect The Landscape Architect or Town of Vail representative shall decide all questions which may arise as to the quality or acceptability of materials furnished and work performed, and as to the manner of performance and rate of progress of the work; all questions which arise as to the interpretation of the Plans and Specifications; all questions as to the acceptable fulfillment of the Contract on the part of the Contractor; and all questions as to claims and compensation. Plans All authorized alterations affecting the requirements and information given on the approved Plans shall be in writing. No changes shall be made of any plan or drawing after the same has been approved by the Landscape Architect, except by direction of the Landscape Architect. Working drawings or plans for any structu�e not inGuded in the plans furnished by the Owner shall be approved by the Landscape Architect before any work involving these Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9000 - 4 LANUSCAPE GENERAL CONDITIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � � � � I � � � � � �� . � �I L_� � � plans may be performed, unless approval be waived in writing by the Landscape Architect. It is mutually agreed, however, that approval by the Landscape Architect of the Contractor's working plans does not relieve the Contractor of any responsibiliry for accuracy of dimensions and details and that the Contractor shall be responsible for agreement and conformity of his working pians with the approved plans and specifications. C. Interpretations of Plans and Specifications Should it appear that the work to be done, or any matter relative thereto, is not su�ciently � detailed or explained in these Specifications, Plans and Details, the Contractor shall contact the Landscape Architect for such further explanations as may be necessary, and shall conform to such explanation or interpretation, so far as may be consistent with the original intent. � � � i � � Q E In the event of any discrepancy between any drawing and the figures written thereon, the figures shall be taken as correct. Superintendent Before initial work is begun, the Contractor and his Superintendent or Foreman shall file with the Landscape Architect addresses and telephone numbers where they can be reached during hours when the work is not in progress. 2. The Contractor or representative Superintendent or Foreman shall be on the work site during job progress who is competent to receive and carry out any instructions that may be given him by the Landscape Architect in English. 3. Whenever the Contractor is not present on any part of the work where it may be desired to give direction, orders will be given by the Landscape Architect in writing and shall be received and obeyed by the Superintendent or Foreman in charge of the particular work in reference to which orders are given. Lines and Grades � The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Engineer of his requirements for stakes or marks a reasonable length of time in advance of his need therefore. Stakes and marks set by the Owner's Engineer shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor. In case such stakes and marks are destroyed or damaged by reason of the Contractor's operations, the cost � of replacing or restoring them may be deducted from any moneys due or to become due the Contractor. � ' ' � � , All distances and measurements are given and will be made in a horizontal plane. All elevations shown on the Plans represent vertical distances in feet. Conformance to all dimensions and elevations shown on the plans will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Three consecutive points shown on the same rate of slope must be used in common in order to detect any variation from straight grade; and, should such discrepancy exist, it must be reported to the Engineer, or the Contractor shall be responsible for any error in the finished work. All grades are to be established with an accurate level. F. Inspections 1. The Landscape Architect, Town of Vail representatives, or authorized assistants shall at all times have access to the work during construction, and shall be fumished with every reasonable facility for ascertaining full knowledge respecting Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9000 - 5 LANDSCAPE GENERAI CONDITIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � 3 4 the progress, workmanship, and character of materials used and employed in the work. The inspection of the work shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations to fulfill the Contract as prescribed. Defective work shall be made good, and unsuitable materials may be rejected, notwithstanding the fact that such defective work and unsuitable mate�ials have been previously overlooked by the inspector. Inspection shall include laboratory tests of materials and all appurtenant work for the adequate control of the improvement. The Contractor shall acquaint himself with the inspection procedures and requirements of the Town of Vail relating to final acceptance of the work. Authority and Duties of Inspector Inspectors, employed by the Owner, shall be authorized to inspect all work done and all material furnished. Such inspection may extend to all or any part of the work and to the preparation, fabrication, or manufacture of the materials to be used. He is authorized to call the attention of the Contractor to any failure of the work or materials to conform to the Specifications and Contract. He shall have the authority to reject materials or suspend the work until any questions at issue can be referred to and decided by the Landscape Architect. The inspector shall in no case act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor, nor interfere with the management of the work by the latter. Any advice which the inspector may give the Contractor shall not be construed as binding to the Landscape Architect in any way, or releasing the Contractor from fulfilling all of the terms of the Contract. If the Contractor refuses to suspend operations on verbal order, the inspector shall issue a written order giving the reason for shutting down the work. After placing the order in the hands of the man in charge, the inspector shall immediately leave the job. Work done during the absence of the inspector will not be accepted. H. Removal of Defective Work All work which is defective in its construction or deficient in any of the requirements of these Specifications shall be remedied, or removed and replaced by the Contractor in an acceptable manner. Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply fo�thwith with any order of the Landscape Architect made under the provisions of this article, the Landscape Architect shall have authority to suspend all work until defective work is remedied, or removed and replaced, and unauthorized work is removed. Conformity with Plans and Allowable Deviation Finished su�faces in all cases shall conform with the lines, grades, cross sections, and dimensions shown on the approved plans. Deviations from the approved plans, as may be required by the exigencies of construction, will be determined in all cases by the Landscape Architect and authorized in writing. Coordination of Plans, Details and Specifications Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9000 - 6 LANDSCAPE GENERAL CONDITIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � �l � � � i � � � � � K. ' � L. � � ' ' M. � ' 1.20 � A. � r-, L�� , � � These Specifications, the Plan and Details, and all supplementary documents are essential parts of the Contract or Agreement and a requirement occurring in one is a binding as though occurring in all. They are intended to be cooperative, to describe, and to provide for a complete work. Specifications shall govern over Plans and Details and Technical Specifications shall govern over General Conditions and Plans. Assistance by Contractor The Contractor shall furnish the Landscape Architect and/or his assistants with any labor required and necessary for the thorough inspection or culling over or the removing of defective materials, or for thorough examination into any of the work, or for any other purpose required in the discharge of their respective duties. Cooperation of the Contractor The Contractor shall have available on the work site at all times, one copy of the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor shall give to the work the constant attention necessary to facilitate the progress thereof and he shall cooperate with the Landscape Architect and his Inspectors and with other Contractors in every way possible. The Landscape Architect shall allocate the work and designate the sequence of constn.iction in case of controversy between Contractors. The Contractor shall have a competent English-speaking superintendent on the work site at all times who is fully authorized as his agent, thoroughly understanding the Plans and Specifications and shall receive and fulfill instructions from the Landscape Architect, or his authorized representative. Final Inspection Whenever the work provided and contemplated by the Contractor shall have been satisfactorily completed and the final cleaning up is performed, upon written application by the Contractor, the Landscape Architect or Town of Vail representative will make the final inspection. PUBLIC UTILITIES The Contractor shall notify in writing, all public utility companies of the approximate time that the work set forth on these Specifications will start. Unless previously given, such notifications shall be made at the time of execution of the Agreement. B. In order to avoid the removal or disturbance of the proposed improvements, the Contractor shall cooperate with the utility companies and allow such companies sufficient time to construct, reconstruct or extend their facilities before subgrades or surfaces are constructed. C. Existing Water Service The work shall proceed so that minimum damage will be done to water services and in the event that such senrices are broken or damaged, the Contractor shall, immediately, at his expense, repair such damage in a manner satisfactory to the E�gineer in order that the water supply will not be interrupted for a period greater than one-half hour. If such interruption is sustained, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify the occupants of the premises to which said services are connected so that no damage will accrue on said premises. Whenever damage is done to water meters or to services between Upper Eaqle River Water and Sanitation District mains and said meters, the needed repairs and the cost thereof be borne by the Contractor. The Cont�actor shall notify Eaqle River Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9000 - 7 LANDSCAPE GENERAL CONOITIONS Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 ' � Construction U Water and Sanitation District at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of such time when its services will be required. Gas, Elect�ic and Telephone Services Caution shall be exercised in the prosecution of the work so that gas, electric and telephone services will not be damaged. The Contractor shall notify the Holy Cross Electric Company, and the Telephone Company at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of such time that excavation or other work is to be done along any section of the work, in order that said companies may do such work as is required to maintain uninterrupted service to all premises. PART 2 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 0 C. Reference Standards: For products or workmanship specified by association, trade or federal standards, comply with requirements of standards, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. No provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether of not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Landscape Architect or any of their consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in Contract Documents, or shall it be effective to assign to Landscape Architect or any consultants, agents or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct furnishing or performance of work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of General and Supplementary Conditions. Effective Date: Date of standard is that in effect as of documents date except when specific date is specified or when standa�d is part of applicable code which included edition date. Copies: When required by individual section, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy at job site during work. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION Lio�shead Transit Welcome Center 32 9000 - 8 Vail, Colorado � � �I �J LJ u � � �� J � � � LANDSCAPE GENERAL CONDITIONS 04 February 2011 Construction � i 1 L ' ' � � �� ' � u SECTION 32 9100 PLANTING PREPARATION PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK Landscape Contractor ("Contractor") is to furnish all labor, equipment, transpo�tation and materials to complete the landscape planting as shown on the L drawings and herein specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. B. C. Landscape General Conditions Topsoil, Mulch, and Seed Specification Irrigation 1.03 GRADING The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining finished grades in all planting areas, and for executing and fine grading necessary for surface drainage and uniformity, or incidental to all planting operations, per Section 1.05 below. Positive drainage shall be maintained away from all structures. 1.04 MATERIALS � A. Fe�tilizer: Commercial Fertilizer shall be Osmicote, or equal in pelleted form, and shall be complete, of which part of the elements are derived from organic sources containing in available form by weight: Nitrogen, Phosphoric Acid, and Potash. If ' commercial fertilizer having this analysis is not obtainable, other commercial fertilizer may be used providing it meets with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Ij �' ' � �u ' ' �� , B. Staking: All trees shall be staked with 2 to 3 green metal stakes per tree in accordance with the planting details. Stakes are green, 6' metal t-stake posts. Trees are to be guyed with #12 wire and fastened to the tree with green nylon tree straps. Aspen clumps are to have the main stem guyed. See Planting Detail Sheet. C. Plants: Plants shall be the variety, quantity and size indicated on the Plant Schedule. Quality and size shall conform to standards set forth in American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI 260.1) and or the ALCC Specifications Handbook. . Nursery-grown stock only shall be used, unless noted, and which are free from insect pests and diseases. Approved collected material is called out in the Plant Schedule. 2. All plants shall comply with Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant diseases and infestat+ons. Inspection certificates required by law shall accompany each shipme�t of plants, and ce�tificates shall be delivered to the Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall obtain clearance from the County Agricultural Commissioner, as required by law, before planting plants delivered from the outside the County in which they are to be planted. 3. All plants shall be true to type or name indicated, and shall be tagged in accordance with the standard practice recommended by the American Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9100 -1 PLANTING PREPARATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Co�struction Association of Nurserymen; however, determination of plant species or variety will be made by the Landscape Architect, and the decision shall be final. 4. Plants shall be healthy, shapely, and well rooted; and roots shall show no evidence of having been rootbound, restricted or deformed. Root condition of plants in containers will be determined by removal of soil from the roots of not less than two (2) plants, nor more than 2% of the total number of plants of each species or variety, except when container-grown plants are from a several sources, the roots of not less than two (2) plants of each species or variety from each source will be inspected by the Landscape Architect_ In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject the entire lot (s) of plants represented by the defective samples. All plants rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection shall be immediately disposed of off the site. 5. Each plant shall be handled and packed in the approved manner for that species or variety, and all necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the plants will arrive at the site of the work in proper condition for successful growth. Trucks used for transporting plants shall be equipped with covers to protect plants from windburn. � 7 Substitutions will not be permitted, except as follows: If proof is submitted to the Landscape Architect that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of nearest equivalent size or variety with an equitable adjustment of Contract Price. b. Such proof shall be substantiated and submitted in writing by the Contractor within thirty-five (35) days after the effective date of Notice to Proceed. CJ� �' �� LJ � a Trees shall have straight trunks with the leader intact, undamaged and uncut. All � old abrasions and cuts shall be completely calloused over. 8. All trees and shrubs shall be measured when their branches are in normal position. Height and spread dimensions indicated refer to the main body of the � plant, and not from branch or root tip to tip. Indicated sizes shall be before pruning. 9. Plants shall not be pruned prior to delivery, except upon approval of the Landscape Architect. 10. Contractor is to provide the name and location of the tree supplier for the Landscape Architects / Owners review and approval of trees rp ior to delivery to the project site. The Owner reserves the right to terminate the contract if the trees are not acceptable to the Landscape Architect and the Contractor is not able to produce acceptable trees. Plant materials shall also be subject to inspection and approval by the Landscape Architect upon delivery to the site. � � � 11. Aspen trees called out as clump form means that at least one of the individual � tree stems in the clump needs to be the size called out for on the Landscape Schedule. The other stems in the clump may be smaller than the dominant stem. 12. Spruce trees are to be Specimen Grade-A quality trees full in appearance with layered branches (not sheared to a solid Christmas Tree form), cone shape, with leader intact without bare spots. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9100 - 2 PLANTING PREPARATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �� ' � L_ � ' I .l LJ I� �� ' L__; ' � � � D. Muich: Locally available Shredded Pine Mulch is to be provided by the Town of Vail for use at shrub beds, conifer beds and tree and shrub basins. Shredded Pine shall be well composted with a minimum of sticks or debris. "Soil Pep" is to be used for all perennial and ground cover beds. Q F Wildflower Carpet: Perennial Wildflower Sod available from Stevens Home Care, Inc. Backfill: Planting backfill mix to consists of 80% native topsoil and 20°/a Canadian sphagnum peatmoss with fertilizer. Acceptable substitute for the sphagnum peatmoss is compost irom Eagle Valley Sewage in Edwards. 1.05 FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION A. Prior to any planting bed preparation or planting, finish grade all planting areas. Fill or cut as needed to remove surplus soil, and rake areas to a smooth, uniform grade as indicated on the Plans. Slope all planting areas to drain. Finished grades shall be approved by the Landscape Architect before any planting is done. B. All planting areas shall be thoroughly wet down and sprinkler coverage and operation confirmed. Allow soil to dry so as to be workable and cultivate if necessary to dry out. C. Spread 10 Ibs. of iron sulfate evenly per 1,000 square feet of planting areas if soil tests indicate iron deficiency. Incorporate iron sulfate into top 6 inches of soil in shrub areas immediately after approval of the Landscape Architect. Iron sulfate may be incorporated into soil with soil amendment. Do not allow i�on sulfate to stain pavement, wood or other surfaces on structures. � E F G Soil Amendment and Fe�tilizers: Spread evenly over all planting areas, including shrub and ground cover beds at the following rates: Soil amendment: For shrub and ground cover planting beds add 2" of sphagnum peatmoss and 2" of compost to be integrated with 12" topsoil with a rototiller. 2. Fertilizer: 251bs. per 1,000 square feet_ Incorporate into top 8 inches of soil. Sca�ify all planting areas that become compacted prior to planting to a minimum depth of 12". Rake all areas to remove rocks 1 inch or larger in size, sticks and debris. Drag to a smootfi, even surface. Grade to form all swales, pitch to catch basins, street curbs, etc., to insure proper surface drainage. Secure Landscape ArchitecYs approval before planting_ 1.06 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING A. Mark tree and any B8�6 shn.ib locations using 12" wood stakes with colored flagging and size of plant material indicated with black waterproof marker. Locations shall be approved a�d / or adjusted by the Landscape Architect before plant holes are dug. Container shrub, perennials and groundcovers to be placed according to the plan. Contractor shall include in the base bid the assumption that the La�dscape Architect will review and adjust plant placement prior to planting. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9100 - 3 PLANTING PREPARATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. Dig pits circular in outline with ve�tical sides as follows: 1. One-gallon containers: 18-inch diameter. 2. Shrub containers: Two times the diameter of the container 3. Larger size materials: Two to three times the diameter of the container/ball per details C. After pits are dug, break sides to open wall of pit for root penetration. D. Backfill plant holes with backfill mix as specified, free from rocks, clods, or lumpy material. Backfill about 1/3 of the hole with mix; place plant and water before adding remainder of backfill. E. Set plants in backfill to such depth that the top of the plant ball will be 3 inches above finished grade. Remove all twine, rope and burlap from top and sides of rootball and top 2/3 of wire basket from root ball. Backfill rest of hole and soak tho�oughly. F. Water backfill until saturated to the full depth of the hole. Hole shall drain completely within 1 /2 hour. G H. Build 3-4" tall watering basins around trees and shrubs and water to drain through root ball. Fertilize each tree and shrub immediately after planting, as follows: 1. One-gallon-can plant: 1/4 pint. 2. Five-gallon-can plant: 1/2 pint. 3. Fifteen-gallon-can and larger: 1/2 pint. Spread fertilizer evenly over surface of plant basin, and till into ground surface. Water immediately. I. Permeable weed barrier fabric is to be installed under mulch within tree and shn.ib beds in non-planted (groundcover or perennials) areas. J. Spread minimum 3" of mulch around tree and shrub basins and in shrub beds, such that all weed barrier fabric is concealed. 1.07 PLANTING GROUND COVERS AND PERENNIALS After soil preparation has been done (as indicated in Section 1.05 above): A. Apply general fertilizer per manufacturer's instructions to insure good plant growth. Amount and type to be approved by the Landscape Architect. B. Plant ground cover and perennial plants in evenly spaced rows with staggered spacing at equal intervals (see planting details). Water immediately after planting and in sufficient quantity to wet the soil around the plants to a depth of 8 inches. C. Add 2" minimum depth of "Soil Pep" mulch to the perennial and ground cover beds, with no weed barrier fabric. D. After the plants have been thoroughly watered, allow the soil to adequately dry to provide a workable surface. Rake the area to provide a uniform even surface. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9100 - 4 PLANTING PREPARATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � ' � � C� ' �� ' � ' 1.08 WATERING All plant materials shall be watered immediately after planting. After the first watering, water shall be applied to all plants as often and in sufficient amount as conditions may require to keep the plants in a healthy and vigorous growing condition until completion of the Contract and Acceptance. 1.09 MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING A. From the time plants are planted until final acceptance of landscape installation, plants and lawns shall be watered, fe�tilized, and trash and debris shall be kept removed; weeds shall be controlled, and �eplacements shall be made; all as specified and full compensation for such work will be considered as included in the Contract Price. B. All plant materials must be healthy and full in appearance or be subject to rejection by the Landscape Architect and / or the Owner. Rejection of plant materials not in acceptable condition or appearance can occur at any time up to Final Acceptance. Plant materials rejected are to be immediately removed from the site and replaced with the same plant material specified on the plans. 1.10 CLEAN-UP A. = Remove all trash, rubbish, construction and planting materials, scraps, etc., from the site. Leave area in a neat, sightly condition. During construction, and on a daily basis remove any rocks and debris and remove all empty plant containers. 1.11 PRE-MAINTENANCE PERIOD INSPECTION AND APPROVAL OF PLANTING ' Prior to commencement of the Planting Maintenance Period, the Contractor shall receive approval of the installed planting. The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect a minimum � of seven (7) days prior to the requested inspection. Before the inspection, the following conditions shall exist: , ' � � ' ' � � A. B. C. D. E. F. G All construction work shall be completed. All planted areas shall be neat and clean. All plants shall be instaHed and must be healthy. Trees and tree stakes shall be straight. Water basins are built and are intact. Alt flagging and plant tags removed from plant materials. All plant materials must be full and healthy in appearance. H. Preliminary and Final Inspection of the Irrigation System which includes providing the as- built reproducible Irrigation Plan priOf to final review of the irrigation system. See Irrigation Section. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9100 - 5 PLANTING PREPARATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 1.12 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT A. Guarantee all plant materials for one year from the date of Finai Acceptance stated on the Certificate of Final Completion. B. Replace all dead plants not in a vigorous condition immediately as di�ected by the Landscape Architect. Plants used for replacement must be of the same kind and size as indicated on the drawings, and planted as outlined above. All replacement of plants shall be at the expense of the Contractor. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9100 - 6 PLANTING PREPARATION Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � SECTION 32 9113 TOPSOIL PART1GENERAL 1) SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and spread topsoil on prepared areas. B. Strip topsoil from on-site locations and place in stockpile. C. Spread stockpiled topsoil on prepared areas. 2) RELATED WORK A. Section 32 9200: Turf Sod B. Section 32 9201: Seeding C. Section 32 9100: Planting Preparation 3) REFERENCES A. AASHTO T 88: Particle Size Analysis of Soils. B. AASHTO T 194: Determination of Organic Matter in Soils by Wet Combustion. 4) SUBMITTALS a) For Contractor-furnished topsoil: A minimum of 20 working days before delivery of soil, submit to the Landscape Architect the laboratory test results from each topsoil source to be used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1) CONTRACTOR FURNISHED TOPSOIL A. Meet the following: i) PH: 6.0 to 7.0 ii) EC: (Electrical Conductivity): less than 0.4 ds/cm iii) SAR: (Sodium Adsorption Ratio): less than 10. B. Organic matter: 1. 1 to 20 percent. 2. Determined by the release upon combustion, Walkley-Black or modified Walkley- Black testing method. AASHTO T 194. C. Textural classification: 1. Topsoil to be a loamy sand, sandy loam, clay loam, loam, silt loam or sandy clay loam not exceeding the following percentiles. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center , Vail, Colorado Soil Percentile component Range Sand 20 to 70 Silt 20 to 70 Clay 10 to 30 329113-1 TOPSOIL 04 February 2011 Construction 2) 2. Determine particle size analysis by the hydromete� testing method. D. Topsoil to be free of: 1. Subsoils (no B or C horizon soils) 2. Coarse sand and gravel or rock larger than 3 inches in any dimension 3. Sticks, roots 4. Stiff clay, hard clods or hard pan soils 5. Trash, litter or refuse 6. Weeds and weed seeds. E. Topsoil may contain a maximum of 5 percent rock smaller than 3 inches. F. Amendments: Based on the soil test and ph, fertilizer, lime or iron sulfate may need to be applied to balance soil based on soil test recommendations. Soil amendments and compost is to be added at a rate of 3-5 yards per 1000 s.f. A balance of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash and sulfur is recommended to establish a healthy root system. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL - CONTRACTOR FURNISHED MATERIAL A. Obtaining Soil Samples: 1. Obtain samples from a thin slice of soil cut from the side of a freshly dug hole or by using a soil auger or sampling tube. 2. Mix the several small samples taken from various places around the source together to produce a composite sample. 3. More than one composite sample may be required if the topsoil horizon changes significantly across the source. 4. Store samples in a clean container at room temperature and out of direct sunlight. 5. Label the location and date on each sample container. 6. Provide additional soil samples for verification at request of Landscape Architect. B. Soil Testing: Submits soil samples to an approved independent soil testing laboratory capable of performing the tests listed in this Section, article, "Contractor Furnished Topsoil." A partial list of acceptable testing laboratories includes: CSU Extension Soil, Water & Plant Testing Lab Campus Delivery 1120 NESB Room A319 Fort Collins CO 80523-1120 Phone: (970) 491-5061 PART 3EXECUTION 1) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. �� Brigham Young University Soil and Plant Analysis Laboratory 255 WIDB Provo, UT 84602 (801) 378-2760 Complete final grading, trench settling and surface preparation before placing topsoil. On steep cut slopes steeper than 1:2 and higher than 15 feet that require the placement of topsoil, place and spread topsoil as the slope is being constructed. Finish according to this Section 3.3 "Spread Stockpiled and Contractor-Fumished Topsoil". C. On the remaining topsoiled areas not covered under this a�ticle, line B, Contractor is responsible for providing a suitable topsoil surface just before seeding. Suitable topsoil surface is: Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9113 - 2 TOPSOI� Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � �i � � � LJ l_.J � � �� LJ �J r ' ' , , ' 3.2 ' , �� E. 1. Non-compacted surface finished according to this Section, a�ticle, "Spread Stockpiled and Contractor-Furnished Topsoil," paragraphs C and D. 2. Weed free. 3. Finish grade provides a uniform surface with smooth transitions between grade changes and disturbed areas. Do not strip or handle wet topsoil. Establish finish grade at 1 inch below the top of all walks, curbs, mow strips and other hard surfaces for areas receiving grass seed or turf sod. STRIP AND STOCKPILE TOPSOIL A. Q Strip the topsoil 1. Only from areas identified on the plans or approved by the L.A. 7. To a depth identified on the plans or approved by the L.A. Remove and dispose of any roots larger than 2 inches in diameter or 12 inches in length. ' C. Stockpile stripped topsoil: 1. At locations acceptable to the Landscape Architect. 2. So that placement or activity around the stockpile does not damage or impact any existing trees, shrubs or environmentally sensitive areas. , 3. Grade to minimize erosion on and around the stockpiles. Provide soil erosion control measures if topsoil will be unused for greater than 4 weeks. ' 3.3 ' ' � iI�I � il � ' , ' SPREAD STOCKPILED AND/OR CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED TOPSOlL A. [Q C � Once grading is completed, loosen all compacted soil by rototilling to a depth of 4" incorporating 3-5 yards per 1000 s.f. compost or soil amendments, mixing thoroughly into the soil. Clear area to receive topsoil of all trash, debris, weeds, and rock 3 inches or larger, and dispose of objectionable material in an approved manner. Place and spread the stockpiled topsoil over the prepared slopes to the plan depths. On slopes 1:3 and flatter, place and evenly spread topsoil along the contour, or cat-track the slopes to create continuous cleat tracks that n.in parallel with the contours. On slopes steeper than 1:3, cat-track the slopes to create continuous cleat tracks that run parallel with the contours. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 9113 - 3 TOPSOIL ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction O � �I �' u � O � � � � L_ J LJ �J ' u � i� �� I I , � ' SECTION 32 96 43 TREE TRANSPLANTING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK Landscape Contractor ("Contracto�") is to furnish all labor, equipment, transportation and materials to prepare and relocate designated existing trees from the east side of the project site to the west side of the project site. 1.02 WORK TO BE PERFORMED AND WORK INCLUDED I' A. Provide the following: 1. Prepare and relocate trees designated for relocation, to include all aspects of preparation, relocation, protection, and maintenance. 2. Install and operate temporary irrigation system or hand watering as required by these specifications. 3. Follow-up maintenance as required by these specifications. 4. Labor, materials, equipment and services to complete all preparation, relocations and protection work as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein, or both. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Contractor shall coordinate with all contractors and trades on the project site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following with the proposal: I ' B � ' , 1. Verification of qualifications. The Contractor shall provide a list of Colorado mountain refe�ences and project list of a minimum of five (5) projects that the Contractor has successfully completed that are similar in scope and nature. Project list should include mortality rates. 2. List of all equipment to be utilized during tree preparation and transplanting, including a 120" spade. 3. Proposed sequence of events from start to finish, in writing. This shall include a schedule by day as to how many units can be dug and relocated to specified areas. 4. �iterature and proposed application rates for specified wetting agents, fertilizers and soil conditioners. 5. Documentation of all required licenses and memberships. Submit the following if awarded the contract: 1. Soils report from existing trees location including organic and inorganic materials and compaction rates for a depth of at least 4'. Report shall contain recommendations for supplemental soil amendments to enhance tree survivability. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 96 43 -1 TREE TRANSPLANTING ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2. Schedule for anticipated relocation of trees, coordinated with the Town of Vail and other contractors and trades involved in the project to ensure adequate access to the site and existing conditions requirements are met. 1.05 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Comply with the following standards and specifications for all materials, methods, and workmanship unless otherwise noted: Codes and Standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Codes and Standards of the International Society of Arboriculturists. 1.06 LICENSING AND INSURANCE A. C'-' The Cont�actor shall have a certified arborist on staff or as a consultant present at tree preparation, digging, and relocation phases of the project. Arborist shall certify that all preparation and transplanting are conducted within industry standard guidelines using best practices. The Contractor shall hold all applicable certifications required by the State of Colorado to perform the work. C. The Contractor shall maintain insurance as required in the contract provisions. 1.07 PERMITS A. The contractor shall coordinate a travel route with the Town of Vail. The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any lane closure permits for the transplant route if necessary for successful completion of the work described below. The Contractor shall provide traffic control as necessary at major intersections to maintain access between sites based on input from the Town of Vail. L _I ' � � � � � CJ � � B. The Contractor shall obtain Town of Vail permits as necessary to perform the land disturbance � work including but not limited to erosion control measures. 1.08 DESCRIPTION I� L:� C. Trees to be relocated are designated on the L drawings and as directed by the Town of Vail. The contractor, Town representative, and Landscape Architect shall select the location/siting of the transplanted trees at the project site. Existing trees to be relocated shall be crown pruned, root pruned, and treated with soil amendments prior to relocation by Contractor, if weather atlows. Tree pits resulting from relocated trees do not need to be backfilled with clean, stable fill and brought flush with surrounding grade and mulched since they a�e in the future construction area. D. The Contractor shall call for and attend an inspection of existing conditions by the City prior to commencing work, including but not limited to identification of trees, and potential obstructions to the relocation work. The Town of Vail staff shall prepare a report of existing conditions as a matter of record, to include photographs. The Contractor will accept the existing conditions as a reference point for condition of trees, and condition of the site. Existing conditions will then become the responsibility of the Contractor to keep intact. E. The Contractor shall review and inspect the project site to determine if existing conditions meet tree relocation requirements prior to the relocation of trees. Lionshead T�ansit Welcome Center 32 96 43 - 2 TREE TRANSPLANTING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � u u � � n �� ' ' ' ' ' � , ' ' ' ' ' ' , 1.09 GUARANTEES A. The Contractor shall guarantee work in the following way: 1. Any tree that dies or is deemed in unacceptable condition for one year following final project acceptance shall be removed by the Contractor, including root ball, and backfilling of pit, at no cost to the Owner. 2. The Contractor shall provide a comparable specimen at no additional cost to the Town. 3. The guarantee shall be enforced if it is deemed by the Town and/or the Landscape Architect that tree mortality or decline is a product of improper handling or maintenance by the Contractor. 4. The Contractor shall maintain automatic temporary irrigation in operating order or provide as needed hand irrigation for all relocated trees within the project area until permanent irrigation system is operable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Soil amendments shall be injected into the soil by means of a spray apparatus utilizing mechanical agitation to keep powdered amendments suspended, where appropriate. B. Root pruning equipment shall be designed for this task, and shall produce clean cuts of roots without damage to the resulting root ball. C. Relocation equipment shall be capable of lifting and transpo�ting trees without damage, using a minimum of 120" tree spade. 2.2 SOIL A. 2.3 A. 2.4 Soil to be placed around transplanted trees shall be amended as necessary based upon the recommendations of the soils report. WATER Water shall be clean and potable, from municipal Town of Vail source, or from on site wells, or water truck. MULCH ' A. Mulch shall be installed as specified in Section 32 9100 Planting Preparation. PART 3 EXECUTION I' 3.1 PREPARATION FOR RELOCATION OF TREES TO THE PROJECT AREA — Three to six months in advance of relocation. � il � ' A. PRUNING — Seasonally permitting 1. All tree canopies shall be class three pruned in accordance with NAA and ISA standards. The City shall be notified 48 hours in advance of all pruning activities to allow fo� observation. 2. Structural pruning shall be performed in advance by the arborist to establish desired branch height and crown dimensions. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 96 43 - 3 TREE TRANSPLANTING ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 3 C FERTILIZATION AND WATERING 1. Preparation - Clear the rootball area of all foreign material, trash, etc., to expose undisturbed soil. 2. Application J Schedule a. All Trees to be relocated shall be treated with the root stimulant prior to the time of root pruning. The specified root stimulant shall be applied at the concentration and application rates recommended by the manufacturer. b. All Trees to be relocated shall be deep injection fertilized. Amendments shall be used and applied at the concentration and application rates recommended by the manufacturer based upon the soils report. . c. All Trees to be relocated shall be treated with endo and ectomycorrhizal transplant inoculant at the time of root pruning. The specified t�ansplant inoculant shall be applied at the concentration and application rates recommended by the manufacturer. d. Root zone shall be mulched for entire canopy area with mulch held back 6" from trunk flare. ROOT PRUNING 1. Watering - Moisture of each root ball shall be monitored and adjusted as necessary until the transplanting has been completed. 2. Root Pruning Technique a. All trees shall be root pruned to a depth of twenty-four inches using sharp hand tools. Hand cut tree roots after trenching to produce clean cuts with no splits or tears. The root prune trench shall be completely backfilled with native soils and watered thoroughly to remove air pockets. b. Trees to be root pruned shall have a minimum root ball size of 10" per 1" of caliper measured at DBH for broad leaf trees. Root balls are to be formed round, all trenches being equal distance from the trunk. 3. Timing -All trees to be relocated shall be maintained for a minimum of twelve (12) weeks after root pruning prior to relocation, or alternative schedule approved by the Town of Vail. 3.2 RELOCATION OF TREES A. 3 Preparation 1. Trees shall be thoroughly soaked to the full depth of the root ball daily for seven consecutive days prior to relocation. 2. Ascertain that all proposed paths for machinery are clear of utilities and other obstructions. Excavation of Tree Pits 1. Tree root balls shall be excavated to a depth of three feet. 2. If the tree cannot be directly spaded into its new location, tree root balls shall be wrapped tightly in 7oz. burlap using nursery pinning nails to cinch burlap tightly. 3. The outside of each root ball shall be wrapped tightly with 36 inch medium gauge field fence. The fence shall be crimped in all areas, pulling the wire tight against the outside layer of burlap. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 96 43 - 4 TREE TRANSPLANTING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � C� J � u O � � � � � � � II LJ � n �� ' ' , , C � , , ' ' ' ' ' D , ' ' E. F. � G. ' , 4. Tree root balls shall be watered thoroughly a minimum of one time every twenry four hours after wrapping process is completed. Burlap shall not be allowed to dry out for extended periods of time. 5. Sides of root ball shall be wrapped with shrink wrap plastic to help slow evaporations. The plastic shall be removed every third watering. Soak burlap completely before re-wrapping. Digging and Handling 1. Notify Town of Vail staff 48 hours in advance of relocation to allow for observation of procedures. 2. Cont�actor shall review the site conditions to review receiving placement conditions meet the requirements of the move. Contractor shall coordinate the transplanting of the trees with other contractors and trades on site through owner's representative. 3. Determine line of previous root pruning and excavate around root mass to leave area 12" out from line of root pruning undisturbed. Digging shall be accomplished so as to produce clean cuts on all roots without tearing or splitting. Trenching shall be a minimum of 36" deep. 4. Trees shall be handled in such a way as to avoid damage to bark and limbs. 6. Trees shall be properly wrapped during moving so trunks will not be scarred and damaged and to avoid broken limbs. Broken limbs or scarred trunks shall cause tree to be unacceptable and rejected at the City's option. Broken limbs and wounds which do not, in the City's judgment, cause the tree to be rejected shall be cleanly cut. 7. Transport plant material on vehicles of adequate size to prevent overcrowding, broken limbs, foliage damage or root ball damage. 8. Root balls and foliage shall be kept moist during all phases of relocation. 9. Rotate tree prior to setting to achieve best positioning relative to adjacent trees and viewing angles. Backfilling 1. Trees shall be set at 6" above finished grade and backfilled with approved soil mix and watered until all air pockets are completely sealed. Any plastic wrap shall be removed from the root ball prior to back fill and top 6 inches of fencing shall be cut and removed. 2. Install mulch layer as a temporary measure around tree root balls to a depth of three inches. Maintain 6° clear from trunk root flare. 3. Each tree root ball shall be injected with mycorrhazae to encourage root development. Bracing - Shall not be necessary unless recommended by the contractor. Irrigation - Contractor shall monitor soil moisture in root balls and hand water as necessary until the permanent irrigation system is operational. Completion and Acceptance - Contractor shall monitor the health of the trees and shall provide the owner and/or owner's representative care and maintenance recommendations, in writing, for a period of finro years after the tree transplanting is complete. 3.3 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 96 43 - 5 TREE TRANSPLANTING ' Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction A. The successful vendor must show proof of general liability insurance and a standard worker's compensation policy at the time of award of contract. The amount of liability insurance required under this contract is $500,000. If any authorized subcontractor is used, the primary vendor must show the subcontractor as additionally insured. B. The contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance in the amounts and types shown below for the protection f�om claims caused by the contractor's personnel o� work, o� by any subcontractor performing work for the contractor. lnsurance shall not be for amounts less than those required by law. C C E F � Worker's Compensation: The contractor shall require each subcontractor to supply a certificate showing issuance of workmen's compensation coverage. Comprehensive General Liability - Coverage shall be written on an occurrence basis. Town of Vail to be additional insured on General and Pollution Liability. Coverage shall provide against the following risks: a. Board Form Property Damage b. Independent Contractors c. XCU Hazards (explosion, collapse, and underground damage) d. Contractual Liability (arising from indemnity agreement in contract e. Completed Operations f. Premises & Operations g. Pollution -$ 500,000 Per Occurrence, $1,000,000 Aggregate Comprehensive General Liability coverage shall be combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage and shall be written for the following limits: $500,000 - General Aggregate Limit $500,000 - Products — Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $500,000 - Personal and Advertising Injury Limit $500,000 - Each Occurrence Limit $500,000 - Fire Damage Limit $ 5,000 -Medical Expense Limit (Any one person) Commercial catastrophe (Umbrella) Liability shall be written for the following limits: $500,000 - Each occurrence for Bodily Injury and Prope�ty Damage $500,000 - Annual Aggregate OCP - Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability shall be written for the following limits: $500,000 - Each occurrence for Bodily Injury and Property Damage $500,000 - Annual Aggregate Comprehensive Automobile Liability shall be written for all owned vehicles, non-ownership liability and hired vehicles and shall be written for the following limits: $500,000 END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 32 96 43 - 6 TREE TRANSPLANTING Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � LJ ' ' � � � � � � � LJ u � � � � ' SECTION 33 1100 WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, valves, fittings, fire hydrants, vaults, service lines, curb stops, valve boxes, pressure reducing valves, meters, and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Flexible Pavement: Section 32 1200 C. Definition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation; All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 Ibs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for water lines as adopted by Eagle River Water and Sanitabon District. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for: 1. Valves and Valve Boxes 2. Fittings 3. Fire Hydrants 4. Vaults 5. Service Lines 6. Meters B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. D. Certificates: Submit copies of acceptance from Health Department prior to placing water system in service. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 331100 -1 Water Distribution Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F and there is frost in subgrade. W hen concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing_ PART 2 PRODUCTS — All materials shall conform to the local water district's specifications. 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS All ductile iron pipe and fittings used shall meet the latest AWWA Specifications. A. Pipe Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, working pressure 350 psi, minimum thickness class 52, with cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. Pipe joints, push-on type utilizing rubber ring gasket, AWWA C111. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Couplings: AWWA C900, working pressure 200 psi, with push-on joints ASTM D1869. six inch (6"), eight inch (8") and twelve inch (12") PVC water lines shall be Class 200 dimension ratio 14 (DR 14). PVC pipe may be used only in corrosive areas and in the Edwards Metropolitan District provided the static water pressure does not exceed 170 psi. Installation of PVC pipe in corrosive areas must have prior written authorizations from the District. 3 4. Steel Pipe: All steel pipe and fittings shall be fabricated in accordance with AWWA C200 Standard for Steel Water Pipe-eight inches (8") and larger-and AWWA M-11 Steel Pipe Manual. Working pressure shall be 350 psi. All material used shall be acceptable under ASTM A283 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates of Structural Quality or ASTM A36 Standard Specifications for Structural Steel. For mill-type pipe, all material used shall be acceptable under ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. All fittings shall be fabricated from tested pipe and dye checked in accordance with AWWA C208. All steel pipe and fittings shall be prepared, primed, lined, coated, painted or wrapped as hereinafter specified: a. E�erior Surfaces — Tape coafing system conforming to AWWA C209 and C214. b. Interior Surfaces — Cement-mortar lining conforming to AWWA C205. HDPE Pipe: With authorization from the engineer and approval by the District, this pipe may be used as an alternative in those applications where "hot soils" are determined to be found. 5. Fittings: Fittings shall be made of ductile iron and in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C153, pressure rating 350 psi. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C111. Bolts and nuts shall be low-alloy steel. All fittings shall be cement-mortar lined, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating shall be a minimum of one-mil (1) thick. Lionshead Transit Welcome Ce�ter 33 1100 - 2 Water Distribution Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � � � � � � � � � � a u ' , , ' 6. Joint Restraint Devices: Joint restraint devices shall be made of ductile iron. Twist-off nuts, sized the same as the tee-head bolts, shall be used to ensure proper actuating of �estraining devices. Joint restraint devices shall be EBAA Iron, Inc., Megalug Series ' 1100 or 1700 or Uni-Flange Corp. Series 1400 for new pipe restraint and EBAA Iron Sales, Megalug Series 1100SD or 1100HD or Uni-Flange UFR1300-C or UFR1390-C for existing pipe restraint or accepted equal. CI � ' 1 7. Solid Sleeves: Solid sleeves shall be made of ductile iron, mechanical joint, long body. Sleeves shall have a minimum pressure rating of 350 psi. Where a solid sleeve is used to join finro pieces of pipe of the same diameter, a"wedding band" is to be inserted between the two pipes inside of the solid sleeve. 8. Tapping Sleeves: Wet taps shall only be made with the use of a tapping sleeve. The District will allow epoxy-coated Smith Blair 620, Mueller H304, JCM 412 or equivalent. No tapping sleeves will be allowed for any application with a working pressure of 150 psi or higher. For those applications where working pressure exceeds 150 psi, the District will require the use of a tee. B. Fittings Fittings shall be ductile iron and in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C153, ' pressure rating 350 psi. Mechanical joints shall conform to AW WA Ci i 1. Bolts and nuts shall be low-alloy steel. All fittings cement-mortar lined, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coafing one mil thick. ' � 2.02 VALVES The valves shall be the same size as the main. A. Gate Valves ' Gate valves shall be Mueller A-2360, Waterous AFC-2500 or AVK Series 25 with an epoxy- coated interior and exterior cast iron or ductile iron body, pressure rating 250 psi, bronze- mounted, AWWA C509. Resilient seat (wedge) rubber encapsulated gate, flanged or mechanical joint as required. Valves with ring stem seal, two-inch (2") square operating nut, ' open left must be used. Resilient wedge gate valves on all pipe sizes up to and including 12 inches are required. , ' ' ' � ' � Direction of Opening: All valves are to open left. Specifications: Gate valves in sizes through twenty-four inches (24") shall be of the iron body, non-rising bronze stem, resilient seated wedge type manufactured to equal or exceed ANSUAWWA Standard C509-80 and the spec'rfic requirements outlined in these Special Provisions. Valves shall have a bottle-tight working water pressure of 250 psi with zero leakage and be capable of flow in either direction. End connections shall be mechanical joint and shall be furnished with all necessary joint materials. Valve openings shall be furnished and installed with valve stacks and covers in accordance with locate water district spec'rficaUons. Valve body, bonnet, stuffing box and disc cast shall be manufactured of either gray or ductile iron. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 331100 - 3 Water Distribution Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � C. ,il� � F The e�erior of the valve shal I have epoxy coa6ng per AW WA standards, applied to the ferrous parts of the valve, except for finished or seating surfaces. All internal ferrous metal surfaces shall be coated with a two-partthermosetting epoxycoating. The coating shall be non-to�ac, impart no taste to water, protect all seating and adjacent surfaces from corrosion and prevent build-up of scale or tuberculation. The valve shall be structurally designed so that if excessive torque is applied to the stem in the closing direction, with the disc seated, failure of the pressure retaining parts does not occur. Stem fai�ure under such conditions shall occur externally at such a point as to enable the stem to be safely turned in the opening direct by use of a pipe wrench. Valve Boxes Valve boxes shall be Tyler 668-S, D&L M-9042 (with a M-9073 extension), or East Jordan 8550 (with a 8560 extension). All buried valves shall be p�ovided with a six-inch (6") cast iron, valve box, screw type. The valve box shall be of a design which will not transmit shock or stress to the valve and which shall have enough extension capability to be raised to final street grade. The valve box shall be cast iron, adjustable screw type, with minimum five-inch (5�) diameter shaft provided with cover, marked "Water". Pressure Reducing Valves All pressure reducing valves shall be CLA-VAL 92G-01 ABXCKDS as appropriate and determined by the Engineer. In addition, the PRV is to have the following features: 1. Pressure reducing pilotry with pressure control ranges for correct valve operation where installed. Pilot material shall be bronze body only, brass and stainless-steel trim. Tubing shall be copper. 2. Epoxy coated interior and exterior suitable for potable water contact. 3. Dura-clean stem design shall be installed. 4. Valve opening shall be regulated by means of a"speed control valve" for flow control. 5. Ductile iron, globe body, minimum 150-pound ANSI flanges or as may be required by system pressures, bronze trim. 6. Pilotry flow-clean strainer and minimum of three (3) pilot cocks. Pressure Reducing Valves-Bypass Line The PRV shall be CLA-VAL 90-01 valve, sized appropriately to allow low flow to bypass around the main PRV. The valve shall have a ductile iron globe body with screwed ends. Pilotry is to be equipped with a flow wye strainer and isolation cocks. Air ReleaseNacuum Valves Shall be an APCO air vacuum combination valve sized by the engineer as manufactured by Valve and Primer Corporation or an equivalent vatve that has been approved by the local water district. The valve shall have a cast iron body, cover and baffle with a stainless-steel float. The seat shall be fastened into the valve cover, without distortion and shall be easily removed, if necessary. Air release/vacuum valves shall be installed at all high points in the system on any main line extensions. Check Valves Golden-Anderson Silent Check Valve (Figure 280). Bronze mounted, AWWA C508. High strength cast iron gate with bronze gate ring. Bronze, back-faced seat ring. Solid bronze Y- shaped hinge. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 331100 - 4 Water Distribution Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � LJ � � � � �J � J � � LJ � � ' ' � � � ' � � � � � � � ' 2.03 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Fire hydrants shall be Mueller Centurion A423 Mountain Hydrant, which conform to AWWA Standard C502 with a working pressure of 250 psi. They also shall be six-inch (6") mechanical joint inlet, minimum 5�/a inches, compression-type main valve that ctoses with pressure, two 2Y2 hose nozzles, one 4Yrinch pump nozzle, nozzle threads ANSI B26. Nozzles must be easily replaceable in the field with standard tools. Operating and cap nuts must be 1�/rinch, Number 17 National Standard hex main valve which open to the LEFT. An arrow cast on top of hydrant shall indicate direction opening. These shall be a breakable section that permits clean break at or near ground level, preventing water loss in case of breakage. Working parts must be removable for maintenance or repair without excavation. Also required are operating mechani�m non-wetting, oil reservoir lubricated, with O-ring seals and barrel drain bronze mounted with at least two (2) outlets, which operate automatically with main valve. Fire hydrants must be installed at the end of all main lines. Finish grade of the fire hydrant shall be twelve inches (12") below the flange for final grade and paving inspection. L:� C � Fire Hydrant Extensions New Installations: All new installations shall be installed at the standard 7-foot to 9-1 /2 foot of cove� measured from the top of the pipe to finish grade. All fire hydrants shall consist of a single solid shaft. No fire hydrant extensions will be allowed. Any special circumstance will require written approval from the local water district prior to installation. E�asting Fire Hydrants: No more than one (1), two-foot (2') long, fire hydrant grade extension (extension section) shall be used or installed on fire hydrant assemblies. All hydrants shall be installed with a guard valve to isolate the hydrant for repair while maintaining service to main. No service line taps will be allowed between the guard valve and hydrant. Guard valves shall be installed on the tee off of the water main. The mabmum distance from the guard valve to the fire hydrant shall not exceed fiftyfeet (50') Fire hydrants shall be installed at the end of all dead-end mains. Fire Hydrant Marker Flags Install fire hydrant marker flags for all newly constructed fire hydrants. The required flat is a Nordic Flex Flag, FF2-72 inches. Fire Hydrant Depth of Bury Fire hydrant dept of bury will conform to Manufacturer's requirements. I' 2.04 SERVICE LINES A. � � ' � Copper Tubing Type "K", ASTM 688. Connections to be compression or silver soldered. Corporation Stops Mueller 300 Ball Valve No. B-25008 or 625028, AWWA C800. All brass construction with compression connection. McDonald No. 4701 BT or 4704 BT, AWWA C800. Ford cc%omp FB-1000-G Ford IPS/comp FB-1100-G Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 1100 - 5 Water Distribution , Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction C. Curb Stops Mueller 300 Ball Curve Valve No. 25209, Ford B44 with compression connections, AWWA C- 800. McDonald Ball Curb Valve - 6100 T, AWWA C800. D. Curb Boxes For curb stops up to 1": Mueller H 10314 with 89982 lid or McDonald 5601 with 5601 L lid. For curb stops larger than 1": Mueller H10314 with 89982 lid and Tyler 6500 Series Enlarged Base #144809 or McDonald 5603 with 5601 L lid. Shaft diameter shall be 1" and the top of the shaft shall be a minimum of 18" from final grade and lid. E. Saddles Ductile Iron Saddle: Mueller DE2A, JCM-402, Smith & Blair 313, Ford F202, McDonald 3825, 3826 or equal and approved by the District. The saddle must have a double flat strap design with ductile iron body. Said saddle must conform to AWWA C800. 2.05 METERS Rockwell SR Compound Meter A. All services are required to have a positive displacement Rockwell meter with ECR touch- read pad. Conformance per AWWA C702 Standard for Cold Water Meters - Compound Type. 1. SR 2. SR2 3. Compound 4. Meter type will be determined by the District. B. Installation must be in freeze-proof, accessible area. C. A telephone jack must be installed within five feet (5') of the meter to provide for future automated meter reading. D. Installation will be near floor level in a horizontal position. Isolation valves shall be located before the PRV and after the meter (i.e. valve, PRV, meter, valve). E. Customer shall install wire from meter location to touch-read pad prior to meter installation. F. Touch-read pad will be located on street side of building, five feet (5') above the ground in an accessible location free from snow. G. Master Meter Vaults: All master meter vaults will be required to have a six inch (6") Rockwell turbine meter with a two inch (2") positive displacement low flow meter. The Contractor will be required to submit a piping schematic to the District and Engineer prior to any installation. Refer to Details for additional information. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 331100 - 6 Water Distribution Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � �_J � � � 2.06 BEDDING Two types of bedding material are allowed: Screened rock and soil or select imported material, meeting the following gradation specification table: Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight Screened Rock Soil or Select Import 1'/z inch maximum, and 100 100 ma�amum of 10% of pipe diameter to'h inch . No. 4 0 to 10 30 to 100 No. 200 0 to 5 0 to 50 Minimum Compaction Tamp to spring line to 90% of Standard Proctor Requirement fill voids below pipe placed at +/- 3% of Optimum haunches Moisture The ma�amum particle size of pipe bedding shoutd generally not exceed 1�/z inches or 10 percent of � the nominal pipe diameter, whichever is less. Bedding for small pipe such as service lines should generally have a maximum particle size not exceeding 3/a inch. Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic material, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious material. LJ � �' � � � � � , Screened rock used for waterline or sewer pipe bedding should be crushed, angular material that meets the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IA bedding material. The material should have not more than 10 percent passing the No. 4(4.75 millimeter) screen, and less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 (75 micrometer) screen. The bedding should be tamped under the haunches of the pipe to spring line. Where future excavation is anticipated, the sloughing properties of screened rock when unconfined should be taken into consideration. The District may require soil or select import. Where groundwater may be present, the use of screened rock for bedding is prohibited. Compacted pipe bedding should meet the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IB, Class II, or Class III bedding material. The material should have a minimum of 30 percent passing the No. 4 screen and less than 50 percent passing the No. 200 screen. Class 6 aggregate base course per CDOT Table 703.2 conforms to this gradation criteria. The bedding should be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent at +/- 3 percent of optimum moisture content, referencing Standard Proctor (ASTM D698, AASHTO T99). Material containing 10 to 30 percent passing the No. 4 screen can be used with the following considerations: materials in #his range can be expected to possess properties similar to screened rock except that compaction will be required and materials in this range may be too free-draining to be testable for compaction by ASTM D698. Flow-fill, a'h sack (50 pounds) per cubic yard lean concrete mix as defined in the CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 206.02, may be used as bedding where a combination of ease of placement, low permeabiliry, and unconfined stability is desired. Additional Requirements: -Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic materials, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious ma#erials. -Flow-fi11 as specified by CDOT 1999 Standard Specffications, Section 206.02, may be used with District approval. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 331100 - 7 Water Distribution Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction -Ductile Iron Pipe may be required to be encased in loose polyethylene in conformance with ANSUAWWA C105/A21.5 installation methods, unless site soils and proposed bedding materials are determined to be non-corrosive to iron pipe when evaluated according to Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5. -Materials not meeting these requirements shall be used only with prior written approval of the District. In specific areas, such as where access is extremely limited, the use of on-site materials may be allowed, and, when used, must be on-site 1'h inches minus well-graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written District approval. 2.07 TRENCH BACKFILL Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No boulders over six inches (6") in diameter in top twelve inches (12") of trench. No backfill material with boulders larger than twelve inches (12") in diameter shall be backfilled in the trench. 2.08 NON-DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE The installation of "blue" marking tape is required on all water mains and service lines. The tape shall be installed approximately twenty-four inches (2') above the main or line. The tape shall meet the following specifications: A. Four (4) mil thick PVC material. B. Solid "blue" color with black lettering C. Six inches (6") in width 2.09 CONCRETE MATERIAL � � � � � �� A. General: All materials shall be furnished from sources agreed to by the Engineer. � B. Cement: AST.M C-150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. � C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mibng or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, � alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.10 CONCRETE MIX a A. Design Mix 1. Proportions Cement 5-1 /2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate - 43% Water - 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" ma�amum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 1100 - 8 Water Distribution Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � ' , � � � B. C. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mibng of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. Ready-Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not ptasfic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. � 2.11 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT Install polyethylene encasement on all Ductile Iron Pipe unless noted otherwise on plans. A � polyethylene encasement material shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C105, with the following additional requirements. The raw material used to manufacture po�yethylene film shall be Type 1, Class A, Grade E-1, in accordance with ASTM D-1248. � ' � � � � � � � � � , 2.12 THRUST BLOCKS AND ANCHORS Concrete thrust blocks and anchors shall be sized for the internal pipe pressure and soil bearing capacity. Standard sizes and shapes of thrust blocks and anchors are shown on the details. No thrust block shall be smaller than that size required for an eight inch (8") main. Thrust reaction blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than 1 part cement to 2-1 /2 parts sand and 5 parts stone, and having a compressive strength of not less than 3000 P.S.I. after 28 days. Megalug joint restraint devices shall be used in conjunction with thrust blocks. All thrust blocks shall be formed in accordance with the local water district's specifications. See detail. The Water District shall inspect all thrust blocks. 2.13 PRESSURE REDUCER VAULTS All proposed installations shall be "factory-builY' vault including the appropriately sized main line inlet and outlet. PRV installations shall include an appropriately sized manual bypass with an approved gate valve; iwo (2) appropriately sized CLA-VAL Model 90G-01 ABK pressure reducing valves with approved isolating gate valves. All vault installations shatl include a 120/240-volt power panel; all assembled, tested and painted. Minimum dimensions of the vault shall be 7' (H) x 8' (L) x 6' (W), skid — mounted capsule with Bilco Model MNB-50 access hatch, ladder, fluorescent light, gravity drain in sump, dehumid'rfier, 240 volt heater, exhaust fan and two (2) magnesium anode packs. All proposed vault installations must be pre- approved by the local water district. 2.14 CASING SPACERS Carrier pipes to be installed inside casings shatl be installed with self-restraining casing spacers. Casing spacers shall provide axial thrust restraint to prevent pipe joint separation during and after installation. They shall also provide dielectric insulation between the carrier pipe and the casing and facilitate installation of the carrier pipe into the casing. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 331100 - 9 Water Distribution Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING . Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. Rock Trench Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authoriry having jurisdiction granted. All e�losives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the locat authoriry. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24-hour not'rfication to Engineer. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheefing and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to e�asting ufilities, to ewsting structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 BEDDING tnstall in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION � � � � � LJ � � � A. General: Deliver, handle, store, and install in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's � recommendations and the applicable paragraphs of AWWA C600, AWWA C603, and ASTM D2321. Carefully examine all pipe and fittings for cracks and other defects. Groove in bells of ductile iron pipe to be full and continuous or be rejected. Remove all foreign matter from interior and ends of pipe and appurtenances before lowering into trench. Carefutly lower all pipe, fittings, valves, and hydrants into trench piece by piece to prevent damage to pipe materials, protective coatings, and linings. Do not dump into trench. If pipe cannot be lowered into trench and into place without getting earth into it, place heavy, tightly woven canvas bag over each end and leave in place until joints are made. During pipe laying, place no debris, tools, clothing or other materials in pipe. Keep trenches free from water during pipe laying and jointing. Dewatering of trench considered as incidental to construction an all costs included in contract prices. When pipe Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 1100 -10 Water Distribution Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction LJ � � LJ � � � � � � � LJ � � � LJ � Q C. �� laying is not in progress, close open ends of pipe by watertight plug, or other means approved by Engineer. Deflection of Pipe: Pipe deflections are discouraged. Do not exceed 50% of the deflection limits for each type of pipe as recommended by pipe manufacturer. Pipe Jointing General: Cut pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces in neat and workmanlike manner with no damage to pipe or lining. Leave smooth end at right angles to a�as of pipe. Mechanical Joints: Thoroughly clean last 8" of spigot and inside bell to remove oil, grit, tar, and other foreign matter. Coat spigot and gasket with solution furnished by pipe manufacturer. Slip cast-iron gland on spigot end of pipe with lip extension of gland toward spigot end. Coat gasket with joint lubricant and place on spigot end of pipe to be laid, with thick edge toward gland. Push entire section forward to seat spigot in bell of pipe in place. Press gasket into place within bell, even around entire joint. Move ductile-iron gland along pipe into position for bolting all nuts with suitable torque wrench. Alternately tighten nuts 180 degrees apart to produce equal pressure on all parts of gland. Pipe Size Inches 3" 4"-24" Bolt Size Inches 5/8 3/4 Range of Torque Ft.-Lb. 45 - 60 75 - 90 Push-on Joints: Thoroughly clean exterior 4" of pipe spigot and inside of adjoining bell to remove all oil, grit, tar, and other matter. Place gasket in bell with large round side of gasket pointing inside pipe bell. Apply thin film joint lubricant over gasket's entire exposed surface. Wipe spigot end of pipe clean and insert into bell to contact gasket. Force pipe into bell to manufacturer's jointing mark. 4. Flanged Joints: Thoroughly clean faces of flanges of all oil, grease, and other material. Thoroughly clean rubber gaskets and check for proper fit. Assure proper seating of flanged gasket. Tighten blots so pressure on gasket is uniform. Use torque wrenches to insure uniform bearing. If joints leak when hydrostatic test applied, remove and replace gaskets and retighten bolts. Thrust Restraint: Concrete thrust blocks are required. � 3.05 SANITARY SEWER CROSSING � � � � A. , Normat Conditions: Whenever possible lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18" between invert of water main and crown of sewer. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use following: Sewer passing over or less than 18" under water main. InstaA continuous watertight pressure pipe C900 PVC or Yelomine until the water and sewer pipe are separated by more than 10 feet horizontally and or more than 18 inches vertically transition couplings to be HARCO or equivalent. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 1100 -11 Water Oistribution � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 3.06 TAPPING PIPE Use experienced workmen with tools in good repair and proper adapters for size of pipe being tapped. Drilling and tapping machines proposed for tapping directly into pipe agreed to by Engineer. If tap is improperly installed with leakage around threads or, in opinion of Engineer, connection is substandard, provide tap saddle at Contractors' e�ense. If damage to pipe cannot be repaired by saddle, install approved repair sleeve over injured portion and retap at Contractor's expense. Install corporation stop and couplings, flanged coupling adapters, and service saddles to provide clean seat. Wipe gaskets clean before installation. Fle�able couplings and flanged coupling adapter gaskets may be lubricated for installation on pipe ends. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Tighten bolts progressively from opposite sides until all bolts have uniform tightness. Use torque wrenches or other approved equipment. 3.07 SERVICE LINE Place true to line and grade in accordance with drawings, from main line to curb stop or meter, in shortest direct route by continuous section of pipe with no splices. Locate 10' horizontally from all sewer lines. Terminate near center of each lot or as shown on drawings. 3.08 VALVES AND HYDRANTS Carefully inspect valve and hydrant before installation. Clean interior. Operate valve and hydrant to determine parts in proper working order, with valves seating and drain valve operating properly. Set plumb and securely braced into place. Set hydrant with bury line at finish grade, with hose nozzles parallel to and pumper nozzle facing pavement, at least 6" behind curb or sidewalk and 18" from property line or as shown on drawings. Provide drainage pit having 9 square feet of surface area and 2' of depth below seep hole. Backfill pits with 1-1 /2" washed rock to 6" above barrel drain hole. Provide thrust blocking at bowl of each hydrant as shown on drawings. Do not obstruct barrel drain hole. Hydrants and valves backfilled by installing 1-1/2" aggregate road base to subgrade. Valve boxes centered and plumb over the operating nut. Valve boxes supported by bricks or other means to prevent any shock or stress transmitted to pipe or valve. Set valve box covers to just below subgrade level to prevent damage during construction of surfacing if applicable. Adjust to grade of surfacing. . 3.09 PLUGGING DEAD ENDS Install standard plugs or caps at dead ends of all fittings and pipe in accordance with drawings. tf dead end is not to be extended, place water service line as near dead end as practical. 3.10 VAULTS Construct vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. 3.11 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantiiy as is required for immediate use. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 1100 -12 Water Distribution Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � � � � �� u LJ� LJ � t � � C. Curing: P�otect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, from rain, and flowing water for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by � Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. � � � � � � i � � � � U � � �� 3.12 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use bedding material for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover mate�ial shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting attop of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1' above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a densiry of 85 to 90%, AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of T�ench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No boulders over 6" in diameter in top 12" trench. No backfill material with boulders larger than 12" in diameter. Carefully lower boulders larger than 12" in diameter into trench until backfill is 4' over top of pipe. 3.13 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: Predominantly cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compact uniformly throughout each lift to 95%, AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to 2% of optimum. 2. Predominately of rock, to 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. P�acing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than ma�amum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.14 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with a cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of e�asfing surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6" undisturbed subgrade 1ip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these Specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.15 FIELD GIUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 1100 -13 Water Oistribution , Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. Hydrostatic Testing General: Make pressure and leakage tests on all newly laid pipe. Test finro or more valved sections not to exceed 1000 feet. Test first section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Lay no additional pipe until first test section has passed tests. Furnish the following equipment and materials for tests, unless otherwise directed by Engineer: 2 Graduated containers 2 Pressure gauges 1 Suitable hose and suction pipe as required 2. Testing Procedure: Test each 1000 feet of line installed while trench is partially backfilled and joints are left e�osed for examination for leaks. Do not conduct pressure tests until 48 hours after placement of concrete thrust blocks. After pipe has been partially backfilled, slowly let water into line. Vent to allow air in line to be released. Flush line as necessary for cleaning. Leave water in line for 24 hours prior to pressure test. Test at 1-1 /2 times working pressure, calculated for low point of test section, or 150 psi, whichever is greater. Valve off pump and hold pressure in line for test. Test for finro hours or as agreed to by Engineer. At end of test, operate pump until test pressure is again attained. Calibrate container of water for pump suction to determine amount of water to replace leakage. � � � � LJ � � 3. Leakage Allowance: Leakage is quantity of water necessary to refill line at end of test � period. No installation will be accepted until leakage is less than: ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE PER 1000' OF PIPE IN GPH Avg. Test Nominal Pipe Diameter - in. Pressure psi 6 8 10 12 18 200 0.64 0.85 1.06 1.28 1.91 175 0.59 0.80 0.99 1.19 1.79 150 0.55 0.74 0.92 1.10 1.66 125 0.50 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.51 100 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.35 'For pipe with 18' nominal lengths. To obtain recommended allowable leakage for pipe with 20' nominal lengths, multiply the leakage calculated from the table by 0.9. If pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters, allowable leakage will be sum of computed leakage for each size. Reduce allowable leakage proportionately for sections less than 1000 ft. 3.16 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING A. General: In accordance with AWWA C601. Acceptable chlorine disinfectants are calcium hypochlorite granules and sodium hypochlorite solutions. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 1100 -14 Water Distribution Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �- � � �' 1 �J ' � �� l Ij � � � � B. Chlorine-water solution method: Chlorine Required to Produce 25 mg/L Concentration in 100 feet of Pipe - by Diameter Pipe 100 Percent 1 Percent Diamete� Chlorine Chlorine Solution In. Lb. Gal. 4 6 8 10 12 16 .013 .030 .054 .085 .120 .217 .16 .36 .65 1.02 1.44 2.60 Induce chlorine solution into pipeline at a continuous feed rate to attain a concentration of 25 Mg/L free chlorine. C. Chlorination Test: Assure valves are closed on existing system to prevent chlorine solution flowing into existing system. Retain 25 mg/L chlorinated water in pipeline for minimum of 24 hours. During retention period operate all valves and hydrants to disinfect. At end of 24 hour period, chlorine in system to be no less than 10 mg/L throughout length tested. When section being tested meets 10 mg/L chlorine after 24 hours, flush main. Water samples taken shall show no coliform organisms. If water in pipe does not meet the governing health agency requirements, �epeat disinfection procedure, at Contractor's expense, until requirements are met. Furnish acceptance forms from governing agency to Engineer. 3.17 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 1100 -15 Water Distribution � Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Constructio� (This page intentionally left blank) Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 1100 -16 Water Distribution Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � O � � � �] LJ � � � � � � � � �� a SECTION 33 3100 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfitl, bedding, and installation of pipe, manholes, service wyes, service lines, force mains and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Flexible Pavement: Section 32 1200 C. Definitions: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a CAT 375 backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for sewer lines as approved by the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for pipe, fittings, and manholes; or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat, falls below 35 degrees F, and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 deg�ees F at time of placing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 4"-15", ASTM D3034, Type PSM, SDR 35; 18"-27", ASTM F679. Push-on joints and molded rubber gaskets. Maximum pipe length 13'. B. Ductile Iron: AWWA C151, Class 52. Push-on joints. Poly-lined or Griffin "Sewper CoaY' ASTM A746. C. Yelomine: Restrained joint PVC pressure pipe and fittings. Conform to ASTM D2241 "Standard Specifications for PVC, pressure rated pipe (SDR Series)". Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 3100 -1 Sanitary Sewer Vail, Colorado 04 Pebruary 2011 Construction D. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Couplings: AWWA C900, working pressure 200 psi with push-on joints ASTM D1869. Transition coupling from SDR35 to C-900, pressure pipe shall be Harco Manufacturing 337-080, Class 150 and ASTM3139. All spigot ends shall be beveled to manufacturer's spec'rfications. 2.02 MANHOLES A. � Manhole bases: Precast concrete ASTM C478. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete (wetcast) with the lip outside with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of internal diameter. Cones eccentric. C. Manhole Rings and Covers: Cast iron, ASTM A48 with a flat lid with the lettering "Sewer" cast on the covet. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 255 Ibs., machined to fit securely. Non-rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. HS20 traffic loading. D&L A-1043 or accepted equal. Q L� F Manhole Grade Rings: Precision Cover Systems, Inc. (PCSI) fully adjustable manhole covers with variable grade rings that adjust to meet different roadway heights and grades will be installed where required by District. Manhole Steps: Two non-skid grooves in surface of step and capable of a vertical load of 800 pounds and a pullout toad of 1500 pounds (ASTM-C478), six inches (6") from face of manhole. The steps shall meet industry standards or equal and be plastic coated. Manhole Joint Sealant: Double Rub-R-Nek with primer. One inch (1 ") on 48"-inch diameter manholes; 1'/r inch on all larger numbers. 2.03 BEDDING Two types of bedding material are allowed: Screened rock and soil or select imported material, meeting the following gradation specification table: Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight Screened Rock Soil or Select Import 1'h inch maximum, and 100 100 maximum of 10% of pipe diameter to'/z inch No. 4 0 to 10 30 to 100 No. 200 0 to 5 0 to 50 Minimum Compaction Tamp to spring line to 90% of Standard Proctor Ftequirement fill voids below pipe placed at +/- 3% of Optimum haunches Moisture The maximum particle size of pipe bedding should generally not exceed 1 YZ inches or 10 percent of the nominal pipe diameter, whichever is less. Bedding for small pipe such as service lines should generally have a ma�dmum particle size not exceeding 3/a inch. Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic material, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious material. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 3100 - 2 Sanitary Sewer Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � O � � _J � � LJ � � � � � � , � � � � � � � � � ' �I I �. � � � � r � 1 Screened rock used for waterline or sewer pipe bedding should be crushed, angular material that meets the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IA bedding material. The material should have not more than 10 percent passing the No. 4(4.75 millimeter) screen, and less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 (75 micrometer) screen. The bedding should be tamped under the haunches of the pipe to spring line. Where future excavation is anticipated, the sloughing properties of screened rock when unconfined should be taken into co�sideration and the use of screened rock is prohibited in these applications. See sewer pipe bedding detail (S-10). Compacted pipe bedding shou�d meet the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IB, Class II, or Class III bedding material. The material should have a minimum of 30 percen# passing the No. 4 screen and less than 50 percent passing the No. 200 screen. Class 6 aggregate base course per CDOT Table 703.2 conforms to this gradation criteria. The bedding should be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent at +/- 3 percent of optimum moisture content, referencing Standard Proctor (ASTM D698, AASHTO T99). Material containing 10 to 30 percent passing the No. 4 screen can be used with the following considerations: materials in this range can be expected to possess properties similar to screened rock except that compaction will be required and materials in this range may be too free-draining to be testable for compaction by ASTM D698. Flow-fill, a'/z sack (50 pounds) per cubic yard lean concrete mix as defined in the CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 206.02, may be used as bedding where a combination of ease of placement, low permeability, and unconfined stability is desired. Additional Requirements: -Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic materials, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious materials. -Flow-fill as specified by CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications, Section 206.02, may be used with District approvat. -Ductile Iron Pipe may be required to be encased in loose polyethylene in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 installation methods, unless site soils and proposed bedding materials are determined to be non-corrosive to iron pipe when evaluated according to Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5. -Materials not meeting these requirements shall be used only with prior written approval of the . District. In specific areas, such as where access is extremely limited, the use of on-site materiats may be allowed, and, when used, must be on-site 1'h inches minus well-graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written District approval. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIAL I� � C. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the District. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partiallyset or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mi�ang or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 3100 - 3 Sanitary Sewer Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate - 43% Water - 5.5 gallons per sack Mabmum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than ten (10) minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready-Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. 2.06 TRACER WIRE Tracer wire shall be ten (10) gauge insulated copper wire and be required on all curve-linear applications. 2.07 MARKETING/LOCATING DISK The District will provide 3M "Green" marking disks to the contractor. The contractor shall ensure their correct installation. 2.08 NON-DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE The installation of "green" marking tape is required on all sewer mains and service lines. The tape shall be installed appro�amately two feet (2') above the main or line. The tape shall meet the following specifications: 1. 4-mil thick PVC material 2. Solid green color with black lettering 3. Six inches (6") in width 2.09 CASING SPACERS Carrier pipes to be installed inside casings shall be installed with self-restraining casing spacers. Casing spacers shall provide a�aat thrust restraint to prevent pipe joint separation during and after installation. They shall also provide dielectric insulation between the carrier pipe and the casing and facilitate installation of the carrier pipe into the casing. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 3100 - 4 Sanitary Sewer Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � � � �-1 � � � � � I� � u i � � , � Restrained casing spacers shall be provided at all pipe joints. In addition, casing spacers shall be installed every ten feet (10') of the pipeline to support the pipe barrel and the weight of its contents. Restrained casing spacers shall be Uni-Flange Series UFRCS1300 or URFCS1390, or an approved equal restrained joint device and Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing Company, Model CCM casing spacers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as appticable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liabiliry for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24-hour notification to Engineer. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safery, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to e�asting utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the District. 3.03 BEDDING Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 UNDERDRAIN A. B. C. Water seeping from trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel underdrain in accordance with drawings. Water flowing in trench bottom: Install underdrain pipe in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4" pipe 1/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with drawings. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings or as directed by Engineer. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center � Vail, Colorado K�I�i[�Z�� Sanitary Sewer 04 February 2011 Construction 3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Pipe installation may be lamped daily by Engineer. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at Contractor's expense. ! � [! B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations, continuously upgrade. Bell ends face upgrade. Prior to making joints, clean and dry all surfaces. Use lubricants in conformance with � manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt from entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. C. Wyes and Risers for Senrice Connections: Angle upward so 1/8 bend connected to fitting will � make service line invert equa! to inside crown of sewer main. Where elevation of top of service is more than 12' below finished grade, install riser pipe as directed by Engineer. 3.06 WATER LINE CROSSING A. : Normal Conditions: Whenever possible, lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18" between invert of water main and crown of sewer. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use following: Sewer passing over or less than 18" under water main. Install continuous watertight pressure pipe C900 PVC or Yelomine until the water and sewer pipe are separated by more than 10 feet horizontally and or more than 18 inches vertically transition couplings to be HARCO or equivalent. 3.07 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. Extend concrete manhole base at least 8" below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to ma�amum of 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert when manhole is set. Construct side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts shall be smooth and clean with no obstructions, allowing insertion of an e�andable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient quantity so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps awayfrom roadway ditch. B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of finished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction, set top of cone so ma�amum of six, two-inch reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. 3.08 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE Make connections to e�asting manholes, where no pipe is stubbed out, in similar manner as new manhole. Break small opening in e�asting manhole as necessary to insert new pipe and attain watertight seal. Chip e�asting concrete bench inside manhole to provide enough thickness for mortar bed to make new smooth continuous invert. Place e�andable waterstop around portion of sewer pipe inserted into e�asting manhole. Use e�andable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. 3.09 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LINES Place true to line and grade in accordance with drawings, from main line to house service, in shortest direct route. Locate 10' from all water lines. Terminate 5' from lowest corner of lot or as shown on drawings. Where wyes have not been installed in main sewer, tap by machine drilling hole in main, Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 3100 - 6 Sanitary Sewer Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � n �' � O � � � � � � � ' ' � � sized to fit saddle for service line. Each wye or drilled tap and saddle shall be inspected prior to backfilling. Service line minimum grade of 1/4" per foot. If service line is to be stopped at property line, place 6-foot steel fence post at end, extending 2' above finished ground. Place watertight plug in end of service line. 3.10 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consotidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vib�ated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not�retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remiwng with or without additional cement, aggregate or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, and flowing water, � for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect e�osed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediatelyto provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. ' � � � � � � , � � � I� � 3.11 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use bedding material for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1' above top of pipe for entire trench width. Place in I'rfts to a density of 90% AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12" of trench. No backfill material with rocks larger than 12" in diameter. Carefully lower rocks up to 12" in diameter into trench. 3.12 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compacted uniformly throughout each lift to 95% AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shaH be 0 to 2%of optimum. 2. Predominately of rock 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than mabmum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 3100 - 7 Vail, Colorado Sanitary Sewer 04 February 2011 Construction 3. � Trenches outside road right-of-way: Compact to 95% AASHTO T99. Moisture � content shall be within 2% of optimum. 3.13 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score e�asting surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements, or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.14 FIELD (�UALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Testing 2 General: Conduct infiltration or exfiltration test for each section between manholes. Test first section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Testing may be required during course of work where infiltration appears to be grater than maximum allowable, or quality of work is questionable. No sewer line will be accepted where water tightness tests show leakage exceeding 200 gallons per inch diameter per mile per day. Flush and clean sewer line prior to testing, wetting pipe, and cleaning out debris. Plug all pipe outlets to resist test pressure. � i � � � � �� Infiltration Test: In high ground water table installation only. Plug upper manhole to � determine leakage in section of line between consecutive manholes. Record quantiry of water collected in time period to calculate infiltration rate. 3. Exfiltration Test by Air: Test each section of pipe between consecutive manholes to determine test duration for section by computation from Air Test Tables. Pressure- holding time is based on an average holding pressure of 3 psi gauge or a drop from 3.5 psi to 2.5 psi gauge. Add air until internal air pressure of sewer line is raised to approximately 4.0 psi gauge. After internal pressure of appro�amately 4.0 psi is obtained, allow time for air pressure to stabilize. Pressure wilt normally show some drop until temperature of air in test section stabilizes. When pressure has stabilized and is at or above starting test pressure of 3.5 psi gauge, commence test. Before starting test, pressure may be allowed to drop to 3.5 psi. Record drop in pressure for test period. If pressure has dropped more than 1.0 psi gauge during test line has failed. Test may be discontinued when prescribed test time has been completed even though 1.0 psi drop has not occurred. ASTM C828 "Low Pressure Air Test for Sanitary Sewers". Pipe Size Time Inches Minutes 4 2-1/2 6 4 8 5 10 6-1 /2 12 7-1 /2 15 9-1 /2 18 12 21 14 24 15-1 /2 Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 3100 - 8 Sanitary Sewer Vail, Colorado 04 Feb�uary 2011 Construction � � � O � , � 3.15 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 3100 - 9 Sanitary Sewer , Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction (This page intentionally left blank) Lionshead Transit Weicome Center 33 3100 -10 Sanitary Sewer Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � �� LJ � � � � � � � � � � � i SECTION 33 4000 STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, manholes, catch basins, inlets, outlets, underdrains, irrigation ditches, channelization, detention storage, siphons and all necessary appurten�nces. B. Definition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered atong trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 Ibs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for: 1. Precast Manholes 2. Precast Catch Basins 3. Frames, Grates, Covers B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. 1.03 JOB COND(TIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F. and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mixshall not be less than 60 degrees F. at time of placing. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Non-Fteinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C14 B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76, circular; ASTM 506, arch; ASTM 507, vertical or horizontal elliptical. Class pipe as shown on drawings. C. Concrete End Section: Same ASTM specification as pipe. Equivalent in area as circular pipe. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 4000 -1 Storm Drainage Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.02 2.03 2.04 D. Corrugated Steel Pipe and Arches: AASHTO M36, gauge as shown on drawings. Bands shall conform to following: Pipe Size Corrugations Number Bolts Inches 2-2/3" x 1/2" 3" x 1" 6-30 7" - 2 ea 36-60 12" 14" 3 ea 66-120 24" 20" 5 ea Thickness of band one gauge less than pipe but not less than 16 gauge. E. Corrugated Steel Pipe End Section: Sizes and dimensions shown on drawings. Materials same as corrugated steel pipe. F. Bituminous Coating: Where required on corrugated steel pipe and fittings, AASHTO M190, Type A, with minimum thickness of 0.03". Coupling bands fully coated. G. HDPE Pipe: Pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular corrugations. AASHTO M294, Type S or ASTM F2306. Class pipe as shown on drawings. H. HDPE Pipe End Sections: Sizes and dimensions shown on drawings. Materials same as HDPE pipe. UNDERDRAIN PIPE A. Corrugated Steel: AASHTO M36 Type III. Holes 3/8" double row each side of pipe for 6"-10" size pipe. Triple row each side of pipe for 12"-21 " pipe. Spaced in center of each depressed corrugation nearest to center pipe. Install hole row each side of pipe for 6"-10" pipe; triple row each side of pipe for 12"-21 " pipe. B. Rigid PVC Schedule 40. C. Flewble Polypropelene or Polyethylene/Hancor. PREFABRICATED INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Corrugated Steel Units: Conform to drawing dimensions, AASHTO M36. Bituminous coating when specified, AASHTO M190, Type A. Steps fabricated into units. B. Precast Concrete Units: In accordance with drawings, ASTM C478 and C789, watl "B", wall thickness 1/12 internal diameter. Steps precast into units. MANHOLE A. Manhole Bases: Precast concrete. Manhole base and first barrier section cast monolithic per ASTM - C478. B. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of internal diameter. Cones eccentric. C. Manhole Ring and Cover: Cast iron, ASTM A48. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 400 Ibs., machined to fit securely. Non-rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 4000 - 2 Storm Drainage Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Constructio� � L� � � � � 2.05 2.06 2.07 2.08 2.09 D. Manhole Steps: Two non-skid grooves in the surface of step and capable of carrying load of 1,000 Ibs. 6" from face of manhole. E. Manhole Joint Sealant: RubberNek. SLOTTED DRAIN AASHTO M36 with grate assembly, ASTM A123. Joint and couplers of ring compression type. Where required, expanded wire mesh attached across top of drain opening. Fittings provided with annular ends for hugger-type bands. FRAMES, GRATES, COVERS, AND STEP Metal units conform to drain dimensions and to following for designated material. A. Gray Iron Castings: AASHTO M105. B. Carbon-Steel Castings: AASHTO M103. C. Ductile Iron Castings: ASTM A536. D. Structural Steel: AASHTO M183 and ASTM A283, Grade B. Galvanizing, where specified, AASHTO M111. BEDDING A. Pipe and culvert - roadbase, percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 3/4",100; No.4, 30-65; No. 8, 25-55; No. 200, 3-12. B. Underdrain - washed gravel: percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 1",100%; 3/4", 95-100%; No.4, 0-5%. CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: All materials furnished from sou�ces approved by Engineer. B. Cement: ASTM C150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps, caked cement and have been exposed to inclement weather shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mi�ang or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix: 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1 /2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate 43% Water 5.5 Gallons per sack Ma�dmum size aggregate 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" mabmum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5%-7% � Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 4000 - 3 Storm Drainage , Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. Job Mixed Concrete: Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue miwng of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete: Proportioned, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it �eaches project shall be rejected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation C. Blasting: In general blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of I'rfe and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour not'rfica�on to Engineer. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM, EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. . 3.03 BEDDING OTHER THAN UNDERDRAINS A. fe� Pipe: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for full width of trench. Culvert: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 6" below bottom of pipe to centerline of pipe for entire width of trench. 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: For new embankments, place fill so width each side of pipe is at least five (5) times pipe diameter. After embankment is placed, proceed with trenching. Begin all pipe installation at downstream end. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduit and outside circumferential laps of fle�able conduit facing upstream. Place flexible conduits with longitudinal laps or seams at sides. B. Corrugated Steel Pipe: Remove all loose excavated materials from bottom of trench and install bedding to required thickness. Install pipe true to line and grade. Install remaining bedding material along sides of pipe to avoid any voids. Repair bituminous coating damage using similar coating material. Lubricate coupler bands. Vertical elongation caused by backfill Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 4000 - 4 Storm Drainage Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction n �.! � � � � I� �J � � � �� LJ � , , � �� , � , � i ��J �� ' ' LJ � � � C. opera#ion shali not exceed 3% of pipe diameter. Compact backfill to 90% AASHTO T99 and continue to 1' over top of pipe. Concrete Pipe: Extend bedding around bell where bell and spigot pipe is used. Place pipe on bedding as shown on drawings. Place remaining bedding along pipe sides with no voids. Compact backfill to 95% AASHTO T99 and continue to 1' over pipe. D. HDPE Pipe: Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ADS recommended installation guidelines, with the exceptions that minimum cover in traffic areas for 24-inch through 48-inch shall be one foot and for 60-inch diameters, the minimum cover shall be 2- feet in single run applications. Backfill for minimum cover situations shall consist of ADS Class 1 or Class 2(minimum 98% SPD) material. E. Underdrain Pipe: 2. 3. General: Install to lines and grades shown on drawings. Extend underdrain material a minimum of 6" over top of pipe. Cover underdrain material for entire width of trench with filter fabric. If shown on drawings, line trench with fabric before installing pipe and underdrain material. Concrete Pipe: Install with bell resting on trench bottom facing up grade, with underdrain material supporting pipe. Corrugated Steel or PVC Pipe: Holes or perforations placed down with maximum 1" underdrain material under pipe. Joint according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 SLOTTED DRAIN INSTALLATION Install in accordance with drawings. Trench as narrow as possible and backfill to create uniform foundation side support. Install true to line and grade. 3.06 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. E�end concrete manhole base at least 8" below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to mabmum of 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert after manhole is set. Construct side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts shall be smooth and clean with no obstructions, allowing insertion of e�andable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient quantiry, so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps awayfrom roadway ditch. B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of finished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction, set top of cone so maximum of six - two inch thick reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. 3.07 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE Make connections to e�asting manholes, where no pipe is stubbed out, in similar manner as new manhole. Break small opening in ebsting manhole as necessary to insert new pipe and attain watertight seal. Chip e�asting concrete bench inside manhole to provide enough thickness for mortar bed to make new smooth continuous invert. Place e�andable waterstop around portion of sewer pipe inserted into existing manhole. Use expandable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 4000 - 5 Storm Drainage Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 3.08 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. � �I� � B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing � with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, or flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.09 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4" road base for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1' above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a density of 95% AASHTO T99, at a point 6" above top of pipe. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12" of trench. No backfill material with rocks larger than 12" in diameter. 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or required compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procures are applicable: Compact uniformly throughout each lift to 95% AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to 2% of optimum. Predominantly of rock, to 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than ma�amum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES A. General: Cast-in-place concrete conforming to dimensions shown on the drawings and accurate to tolerances of 1/4". Install forms so all finished lines will be true and straight. Install reinforcing steel with the spacing between the forms and between bars as shown on drawings. Keep excavation dry during construction. Compaction requirements same as above. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 4000 - 6 Storm Drainage Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � f_� � u � � � u � � �_7 u 1 ' � B. Inlets and Outlets: Either cast-in-place or precast units, in acco�dance with drawings. When required, set castings accurately to grade with adjustment courses of brick in full mortar beds. Construct pipe inverts or smooth concrete inverts same size as pipe up to centerline of pipe, with bench to stand on. C� � Frames, Grates, Covers, and Steps: Install accurately according to drawings. Anchor castings in place and set in adjustment mortar to assure firm foundation. Trash Guards: Install in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. ' 3.12 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing � surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to � 95% AASHTO T180 moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these spec'rfications. Compact asphaft to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. ' ' 1 ' �J n �,I '�� ' � , IIl LJ S 3.13 FIELD (IUALRY CONTROL Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. 3.14 TESTING For HDPE and concrete pipe perform an exfiltration test. Plug pipe outlets and fill the system with water from structu�e to structure and allow system to stabilize for 24 hours and measure the water level. Then measure the water level again in 24 hours. 200-gal/in. dia./mi./day is acceptable. 3.15 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 4000 - 7 Vail, Colorado Storm Drainage 04 February 2011 Construction (This page intentionally left blank) Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 4000 - 8 Storm Drainage Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction � � � �J � �J a `J � [I �J � � � � SECTION 33 8100 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION, CONDUITS, AND GAS SYSTEMS (Shallow Utilities) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, rock excavation, blasting, rock disposal, dewatering, backfill, bedding, compaction, installation of conduits, vaults, pads and all necessary appurtenances and coordination with the telephone, cable television, electric and gas companies. B. Definitions: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force 35,000 Ibs each, and requiring drilling and blasting. C. Utility Company Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications of the telephone company, the cable television company, the efectric company and the gas company. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the systems they install by each of the respective utility companies. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construcfion materials for pipe, fittings, and vaults; or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat, falls below 35 degrees F, and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mixshall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. B. C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 2"-8", Schedule 40 PVC. Electric rated for electric application. Electric primary conduit supplied by Holy Cross Energy. Gas pipe to be supplied and placed by gas company. 2.02 VAULTS All switchgear, transformer, splice vaults, pads, and bases to be supplied by Holy Cross Energy. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 8100 -1 Shatlow Utilities Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction 2.03 2.04 2.05 BEDDING A. Granular material - 3/4" screened rock. B. On-site 1-1/2" minus well graded screened materia�, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written approval of the utility company and Engineer. CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the Utility Companies. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate - 43% Water - 5.5 gallons per sack Ma�amum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days . 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mi�ng of each batch for not less than ten (10) minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 8100 - 2 Shallow Utilities Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction , ' ' � ' , ' , �I � , , � ' ' ' �� , i PART 3 EXECUTION K�SiI.��►Ld`.[L`[� . Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Btasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authoriry having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour notification to Owner, Engineer and Fire Department. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to e�asting utilities, to e�asting structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 BEDDING Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 3" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 UNDERDRAIN A. B. C. Water seeping from trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel underdrain in accordance with drawings. Water flowing in trench bottom: Install underdrain pipe in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4" pipe 1/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with d�awings. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings or as directed by Engineer. 3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at Contractor's expense. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 8100 - 3 Shallow Utilities Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations, continuously upgrade. Beli ends face upgrade. Prior to making joints, clean and dry all surfaces. Use lubricants in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt from entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. 3.06 PADS AND VAULTS Install pads and vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. 3.07 PULL STRING Pull string shall be labeled to identify which utility company or spare conduit the use of the conduit is intended for. 3.08 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. � �� LJ B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing � with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, and flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediatelyto provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.09 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4" screened rock or on-site screened material (if approved by Engineer) for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwardsto above top of pipe for entire trench width. Place in lifts to a density of 90% AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12" of trench. No backfill material with rocks larger than 12" in diameter. Carefully lower rocks up to 12" in diameter into trench. 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compacted uniformly throughout each lift to 95% AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be o to 2%of optimum. Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 8100 - 4 Shallow Utilities Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction �J � � � � � � � Ll , ' , 2. Predominately of rock 12" in diameter: Piace in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.11 PAVEMENT REMOVAL IWD REPLACEMENT � Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of e�asting surface and aggregate base course leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements, or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course ' to 95% AASHTO T180 moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. ' 3.12 FIELD GIUALITY CONTROL ' , ' ' � ' ' � � il� � , , A. i� Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. Testing General: Conduct testing in accordance with procedures approved bythe appropriate utility company or as directed by engineer. 3.13 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Remove and dispose of all waste material off site. END OF SECTION Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 8100 - 5 Vail, Colorado Shallow Utilities 04 February 2011 Construction (This page left intentionally blank) Lionshead Transit Welcome Center 33 8100 - 6 Shallow Utilities Vail, Colorado 04 February 2011 Construction ' � � � � �J � a � � � � L-1 � � LJ � '